Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

3. Sūrat Āl ʿImrān

The Qurʾān · Sūra 3: Āl ʿImrān · 200 verses · 73 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

200 verses. Medinan. It takes its name from a construct that occurs in verse 33: وَءَالَ عِمْرَٰنَwa āla ʿImrān, "and the family of ʿImrān". The construct occurs only once in the sūra; but from the place where it occurs the sūra stays inside that family for thirty verses: the wife of ʿImrān, Mary (Maryam), Zechariah (Zakariyyā), John (Yaḥyā), Jesus (ʿĪsā).

This sūra is the continuation of al-Baqara

This has to be recorded at the outset, because it settles what is not repeated as one reads the sūra.

The table below is not interpretation but an inventory of facts verifiable from the two texts:

Factal-BaqaraĀl ʿImrān
Opening lettersAlif-lām-mīm (2/1)Alif-lām-mīm (3/1)
ٱللَّهُ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ ٱلْحَىُّ ٱلْقَيُّومُ2/255 — in the middle of the sūra3/2 — at the head of the sūra
Qibla, pilgrimage, Kaʿba2/125-129, 2/142-1503/96-97short, in the form of a reminder
Debate with the People of the Book2/40-141a long block3/64-99the second block
The identity of Abraham2/130-1413/65-68
The prohibition of ribā2/275-281detailed3/130a single verse, a reminder
ClosingRabbanā lā tuʾākhidhnā… (2/286) — a prayerRabbanā… fa'fu ʿannā (3/193-194) — a prayer
Final commandFa'nṣurnā ʿala'l-qawmi'l-kāfirīnWa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūn (200)

In the classical sources these two sūras are named together and called al-Zahrāwān — "the two radiant sūras". I record that this naming is widespread; I do not ascribe it word for word to any particular report.

And this has a concrete consequence in this commentary: the roots, concepts and narratives already analysed in al-Baqara will not be told again here. Taqwā, ribā, infāq, al-birr, the qibla, al-ḥurūf al-muqaṭṭaʿa, kun fa-yakūn, al-ʿurwa al-wuthqā, ummatan wasaṭan — all were treated in al-Baqara. Here only what Āl ʿImrān adds to them will be recorded.

The same holds for the passage on Mary and Jesus: in Maryam the prayer of Zechariah, Mary's withdrawal, the annunciation and the birth were treated in detail. The work to be done here is to show the difference between the two tellings — because the telling of the same account in two separate sūras in two separate ways is a datum belonging to the text itself.


The axis of the sūra: how a community is to build itself

The subject of the sūra cannot be said in a single word; but it can be shown from the text that it gathers around three questions:

1. How is the text to be read? — verse 7: muḥkam and mutashābih. 2. How is one to speak with the other? — verse 64: kalimatin sawāʾin baynanā wa baynakum. 3. How is defeat to be read? — 121-179: the Uḥud block.

And what the three have in common is worth recording — I give this as my own reading: in three separate fields the sūra takes aim at the same error. In reading the text, a person's making the text say his own inclination (7); in speaking with the other side, his failing to see what is shared (64); after a defeat, his looking for the cause outside himself (152-153, 165). In all three the problem is that a person does not see his own share.

The sūra hands that share back three times, in three separate places, explicitly:

VerseSentenceTo whom
7Fa-ammā'lladhīna fī qulūbihim zayghunTo the reader — the inclination is in the one reading
152Ḥattā idhā fashiltum wa tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amri wa ʿaṣaytumTo the community — three verbs, all three theirs
165Qul huwa min ʿindi anfusikumDirectly — "it is from yourselves"

Three sentences doing the same work in three separate fields. This is a weave that can be verified from the text.


The structure of the sūra

The sūra can be divided into seven blocks. The block boundaries are marked either by a change of addressee or by a form of address (yā ahla'l-kitāb, yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū).

BlockVersesSubjectWhat closes the block
I1-32The sending down of the Book, muḥkam and mutashābih, the ornament of this world, the owner of dominion, the limit of friendshipInna'llāha lā yuḥibbu'l-kāfirīn (32)
II33-63The chosen line: the family of ʿImrān, Mary, Zechariah, John, Jesus, the mutual imprecationWa inna'llāha la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm (62)
III64-99Address to the People of the Book: the common word, the identity of Abraham, trust, the covenant of the prophetsWa'llāhu shahīdun ʿalā mā taʿmalūn (98)
IV100-120The inside of the community: iʿtiṣām, a community calling to the good, khayr umma, laysū sawāʾInna'llāha bimā yaʿmalūna muḥīṭ (120)
V121-179The Uḥud block: the setting out at dawn, the faltering, the limit of responsibility, consultation, the slainWa lakum ajrun ʿaẓīm (179)
VI180-189Miserliness, the words "God is poor", the pledge to make the Book plain, testingWa lahum ʿadhābun alīm (188)
VII190-200Ulu'l-albāb, the long prayer, the closing commandsWa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūn (200)

Repetitions within the sūra — countable data

The table below is not interpretation but an inventory of repetitions verifiable from the text.

Root / wordWhereWhat it does
ك-ت-ب (book)3, 7, 19, 20, 23, 48, 64, 65, 69, 70, 71, 72, 75, 78, 79, 81, 98, 99, 100, 110, 113, 119, 145, 184, 186, 187, 199The densest root in the sūra
أهل الكتاب64, 65, 69, 70, 71, 72, 75, 98, 99, 110, 113, 199Twelve occurrences; two of them with a distinguishing caveat (113, 199)
ص-ف-و (iṣṭifāʾ)iṣṭafā (33 — twice), iṣṭafāki (42 — twice)The verb of choosing, four times, in two verses
ن-ذ-رnadhartu (35)The vow — the opening verb of the account
م-ر-ي-م36, 37, 42, 43, 44, 45Mary's name six times
ع-ي-س-ى45, 52, 55, 59, 84Jesus's name five times
ط-و-ع / ع-ص-يaṭīʿu'llāha wa'r-rasūl (32, 132) — ʿaṣaytum (152)Command, command, breach
ن-ص-ر13, 52, 56, 81, 111, 123, 126, 147, 150, 160The root of help — most of them in the Uḥud block
ص-ب-ر17, 120, 125, 142, 146, 186, 200It returns at the end as a command
و-ه-نlā tahinū (139) — mā wahanū (146)The prohibition and the example
ف-ر-قlā tafarraqū (103) — tafarraqū (105)The ban and the breach
ب-ي-ن-ة / ب-ي-نmā jāʾahumu'l-bayyināt (105) — al-bayyināt (183, 184)The coming of the evidence
أ-م-ر ب-ال-م-ع-ر-و-ف104, 110, 114Three times; all three in the same block
ك-ظ-مal-kāẓimīna'l-ghayẓ (134)The only occurrence of this form in the Qurʾān
ش-و-رwa shāwirhum fi'l-amr (159)The only occurrence of this verb in this shape in the Qurʾān
س-و-ي / سَوَآءkalimatin sawāʾin (64) — laysū sawāʾun (113)The same word: common ground, and "they are not all alike"
ل-ب-بūli'l-albāb (7, 190)At the two ends of the sūra
ر-ب-ب (prayer)rabbanā / rabbi — 8, 9, 16, 35, 38, 40, 41, 47, 53, 147, 191, 192, 193, 194Fourteen calls
ح-س-بlā taḥsabanna / lā yaḥsabanna — 169, 178, 180, 188Four times: "let them not suppose"
م-ل-كmālika'l-mulk… al-mulk (26 — four times)Four occurrences in a single verse
و-ل-جtūliju (27 — twice)Īlāj — night and day

The verse-ending

Looking at the ends of the two hundred verses, there is no single dominant sound pattern. The sūra moves in long and composite sentences; the verse-ends fall for the most part on the names of God or on plural verbs: al-ḥakīm, al-akhyār, al-mīʿād, ḥisāb, ʿalīm, baṣīr, shahīd, khabīr, taʿmalūn, tufliḥūn.

What is to be recorded is this, and it is a verifiable fact: verses ending in pairs of names are dense throughout the sūra (al-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm, samīʿun ʿalīm, ghafūrun raḥīm, raʾūfun bi'l-ʿibād), and these pairs are most often chosen to suit the subject of the verse. This is a feature shared by the long-versed Medinan sūras, and it was recorded in al-Baqara.

No claim about numbers or reckoning is being made.

The revelation and its historical place

That the sūra is Medinan is widely agreed among the sources. Two blocks within it rest plainly on a historical ground:

  • Verses 121-179 speak of a battle and of the defeat that followed it. In the classical sources this is identified as Uḥud, and the text itself also refers back to an earlier one (in verse 13, fiʾatayni'ltaqatā).
  • Verses 33-63 speak of a debate with the People of the Book that runs in particular through the position of Jesus; verse 61 (the mutual imprecation) is the most intense point of that debate.

Per the method (Method) I draw a boundary here, and I will keep it throughout the sūra:

One. In the discussions of Uḥud and of the mutual imprecation I do not go into the detail of the reports or into personal names. The verses themselves name no one anywhere — no commander, no tribe, no member of a delegation. This silence of the text will be preserved as a choice.

Two. The sūra contains both severe and laudatory statements about the People of the Book. Verse 113 (laysū sawāʾ — "they are not all alike") is the verse that places all these statements on record, and in this commentary every statement of the sūra concerning the People of the Book will be read together with that caveat. This is not a sensitivity brought in from outside; it is the caveat the sūra itself sets down.

Three. No blanket ruling will be issued about any religious or ethnic group. What the verses describe is attributes; whoever carries the attribute is the one the verse speaks of.

Four. No legal ruling will be issued; no entry will be made into present-day politics.

The basmala was treated in earlier sections; the verses are numbered without it.


3/1-2

الٓمٓ · ٱللَّهُ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ ٱلْحَىُّ ٱلْقَيُّومُ

Alif-lām-mīm · Allāhu lā ilāha illā huwa'l-ḥayyu'l-qayyūm

"Alif-lām-mīm. God — there is no god but He; al-Ḥayy, al-Qayyūm."

The note on the disconnected letters (al-ḥurūf al-muqaṭṭaʿa) was given in detail at 2/1 in al-Baqara: there is no certain knowledge; the views were tabulated there and no preference was imposed. I do not repeat it here.

And the construct al-Ḥayyu'l-Qayyūm was analysed at 2/255 in al-Baqara (the Verse of the Throne). In summary: ḥayy — living; qayyūm is an intensive form not from ك-و-م but from the root ق-و-م: the one who stands of Himself and holds up everything else.

Here I add what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone — it is a difference of position, and it is verifiable:

SūraWhere the sentence standsWhat comes before it
al-Baqara 2/255The middle of the sūraAfter a long block of rulings and narrative
Āl ʿImrān 3/2The second verse of the sūraOnly the opening letters

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in al-Baqara this sentence is a stopping place inside a long narration; in Āl ʿImrān it is the ground. Everything the sūra will speak of across two hundred verses — book, family, war, defeat — it builds on top of this sentence. And the third verse, immediately after this name, will name the Book.


3/3-4

نَزَّلَ عَلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ بِٱلْحَقِّ مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا بَيْنَ يَدَيْهِ وَأَنزَلَ ٱلتَّوْرَىٰةَ وَٱلْإِنجِيلَ · مِن قَبْلُ هُدًى لِّلنَّاسِ وَأَنزَلَ ٱلْفُرْقَانَ

Nazzala ʿalayka'l-kitāba bi'l-ḥaqqi muṣaddiqan limā bayna yadayhi wa anzala'l-Tawrāta wa'l-Injīl · Min qablu hudan li'n-nāsi wa anzala'l-furqān

"He has sent down the Book to you, confirming what was before it, with the truth. And the Torah and the Gospel too — before this, as guidance for people — He sent down. And He sent down the furqān."

Two verbs: نَزَّلَ and أَنزَلَ

Two different forms of the same root (ن-ز-ل), in the same sentence, for two different objects.

VerbFormIts object
نَزَّلَForm II (tafʿīl)al-Kitāb — the Qurʾān
أَنزَلَForm IV (ifʿāl)al-Tawrāt and al-Injīl, then al-Furqān

The distinction recorded in the classical sources is this: Form II conveys a gradual descent (piece by piece, at intervals), Form IV a descent all at once.

This distinction was treated at 47/20 in Muḥammad, and this caveat was entered there: the distinction is transmitted in the classical sources; but it has also been pointed out that it is not applied consistently everywhere in the Qurʾān. I rely on that treatment and keep the same caveat.

The usage here agrees with that distinction, and this is a verifiable fact: the Qurʾān was spread over twenty-three years; the Torah and the Gospel are named in the verse in the past tense, as completed. But I do not establish this as a rule.

مُصَدِّقًا لِّمَا بَيْنَ يَدَيْهِ

The root ص-د-ق: to be true. The active participle of Form II: muṣaddiq — the one that confirms, that verifies.

And the construction must be recorded: limā bayna yadayh — "what is between his two hands". In Arabic this idiom conveys what stands in front, what is at hand. The sense "the earlier books" therefore comes from the idiom.

I record this as an observation: the verse places the newly come text not against the earlier one but on top of it. And this is the ground of the call to common ground that will be made in verse 64 of the sūra — because the word to be spoken there lies along the same line.

ٱلْفُرْقَان

The root ف-ر-ق: to separate. Furqān is that which separates.

The word was treated in detail at 8/29 in al-Anfāl and in al-Furqān. I do not repeat it here; in summary: the word is used both for a text and for a capacity to distinguish.

And there is a question about the occurrence here, and the classical commentaries differ over it:

ReadingWhat al-Furqān isGround
1The Qurʾān itself — named by a second nameThe Qurʾān uses this name of itself elsewhere (al-Furqān 25/1)
2A quality shared by all revelation — every one of them separatesThe verb wa anzala being repeated a third time
3The capacity to tell truth from falsehoodAt al-Anfāl 8/29 the word occurs not as a text but as something given

All three readings are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

وَٱللَّهُ عَزِيزٌ ذُو ٱنتِقَامٍ — and the verse closes the matter of the Book with a pair of names. The word intiqām is used in the Qurʾān of God alone, and it means not personal anger but the exacting of what is due; the root ن-ق-م was treated in the series at 44/16 in al-Dukhān.


3/5-6

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ لَا يَخْفَىٰ عَلَيْهِ شَىْءٌ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَلَا فِى ٱلسَّمَآءِ · هُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُصَوِّرُكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْحَامِ كَيْفَ يَشَآءُ

Inna'llāha lā yakhfā ʿalayhi shayʾun fi'l-arḍi wa lā fi's-samāʾ · Huwa'lladhī yuṣawwirukum fi'l-arḥāmi kayfa yashāʾ

"Truly from God nothing on earth or in heaven is hidden. · He it is who shapes you in the wombs as He wills."

The order: earth first, heaven after

The Qurʾān's usual order is al-samāwāt wa'l-arḍ — heaven first. Here it is reversed: fi'l-arḍi wa lā fi's-samāʾ.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and I build no firm ruling on it. In the classical commentaries it is said that this is connected with the following verse: the sixth verse speaks of the womb — that is, of the most hidden place on earth.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the order appears to be built on the degree of hiddenness. What is in heaven is far but visible; what is on earth is near but covered. And the verse puts the covered one first.

يُصَوِّرُكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْحَامِ

The root ص-و-ر: to give a thing its form, to draw a shape. Ṣūra — form. Form II (taṣwīr) conveys repetition and fineness of work.

The root was treated at 59/24 in al-Ḥashr (al-Bāriʾu'l-Muṣawwir) and at 64/3 in al-Taghābun. I do not repeat it here.

The caveat here is worth recording: kayfa yashāʾ — "as He wills". That is, the verse takes as its subject not the source of the form but the disposal of it.

And its position matters — I give this as my own reading: at the thirty-fifth verse the sūra will enter an account that opens with a woman vowing what is in her womb, and that woman will give birth to other than what she expected. The sixth verse thus lays down the ruling of that account forty verses in advance: the form in the womb is not in the hands of the one who wants it.

I record explicitly that this is not being read as a "scientific sign". The verse is not describing embryology; it is saying in whose hands the disposal lies.


3/7

هُوَ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَنزَلَ عَلَيْكَ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ مِنْهُ ءَايَٰتٌ مُّحْكَمَٰتٌ هُنَّ أُمُّ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ وَأُخَرُ مُتَشَٰبِهَٰتٌ

Huwa'lladhī anzala ʿalayka'l-kitāba minhu āyātun muḥkamātun hunna ummu'l-kitābi wa ukharu mutashābihāt; fa-ammā'lladhīna fī qulūbihim zayghun fa-yattabiʿūna mā tashābaha minhu'btighāʾa'l-fitnati wa'btighāʾa taʾwīlih; wa mā yaʿlamu taʾwīlahu illa'llāh; wa'r-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi yaqūlūna āmannā bihī kullun min ʿindi rabbinā; wa mā yadhdhakkaru illā ūlu'l-albāb

"He it is who sent down the Book to you. Part of it is muḥkam verses — they are the mother of the Book; the others are mutashābih. Those in whose hearts is a crookedness pursue what is mutashābih in it, seeking discord and seeking its interpretation. No one but God knows its interpretation. Those firmly rooted in knowledge say: 'We believe in it; all of it is from our Lord.' And none but those who possess the kernel takes heed."


This verse is one of the most important verses of this commentary in point of method. For here the text speaks about how it is itself to be read. And what it says is not a method but a diagnosis: the same text does two different pieces of work in two different hearts.

I shall analyse the verse under six headings: muḥkam, mutashābih, ummu'l-kitāb, zaygh, taʾwīl, and last the question of the pause — that is, where the sentence stops.

مُحْكَمَٰت — root: ح-ك-م

The concrete sense of the root has been recorded many times in the series (al-Dukhān, al-Dhāriyāt, al-Ḥajj, al-Baqara 2/269): ح-ك-م — to prevent, to rein in, to hold in place. And the picture of the root is a tool: حَكَمَة (ḥakama) — the bit put in a horse's mouth. What keeps the animal from swerving.

Hence muḥkam: what has no slack, what cannot be moved, what cannot be slid about.

At 47/20 in Muḥammad the same word was treated as the attribute of a sūra (sūratun muḥkamatun), and this was recorded there:

"An ambiguous word allows everyone to interpret it as he pleases; a muḥkam word does not."

I rely on that treatment.

And at 11/1 in Hūd the same root occurred as a verb: kitābun uḥkimat āyātuhū thumma fuṣṣilat — "a Book whose verses have been made firm, then set out in detail." What was recorded there can be carried over here: iḥkām is the attribute of the Book as a whole; tafṣīl is its being reachable.

And this at once raises a question: if Hūd 11/1 says uḥkimat of the whole Book, why does Āl ʿImrān 3/7 divide the Book in two? I shall take this question up shortly in a table — because the same question arises for mutashābih as well, and there it is sharper.

مُتَشَٰبِهَٰت — root: ش-ب-ه

The root ش-ب-ه: to resemble. Shibh — a likeness. Form VI (tafāʿul): tashābaha — to resemble one another, to resemble so closely as to be confused.

The idea at the centre of the root is not "obscurity" but indistinguishability. Two things resemble each other so closely that which is which cannot be picked out.

And this can be verified from another use of the word in the Qurʾān: at al-Baqara 2/70, in the account of the cow, inna'l-baqara tashābaha ʿalaynā — "the cattle seem alike to us", that is, we cannot tell them apart.

Now the real matter. Mutashābih is used in the Qurʾān of the whole of the Book as well, and this was treated in this commentary.

At 39/23 in al-Zumar this was recorded:

"مُتَشَابِه — root ش-ب-ه: to resemble. Its use here differs from the distinction muḥkam / mutashābih: there the verses whose meaning is closed were meant; here the whole of the Book is named with this adjective. The lexicographers give the sense here as 'its parts holding together, consistent in style and in content'."

I rely on that treatment and separate the two uses in a table. This table is the most important table of this section:

al-Zumar 39/23Āl ʿImrān 3/7
Wordingkitāban mutashābihan mathāniyawa ukharu mutashābihāt
ExtentThe whole of the BookA part of the Book
Is there a counterpartNo — there is no divisionYesmuḥkamāt
SenseIts parts holding together, its style and content consistentIts sense not determinable on its own, open to more than one possibility
What resembles whatIts own parts resemble one anotherTwo senses resemble each other — they cannot be told apart
Evaluative weightPraise — a mark of excellenceNeutral — a condition of the text
Its outcomeA shiver and then a softening (taqshaʿirru… thumma talīnu)It divides in two according to the reader

And the conclusion that follows from the table must be recorded, because it heads off a frequent error: it cannot be said that "the Qurʾān speaks inconsistently about itself" merely because the same word occurs in two places. The sense of the root is the same in both — resemblance. What changes is what resembles what: in al-Zumar the parts resemble one another (harmony); in Āl ʿImrān the senses resemble one another (indistinguishability).

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the same root describes in one place the inner consistency of the text and in the other the reader's inability to decide. And the two do not conflict, because the two look at two different faces of the text — one at the text itself, the other at the distance between the text and the reader.

On what basis are muḥkam and mutashābih separated — the classical explanations

In the classical commentaries the criterion of this distinction is disputed. I tabulate the principal explanations and impose no preference.

#CriterionWhat muḥkam isWhat mutashābih is
1IntelligibilityWhat its wording bears one senseWhat its wording leaves open to more than one sense
2KnowabilityWhat the intellect can reachWhat is known only by report (the hour of the resurrection, the spirit, the detail of the unseen)
3ActionabilityWhat can be acted upon — the rulingsWhat is not tied directly to any act
4The field of transcendenceThe plain statements about GodStatements ascribing human acts and limbs to God (yad, istiwāʾ, wajh)
5The disconnected lettersAll the other versesThe cut letters at the heads of sūras
6AbrogationWhat remains in forceWhat has had its ruling lifted

All these explanations are transmitted in the classical sources. Some of them do not exclude one another; there are also those who say that more than one criterion operates at once.

And it must be recorded with which criterion this distinction has been worked in the series — this is a statement of method: in this commentary the term mutashābih has been used consistently in the fourth sense (statements ascribing human acts to God) and in the fifth sense (the disconnected letters). Examples: al-Fajr 89/22 (wa jāʾa rabbuka), al-Ḥadīd 57/29 (bi-yadi'llāh), al-Ḥāqqa 69/17 (the bearing of the throne), Yāsīn (aydīnā), Qāf and al-Baqara (the disconnected letters). And in all those places the same stance was kept: the two attitudes (tafwīḍ and taʾwīl) were tabulated and no preference was imposed.

That is, this verse names a piece of work the series has already been doing.

هُنَّ أُمُّ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ — "the mother of the Book"

The root أ-م-م: origin, source, that to which one returns. Umm — mother; imām — the one in front; umma — those gathered around one origin.

The root was treated at 2/78 in al-Baqara and at 42/7 in al-Shūrā (umm al-qurā). I do not repeat it here.

And a point of word order must be recorded, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it: the subject is plural (hunna — "they"), the predicate is singular (umm — "mother"). It does not say "they are the mothers" (ummahātu'l-kitāb).

The classical explanation is this, and I transmit it: umm is used here as a generic term — the plurality goes back to a single origin. That is, the muḥkam verses do not form separate origins but a single origin.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the singular predicate implies that the muḥkam verses are a single body that does not contradict itself. And the root sense of the word umm completes this: the place to which one returns. That is, what is mutashābih is read by being returned to what is muḥkam — not the reverse.

This is the only note of method the verse gives, and it comes out of the verse's own wording.

زَيْغ — root: ز-ي-غ

And now the diagnostic part of the verse.

The root was analysed in detail at 53/17 in al-Najm (mā zāgha'l-baṣar) and at 61/5 in al-Ṣaff. I take the description given there:

"Its sense: to deviate from a straight line, to incline, to bend. Zāghati'l-shams — the sun declined from its zenith. At the centre of the root stands this: a departure from a line, a difference of angle. And this is the most important feature of the word: zaygh is not a sudden break but an inclination. The sun does not drop from its zenith all at once; it parts from it by a small angle, and that angle grows with time."

I rely on that treatment and add here what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone.

At al-Najm 53/17 the zaygh is in the eye; here it is in the heart.

PlaceWhereWhat happens
al-Najm 53/17mā zāgha'l-baṣarThe eye did not swerve — the soundness of the witnessing
Āl ʿImrān 3/7qulūbihim zayghA crookedness in the heart — the corruption of the reading
Āl ʿImrān 3/8rabbanā lā tuzigh qulūbanāThe same root, as a prayer

Three occurrences, one root, three separate positions. This is a fact verifiable from the text.

And the word order must be recorded: fī qulūbihim zayghun — "in their hearts is a crookedness". The sentence is a nominal sentence, and zaygh comes indefinite. That is, the verse does not say "their hearts are crooked"; it says "in their hearts is a crookedness". The difference is not small: the first defines the person, the second records a condition.

I give this as my own reading, and its ground is the indefinite form: the verse is not describing a group, it is describing a state. And that state will be the subject of the believers' prayer in the eighth verse — that is, the verse says indirectly that the state is closed to no one.

ٱبْتِغَآءَ ٱلْفِتْنَةِ

The root ب-غ-ي: to want, to seek; and to exceed the limit. The verbal noun of Form VIII, ibtighāʾto seek out, to go after. The root was treated at 2/213 in al-Baqara, at 42/14 in al-Shūrā and at 45/17 in al-Jāthiya (baghyan baynahum).

The root ف-ت-ن: to put gold into the fire and refine it. The root was treated at 29/2-3 in al-ʿAnkabūt and at 8/25 in al-Anfāl. Its sense here is given in two ways in the classical commentaries:

ReadingWhat fitna is
1To stir up confusion — to set people against one another
2To lead astray — to gather proof-texts for one's own view and draw others to it

Both are transmitted; they do not exclude one another.

And what must be recorded is the verbal noun itself: ibtighāʾ — seeking. The verse is not describing a coming upon the mutashābih but a going after it. The verb is yattabiʿūna — "they follow, they go after."

I record this as my own reading: what the verse condemns is not the reading of what is mutashābih; it is leaving the muḥkam aside and choosing the mutashābih alone. For ittibāʿ is a verb of turning towards — a person chooses what he will turn to. And the reason for the choice is written plainly in the verse: the crookedness in the heart. The order is therefore this: first the inclination, then the choice, then the text.

This coincides with a measure this commentary has recorded again and again: at 2/213 in al-Baqara, at 42/14 in al-Shūrā and at 45/17 in al-Jāthiya it was recorded that division arises not out of ignorance but after knowledge. Here the same thing is said at the level of reading a text: the problem is not the closedness of the text but the inclination that turns to what is closed.

تَأْوِيل — root: أ-و-ل

The root was analysed in Yūsuf as the key construct of that sūra (taʾwīlu'l-aḥādīth) and at 18/78-82 in al-Kahf (dhālika taʾwīlu mā lam tasṭiʿ ʿalayhi ṣabrā). I take the description given there:

"The root أ-و-ل: to arrive at the origin of a thing, at the place it returns to. Āla ilayhi — it returned to it, it arrived at it. Awwal — the first point, the one returned to. From this comes taʾwīl: to carry a thing to where it arrives, to show its end."

And the use in al-Kahf gives the full picture of the word: three events had occurred there — the holing of the boat, the killing of the boy, the setting straight of the wall — and Moses (Mūsā) had objected to all three. The taʾwīl spoken of in the eighty-second verse was not the meaning of the events but where they arrived. That is, taʾwīl is the outcome of what is seen; not an interpretation drawn from it.

This is decisive for the verse before us, and it can be given in a table:

WordWhat it isWhere it was treated
تَفْسِيرThe explanation of the wording, the saying of what it says
تَأْوِيلWhere the utterance arrives, the state it comes to beYūsuf, al-Kahf 18/82

And from here we come to the most disputed place in the verse. For if taʾwīl is understood as "interpretation" the sentence says one thing, and if it is understood as "the state arrived at" it says another.

وَمَا يَعْلَمُ تَأْوِيلَهُۥٓ إِلَّا ٱللَّهُ وَٱلرَّٰسِخُونَ فِى ٱلْعِلْمِ — the question of the pause

This is one of the oldest and best-known questions of the pause (waqf) in Qurʾānic exegesis. Where the sentence stops changes directly what the verse says.

There are two readings, and both are transmitted in the classical sources with strong defenders. I give them in a table and I IMPOSE NO PREFERENCE.

Reading A — the stop is at illa'llāhReading B — the stop is at fi'l-ʿilm
How the sentence is divided…wa mā yaʿlamu taʾwīlahu illa'llāh. · Wa'r-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilmi yaqūlūna āmannā bihī……wa mā yaʿlamu taʾwīlahu illa'llāhu wa'r-rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilm. · Yaqūlūna āmannā bihī…
SenseGod alone knows its interpretation. Those firmly rooted in knowledge say "we believe".God and those firmly rooted in knowledge know its interpretation. They say "we believe".
What wa'r-rāsikhūna isThe subject of a new sentence (mubtadaʾ)In apposition to the word Allāh (maʿṭūf)
What yaqūlūna isThe predicate (khabar) — the predicate of the sentenceA circumstantial clause (ḥāl) — "…saying, while saying"
Its groundOne. Yaqūlūna, coming after the particle wa, needs a predicate; on reading A that need is met naturally. Two. The verse as a whole draws a limit: going after the mutashābih is condemned. Three. The limit of knowledge is set down plainly elsewhere in the Qurʾān as well.One. That being firmly rooted in knowledge is named in praise is felt to require that the rootedness have some return. Two. The word rāsikh is an attribute of knowing; to speak of not knowing immediately afterwards is felt to be weak. Three. In some early reports on the readings and in exegesis this reading has been preferred.
What taʾwīl is on this readingChiefly the state that will come about — the hour of the resurrection, the detail of the unseenChiefly the resolution of the meaning — the returning of the text to what is muḥkam
Its outcomeSilence is a virtueGoing deeper is a possibility

And the last two rows of the table explain why the disagreement has lasted so long — I record this as my own reading: the two readings in fact give the word taʾwīl two different senses. On reading A taʾwīl is "the state to be arrived at", and knowing that really is not in human hands. On reading B taʾwīl is "the resolution of the meaning", and that is something reachable by work. That is, before the disagreement is about where the sentence stops, it is about which sense the word is taken in.

I give this as an observation; I prefer neither of the two readings and impose neither on the reader.

And one further caveat must be entered, because the disagreement is often pulled to one side:

Both readings can be drawn from the text, and both have been defended in the classical tradition. To make weapons of them against each other comes close to the very thing the verse condemns — ibtighāʾa'l-fitna. I write this as a note of method.

And this too is a verifiable fact: neither of the two readings forbids the reading of the mutashābih verses. The verse lays down no ban on reading; it makes a distinction of intention: between the one who approaches with ibtighāʾa'l-fitna and the one who says āmannā bih.

ٱلرَّٰسِخُونَ فِى ٱلْعِلْمِ

The root ر-س-خ: to strike root deep, to be fixed fast. The lexicographers record that the word is used of a mountain settling on the ground and of a tree striking root.

The picture of the root is worth recording: rusūkh conveys not height but depth. That is, the verse speaks not of those who have risen in knowledge but of those who have struck root in it.

And the preposition must be recorded: rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilm — "inside knowledge". Not ʿalā (on top of it) but (inside it).

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the word pictures knowledge not as a height but as a ground. And the function of a ground is not to topple when it is shaken. The verse shows this at once: the one with a crookedness in his heart, meeting a closed verse, is thrown; the one who has struck root, meeting the same verse, stands and says "all of it is from our Lord".

كُلٌّ مِّنْ عِندِ رَبِّنَا

The sentence spoken is worth recording, because it does not resolve the mutashābih.

Kullun min ʿindi rabbinā — "all of it is from our Lord." That is, the sentence does not pass off what it has not understood as understood; it records that what it has not understood comes from the same source.

I record this as an observation: the verse puts into the mouth of the one firmly rooted in knowledge not an explanation but a placing. And the word kull covers the muḥkam as well as the mutashābih — that is, the verse that divides the Book in two does not divide acceptance in two.

وَمَا يَذَّكَّرُ إِلَّآ أُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْأَلْبَٰبِ

The root ل-ب-ب. It was treated at 39/18 in al-Zumar, and I take the description given there:

"albāb is the plural of lubb: the kernel of a thing, its inside; the edible part of a fruit, the part separated from its husk. That is, the intellect is named as the capacity to throw away the husk and take the kernel."

And at 13/19-24 in al-Raʿd the bearers of this attribute were tabulated in a list (keeping the covenant, joining what should be joined, patience, spending in secret and in the open, repelling evil with good). I rely on that treatment.

Here I add what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone, and it is a fact verifiable within the sūra: the construct ūlu'l-albāb occurs twice in the sūra — at 7 and at 190. And the two occurrences stand at the two ends of the sūra.

VerseContextWhat they do
7Before the textMeeting the mutashābih, they are not thrown
190-191Before the universeThey reflect on the creation of the heavens and the earth

Two fields: the written text and the visible order. The same attribute. I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the sūra works the same capacity on two different objects of reading and names both of them "throwing away the husk and taking the kernel".

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present goes beyond the bounds of a religious text, and I give this as an observation:

When any text is read — a law, a contract, a scientific paper, a news report — there always stand before the reader two kinds of statement: those that bear one sense and those open to more than one. And the easiest way to misuse a text is always the same: to leave aside what is plain and to push forward what is not.

The verse describes this operation and catches it at two separate points:

The verse's noteWhat it says
Fī qulūbihim zayghThe problem is not in the text but in the turning
Yattabiʿūna mā tashābahaSelective reading — tearing the part from the whole
Ibtighāʾa'l-fitnaThe aim: not to understand but to confuse
Hunna ummu'l-kitābThe measure: what is closed is returned to what is open

And the fourth row is a discipline of reading all by itself. The most closed sentence of a text is read in the light of that text's most open sentences. If the reverse is done — if what is open is bent to fit what is closed — the text is no longer speaking; the reader is.

The verse's choosing the word zaygh is exactly right for this reason: an inclination is not a break. No one turns a text upside down all at once. It begins with a small angle.


3/8-9

رَبَّنَا لَا تُزِغْ قُلُوبَنَا بَعْدَ إِذْ هَدَيْتَنَا وَهَبْ لَنَا مِن لَّدُنكَ رَحْمَةً إِنَّكَ أَنتَ ٱلْوَهَّابُ

Rabbanā lā tuzigh qulūbanā baʿda idh hadaytanā wa hab lanā min ladunka raḥmah, innaka anta'l-wahhāb · Rabbanā innaka jāmiʿu'n-nāsi li-yawmin lā rayba fīh, inna'llāha lā yukhlifu'l-mīʿād

"Our Lord! Do not make our hearts swerve after You have guided us, and grant us a mercy from Your presence. Truly You are the great Bestower. · Our Lord! You will gather mankind for a day in which there is no doubt. Truly God does not fail His appointment."

The place of the prayer

These two verses are the direct continuation of the one before, and the link is in the word: lā tuzigh — the same root (ز-ي-غ), in Form IV.

VerseMoodIn whose mouth
7fī qulūbihim zaygh — a statementThe text's own note, about a third person
8tuzigh qulūbanā — a prayerIn the believer's mouth, about himself

This is a link verifiable within the sūra, and it has to be recorded.

I give this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the seventh verse had described a defect in someone else; the eighth takes it as a possibility for oneself. That is, immediately after the diagnosis the text turns the diagnosis back on the reader. The first thing a person who learns of a defect would do is look for it in others; the verse closes that road.

بَعْدَ إِذْ هَدَيْتَنَا — "after You have given us guidance".

The caveat itself matters: the prayer consists not in asking for guidance but in asking that what has been given be kept. And this agrees exactly with the picture of the root zaygh: an inclination is what happens not to one who was never on the road but to one who is on it. The sun cannot decline from its zenith before it has reached it.

ٱلْوَهَّاب — root و-ه-ب: to give without return. Wahhāb is the intensive form faʿʿāl. The distinguishing side of the root must be recorded: a hiba is a giving not tied to any return or to any deserving. And this agrees with the subject of the prayer: the heart's staying straight is not asked for as something held on to by desert.

And the word will occur once more later in the sūra, in the mouth of Zechariah: hab lī min ladunka dhurriyyatan ṭayyiba (38) — the same verb (hab), the same construction (min ladunk).

VerseWhoWhat is asked
8The believersRaḥmatana mercy
38ZechariahDhurriyyatan ṭayyibatana goodly offspring

Two prayers built with the same two words: hab and min ladunk. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

لَا يُخْلِفُ ٱلْمِيعَادَmīʿād, from the root و-ع-د: the time or the place appointed. The root was treated at 13/31 in al-Raʿd and at 39/20 in al-Zumar.

And the word order of the sentence must be recorded: the prayer begins with rabbanā (second person), but the last sentence shifts to the third person: inna'llāha lā yukhlifu'l-mīʿād — "truly God does not fail His appointment."

This is the device called iltifāt in Arabic (a shift in the direction of address). I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence comes out of prayer and turns into a ruling. That is, the utterance is taken out of the mouth of the one praying and tied to a general note.


3/10-13

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ لَن تُغْنِىَ عَنْهُمْ أَمْوَٰلُهُمْ وَلَآ أَوْلَٰدُهُم مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ شَيْـًٔا … قَدْ كَانَ لَكُمْ ءَايَةٌ فِى فِئَتَيْنِ ٱلْتَقَتَا

Inna'lladhīna kafarū lan tughniya ʿanhum amwāluhum wa lā awlāduhum mina'llāhi shayʾā, wa ulāʾika hum waqūdu'n-nār · Ka-daʾbi āli Firʿawna wa'lladhīna min qablihim, kadhdhabū bi-āyātinā fa-akhadhahumu'llāhu bi-dhunūbihim, wa'llāhu shadīdu'l-ʿiqāb · Qul li'lladhīna kafarū sa-tughlabūna wa tuḥsharūna ilā jahannama wa biʾsa'l-mihād · Qad kāna lakum āyatun fī fiʾatayni'ltaqatā, fiʾatun tuqātilu fī sabīli'llāhi wa ukhrā kāfiratun yarawnahum mithlayhim raʾya'l-ʿayn, wa'llāhu yuʾayyidu bi-naṣrihī man yashāʾ, inna fī dhālika la-ʿibratan li-ūli'l-abṣār

"For those who disbelieve, neither their wealth nor their children will avail them anything against God… like the way of the family of Pharaoh and of those before them… Say to those who disbelieve: you will be overcomeIn two companies that met there was a sign for you: one was fighting in the way of God, the other was disbelieving; with the sight of the eye they saw them as twice their own number. God supports with His help whom He wills. In this there is surely a lesson for those who have eyes to see."

دَأْب — root: د-أ-ب

The concrete sense of the root is worth recording: daʾaba fī ʿamalihto keep at a piece of work in the same way, without tiring. Daʾb — a continuing habit, an accustomed course.

That is, the verse does not say "like the condition of the family of Pharaoh"; it says "like their course". The word conveys not a single event but a repeated pattern.

I record this as an observation: the choice of the word prepares in advance the line the sūra will lay down later in the Uḥud block. There too what will be described is not a single event but a recurring law: qad khalat min qablikum sunan (137).

فِئَتَيْنِ ٱلْتَقَتَا — two companies

The thirteenth verse names an encounter that took place in the past. In the classical sources this is identified as Badr.

Per the method (Method) I record this: the verse gives neither a place name nor a personal name. The only thing it gives is the attribute of the two sides: one tuqātilu fī sabīli'llāh, the other kāfira. In this commentary I do not go into the detail of the reports.

يَرَوْنَهُم مِّثْلَيْهِمْ رَأْىَ ٱلْعَيْنِ — a question of seeing

The sentence is one of the most debated places in the classical commentaries, because the reference of the pronouns is undetermined.

ReadingWho sees whomSense
1Those who disbelieve, the believersThe smaller side appears twice its number to the other side — fear falls on them
2The believers, the other sideThe larger side appears twice its number to the eye — and they stand firm even so
3The believers, themselvesThey see their own number as double and find confidence in it

All three readings are transmitted in the classical sources. I do not impose a preference.

And the note raʾya'l-ʿayn must be dwelt on: "with the sight of the eye". That is, what is in question is not a guess or a supposition; it is recorded as something seen with the eye.

I give this as an observation, and it holds whichever reading is taken: the verse takes as its subject the perceived amount of the number, not the real amount. And that what is decisive in a battle is often not the real number but how the two sides see each other is a thing observed throughout history. I record this as a point of view; I am not dressing the verse in a modern thesis.

لِّأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَبْصَٰرِ — "for those who have sight." And this belongs to the same family as the ūlu'l-albāb of the seventh verse. In three separate places the sūra uses three separate constructions with "those who have": ūlu'l-albāb (7, 190), ūlu'l-abṣār (13), ūlu'l-ʿilm (18). This is a verifiable fact.


3/14-17

زُيِّنَ لِلنَّاسِ حُبُّ ٱلشَّهَوَٰتِ مِنَ ٱلنِّسَآءِ وَٱلْبَنِينَ وَٱلْقَنَٰطِيرِ ٱلْمُقَنطَرَةِ مِنَ ٱلذَّهَبِ وَٱلْفِضَّةِ وَٱلْخَيْلِ ٱلْمُسَوَّمَةِ وَٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ وَٱلْحَرْثِ

Zuyyina li'n-nāsi ḥubbu'sh-shahawāti mina'n-nisāʾi wa'l-banīna wa'l-qanāṭīri'l-muqanṭarati mina'dh-dhahabi wa'l-fiḍḍati wa'l-khayli'l-musawwamati wa'l-anʿāmi wa'l-ḥarth, dhālika matāʿu'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā, wa'llāhu ʿindahū ḥusnu'l-maʾāb

"The love of the things desired has been made fair-seeming to people: women, sons, hoarded heaps of gold and silver, branded horses, cattle and tilled land. These are the provision of the life of this world; with God is the good place of return."

زُيِّنَ — a passive verb

The verb is passive: "was made fair-seeming." The agent is not named.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it: the sentence does not name the one who adorns. Some exegetes read this as a natural disposition, others as the work of Satan. Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the object of the sentence must be recorded: what is made fair-seeming is not the objects listed but ḥubbu'sh-shahawāt — the love of them. There are two steps: the object, and the love felt for the object. The verse takes the second as its subject.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the construction itself: the verse disparages none of the things listed — child, wealth, animal, tilled land. The next sentence confirms this: dhālika matāʿu'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā — "these are the provision of the life of this world." Matāʿ is not a bad word; it means what is used, what is drawn benefit from. What is at issue is not the existence of these things but the kind of bond between them and a person.

ٱلْقَنَٰطِيرِ ٱلْمُقَنطَرَة

The root ق-ن-ط-ر. Qinṭār — a large quantity; the lexicographers transmit different measures and do not agree on any definite amount. I give no figure in this commentary.

And the construction is worth recording: al-qanāṭīru'l-muqanṭara — a noun and an adjective from the same root. In Arabic this is called emphasis: "heaps heaped up".

The word will occur once more in the sūra, at verse 75 — there as a measure of trust: man in taʾmanhu bi-qinṭārin yuʾaddihī ilayk. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and the work of the two occurrences differs:

VerseWhat qinṭār does
14What is hoarded — the love of which is made fair-seeming
75What is entrusted — by which it is measured whether it is given back

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the sūra names the same large quantity twice — once as possession, once as a trust. And in the second occurrence what is measured is not the amount of the property but the conduct of the one holding it.

ٱلْخَيْلِ ٱلْمُسَوَّمَة

The root س-و-م: to mark; and to turn loose (to pasture). Both senses are transmitted:

ReadingWhat musawwama is
1Marked — branded, stamped; visibly of value
2Turned loose — left out to pasture, free

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

وَٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ — and verses 15-17

The fifteenth verse sets a list against the list (jannātun tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhār), and the seventeenth verse counts five attributes:

AttributeWord
The steadfastal-ṣābirīn
The truthfulal-ṣādiqīn
The obediental-qānitīn
Those who spendal-munfiqīn
Those who ask forgiveness before dawnal-mustaghfirīna bi'l-asḥār

The word order of the five must be recorded: all five are active participles — that is, they convey not an act but a continuance. In Arabic the active participle conveys the one who is doing the work and the one characterised by that work.

بِٱلْأَسْحَارِ — root س-ح-ر: saḥar, the last part of the night. The word was treated at 54/34 in al-Qamar (najjaynāhum bi-saḥar).

I record this as an observation: four of the five attributes are without a time; to the last of them a time is added. And that time is the time when one is least seen. The list closes with an act that has no visibility.

And a comparison can be made with the list in the fourteenth verse — I give this as my own reading: the first list counts things possessed, the second counts things done. In the first a person is the subject but there is no verb (zuyyina — passive); in the second there are five active participles. That is, the sūra draws a distinction between "having" and "doing".


3/18

شَهِدَ ٱللَّهُ أَنَّهُۥ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ وَٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ وَأُو۟لُوا۟ ٱلْعِلْمِ قَآئِمًۢا بِٱلْقِسْطِ

Shahida'llāhu annahū lā ilāha illā huwa wa'l-malāʾikatu wa ūlu'l-ʿilmi qāʾiman bi'l-qisṭ, lā ilāha illā huwa'l-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm

"God has borne witness that there is no god but He — and so have the angels and those who possess knowledge, upholding justice. There is no god but He; al-ʿAzīz, al-Ḥakīm."

Three witnesses

The word order of the verse must be recorded: a single verb (shahida), three subjects.

WitnessWho
1God
2The angels
3Ūlu'l-ʿilm — those who possess knowledge

And the third place is worth recording: the verse sets those who possess knowledge immediately after the angels. This is a fact verifiable from the text, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it a great deal.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the seventh verse came rāsikhūna fi'l-ʿilm; here ūlu'l-ʿilm. Two constructions in the same sūra, eleven verses apart. And both give knowledge not as a position but as a stance: the first is not thrown, the second bears witness.

قَآئِمًۢا بِٱلْقِسْطِ — whose circumstance

The word is in the accusative and is a circumstantial qualifier (ḥāl). But whose circumstance it is, is disputed:

ReadingWhose circumstance qāʾiman isSense
1God's"Upholding justice" — it is He who bears witness, and He stands upholding justice
2All three witnesses'All three bear witness while upholding justice
3The witnessing itself'sThe witnessing is a witnessing borne upon justice

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

قِسْط — root ق-س-ط. The root has a curious feature, and it was recorded in the series at 55/9 in al-Raḥmān: in Form I (qasaṭa) the root means to act unjustly, in Form IV (aqsaṭa) to act justly. That is, the same root turns to its opposite when the form changes. Qisṭ — justice, the giving of a right in full.


3/19

إِنَّ ٱلدِّينَ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ ٱلْإِسْلَٰمُ

Inna'd-dīna ʿinda'llāhi'l-islām; wa ma'khtalafa'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba illā min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmu baghyan baynahum; wa man yakfur bi-āyāti'llāhi fa-inna'llāha sarīʿu'l-ḥisāb

"The religion with God is islām. Those who were given the Book fell into division only after knowledge had come to them, out of begrudging rivalry among themselves. Whoever denies the signs of God — God is swift in reckoning."


This verse and verse 85 are the two most-quoted and most misused verses of the sūra. Per the method (Method) I shall follow a procedure here: first I shall give the root sense of the word, then recall how this word has been treated in the series, then record what the verse does not say.

إِسْلَٰم — root: س-ل-م

The concrete sense of the root was analysed in detail at 49/14 in al-Ḥujurāt, and I take the description given there:

"س-ل-م. Its original sense is to be sound, to be flawless, to be complete. Salāma — soundness. Salām — peace, wholeness. Silm — peace. Taslīm — to hand a thing over complete. At the centre of the root stands an operation: to hand something over to the other side in sound condition. Islām is in Form IV: to hand oneself over."

I rely on that treatment.

And the two branches of the root must be recorded, because English covers them with two separate words:

BranchIts English counterpartQurʾānic example
Soundness / completenessPeace, wholenessDāru's-salām, salāmun ʿalaykum
Handing over completeSubmissionAslamtu li-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn (al-Baqara 2/131)

The two branches are not separate: to hand a thing over complete and to be sound come out of the same root. The one who hands over is the one who has kept nothing back.

The distinction of īmān and islām — on the basis of 49/14

al-Ḥujurāt 49/14 is the central text of this distinction, and the table given there was this:

إيمانإسلام
Picture of the rootThe going away of fear, trustingHanding a thing over complete
Where it happensIn the heartOutwardly — in word and in conduct
Can it be seenNoYes

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

And a point recorded there carries over directly and settles how the verse is read: in al-Ḥujurāt the refusal was read not as an exclusion but as a correction of placeislām is not a negative category but a positive word of the Qurʾān.

What the verse says and what it does not say

The wording of the verse is this: inna'd-dīna ʿinda'llāhi'l-islām. And the word order of the sentence must be recorded:

  • Subject: al-dīndefinite (with al-).
  • The caveat: ʿinda'llāh — "with God".
  • Predicate: al-islāmdefinite.

In Arabic a nominal sentence whose two terms are both definite sets up an identity — "A is B and consists of B." That is, the sentence is a sentence of definition.

And the note ʿinda'llāh must not be passed over: the sentence does not say "with people" or "in history". It names the one who sets the measure.

Now, per the method (Method), I record this explicitly — these are limits that come out of the wording of the verse, not a softening brought in from outside:

One. The verse sets a measure of acceptance; it does not give a list of persons. No community, people or group is named in the sentence. What is named is the religion itself.

Two. The root sense of the word blocks any reduction of the verse to a historical-institutional name. Islām is by its root handing oneself over, and the Qurʾān uses this verb of Abraham (idh qāla lahū rabbuhū aslim qāla aslamtu li-rabbi'l-ʿālamīn, al-Baqara 2/131), of the sons of Jacob (Yaʿqūb), of the disciples (3/52: wa'shhad bi-annā muslimūn) and of the queen who came to Solomon (Sulaymān). These are facts verifiable from the text.

Three. The verse's own second sentence places on record how the first sentence is to be read. The second sentence is this: wa ma'khtalafa'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba illā min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmu baghyan baynahum. That is, the verse sets down the cause of the division as not ignorance but baghy.

Four. This commentary does not enter the debate about excommunication. Who is inside and who is outside this definition is a ruling the verse itself does not make, and it will not be made here. What the verse gives is a measure; applying the measure to persons is not the work of this commentary.

مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَهُمُ ٱلْعِلْمُ بَغْيًۢا بَيْنَهُمْ

This construction has been treated many times in the series, and at 45/17 in al-Jāthiya a table of three places was drawn up:

PlaceExpression
al-Baqara 2/213Min baʿdi mā jāʾathumu'l-bayyinātbaghyan baynahum
al-Baqara 2/253Min baʿdi mā jāʾathumu'l-bayyināt
al-Jāthiya 45/17Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmbaghyan baynahum
al-Shūrā 42/14Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmbaghyan baynahum
Āl ʿImrān 3/19Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmbaghyan baynahum

The same structure in five places. And in all of them the same thing is said: disagreement arises not from the absence of the evidence but after it has come. I rely on al-Baqara 2/213, al-Shūrā 42/14 and al-Jāthiya 45/17 and do not repeat them here.

Here I add what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone, and it is an observation about position: in the other four places this sentence is an independent statement. Here it is set immediately after a sentence of definition (inna'd-dīna ʿinda'llāhi'l-islām).

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the word order heads off a misuse by naming the cause of division immediately after the definition. As soon as the definition is given, it is recorded that the cause of splitting around that definition is not knowledge but baghy. That is, the verse meets, within the same verse, the turning of its own sentence into an instrument of contention.


3/20-25

فَإِنْ حَآجُّوكَ فَقُلْ أَسْلَمْتُ وَجْهِىَ لِلَّهِ وَمَنِ ٱتَّبَعَنِ … أَلَمْ تَرَ إِلَى ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ نَصِيبًا مِّنَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ

Fa-in ḥājjūka fa-qul aslamtu wajhiya li'llāhi wa mani'ttabaʿan, wa qul li'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba wa'l-ummiyyīna a-aslamtum, fa-in aslamū fa-qadi'htadaw, wa in tawallaw fa-innamā ʿalayka'l-balāgh, wa'llāhu baṣīrun bi'l-ʿibād

"If they dispute with you, say: I have handed my face over to God, and so have those who follow me. Say to those who were given the Book and to the ummiyyūn: 'Have you handed yourselves over too?' If they hand themselves over they have found the way; if they turn away, your part is only to convey."

أَسْلَمْتُ وَجْهِىَ لِلَّهِ

The noun of the preceding verse (al-islām) comes here as a verb: aslamtu.

And its object must be recorded: wajhiya — "my face". The root و-ج-ه: direction, face, the side of a thing towards which one turns. The root was treated at 2/112 and 2/115 in al-Baqara.

In Arabic wajh is used for the whole of a thing — because the face is the side of a person that stands foremost and is recognised. And the idiom occurs in the same form at al-Baqara 2/112: balā man aslama wajhahū li'llāhi wa huwa muḥsin.

I record this as an observation: the nineteenth verse had named the religion; the twentieth turns that name into a verb and puts the verb in the first person. That is, the definition is first shown on the speaker himself; then it is asked.

And the form of the question must be recorded: a-aslamtum — a question. Not a command, not an imposition; a question. And its answer is met with two possibilities, the second of which sets the limit of conveying: fa-innamā ʿalayka'l-balāgh.

ٱلْبَلَٰغa table of the limit of responsibility was drawn up in Muḥammad, at 42/48 in al-Shūrā, at 46/35 in al-Aḥqāf and at 28/56 in al-Qaṣaṣ. I rely on that treatment. In summary: balāgh is to convey — not to make accepted.

ٱلْأُمِّيِّۦنَ — from the root أ-م-م: those who are not people of a book. The word was treated at 62/2 in al-Jumuʿa. Per the method (Method) I record this: the word here is not a disparagement but a term of distinction — those who have not been given a book.

Verses 21-25

The twenty-first verse makes a severe statement: inna'lladhīna yakfurūna bi-āyāti'llāhi wa yaqtulūna'n-nabiyyīna bi-ghayri ḥaqqin wa yaqtulūna'lladhīna yaʾmurūna bi'l-qisṭi mina'n-nās — "those who deny the signs of God, who kill the prophets without right, and who kill those among the people who enjoin justice…"

Per the method (Method) I record this: the sentence is built with alladhīna — that is, it is tied to an attribute, not to a community. No group is named in the sentence. Whoever does these three things, the verse speaks of him.

And the third verb is worth recording, and it is usually passed over: wa yaqtulūna'lladhīna yaʾmurūna bi'l-qisṭi mina'n-nās — "those who kill those among the people who enjoin justice."

I record this as an observation: the verse puts non-prophets into the same sentence. That is, it is not required that the one killed be a prophet; it is enough that he enjoined justice. And this is the first link in the line of "enjoining what is right" that will be built in verses 104 and 110 of the sūra.

حَبِطَتْ أَعْمَٰلُهُمْ (22) — root ح-ب-ط. The concrete sense of the root was treated in Muḥammad: an animal's eating a harmful plant and swelling, and that swelling ending in death. That is, ḥabṭ is a swelling that deflates — full from outside, empty within. I do not repeat it here.

The twenty-third verse describes how, when those given a portion of the Book are called to the arbitration of their own book, a group of them turns away: thumma yatawallā farīqun minhum wa hum muʿriḍūn.

Per the method (Method) I record this, and it is a rule of reading that will be kept throughout the sūra: the verse says farīqun minhum — "a group of them". There is no blanket ruling. This note is directly connected with verse 113 of the sūra (laysū sawāʾ), and it will be shown there in a table.

The twenty-fourth verse gives the cause: dhālika bi-annahum qālū lan tamassana'n-nāru illā ayyāman maʿdūdāt — "because they said, the Fire will touch us only for a counted number of days."

This sentence occurred word for word at 2/80 in al-Baqara and was treated there. I rely on that treatment. In summary: the claim reduces not the existence of the punishment but its duration — and this is a more insidious operation than a denial, because it goes on believing while rendering the outcome ineffective.

غَرَّهُمْ فِى دِينِهِم مَّا كَانُوا۟ يَفْتَرُونَ — root غ-ر-ر: to deceive; the concrete sense of the root is a thing's outer face being bright and its inside empty. The root was treated at 31/33 in Luqmān and at 57/14 in al-Ḥadīd.

And the word order of the sentence must be recorded: the thing that deceives is not an enemy coming from outside — mā kānū yaftarūn, "what they themselves invented". That is, the verse ties the source of the deception to the one deceived.


3/26-27

قُلِ ٱللَّهُمَّ مَٰلِكَ ٱلْمُلْكِ تُؤْتِى ٱلْمُلْكَ مَن تَشَآءُ وَتَنزِعُ ٱلْمُلْكَ مِمَّن تَشَآءُ

Quli'llāhumma mālika'l-mulki tuʾti'l-mulka man tashāʾu wa tanziʿu'l-mulka mimman tashāʾ, wa tuʿizzu man tashāʾu wa tudhillu man tashāʾ, bi-yadika'l-khayr, innaka ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīr · Tūliju'l-layla fi'n-nahāri wa tūliju'n-nahāra fi'l-layl, wa tukhriju'l-ḥayya mina'l-mayyiti wa tukhriju'l-mayyita mina'l-ḥayy, wa tarzuqu man tashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb

"Say: 'O God, Owner of all dominion! You give dominion to whom You will, and You pull dominion away from whom You will. You raise whom You will and You abase whom You will. In Your hand is the good. Truly You have power over all things. · You make the night pass into the day, and You make the day pass into the night. You bring the living out of the dead and the dead out of the living. And You provide for whom You will without reckoning.'"

ٱللَّهُمَّ — a vocative form

The word is a special vocative form standing in place of yā Allāh: the drops and a doubled mīm comes at the end. This form occurs in five places in the Qurʾān, and all five are sentences of calling or of entreaty.

I record this as an observation about the language; the lexicographers differ over how the form is constructed, and I impose no preference.

مَٰلِكَ ٱلْمُلْكِ — and four mulks in a single verse

The root م-ل-ك occurs four times, and each of the four is at a different piece of work:

OrderWordIts work
1Mālika'l-mulkThe vocative — the attribute of the one called
2Tuʾti'l-mulkaThe thing given
3Tanziʿu'l-mulkaThe thing taken
4(mimman tashāʾ)From whom the taken thing is taken

And the pairs of verbs must be recorded:

GivingTaking
Tuʾtī — You giveTanziʿu — You pull away
Tuʿizzu — You raiseTudhillu — You abase

The root ن-ز-ع: to pull a thing out of its place, to wrench it loose. The choice of the root is worth recording: the verse does not say "You take back" (taʾkhudhu). Nazʿ is a pull that meets resistance — as though the thing taken were holding on.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two verbs: for giving, ītāʾ (holding out and handing over) is used; for taking, nazʿ. That is, the verse sets up an asymmetry between the way dominion is given and the way it is taken: silent in the giving, contested in the taking.

بِيَدِكَ ٱلْخَيْرُ — and a note on transcendence

Per the method (Method), and following the note kept consistently throughout the series, the same holds here: expressions such as yad (hand) cannot be understood as ascribing an organ or a body to God. The same note was entered at 57/29 in al-Ḥadīd and in Yāsīn: two attitudes are transmitted in the classical commentaries — to accept the wording as it stands and leave its manner to God (tafwīḍ), or to interpret it in the sense of power and disposal (taʾwīl). I transmit both and impose no preference. The shared principle is al-Shūrā 42/11.

And there is something in the content of the sentence that must be recorded, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it: the sentence says bi-yadika'l-khayronly the good is named. Although raising and abasing are counted together, it does not say "in Your hand are good and evil".

The classical explanations:

#Explanation
1Decorum — naming only the good in address is what the language of prayer requires
2Coverage — what is mentioned includes the other as well; in Arabic naming one of two opposites is common
3Direction — since abasement too is tied to a wisdom, it is in the end inside the good

All three are transmitted. I impose no preference and do not enter the theological debate.

تُولِجُ ٱلَّيْلَ فِى ٱلنَّهَارِīlāj

The root و-ل-ج. It was analysed in detail at 57/6 in al-Ḥadīd and tabulated at 31/29 in Luqmān. I take the description given there:

"Root: و-ل-ج. Its concrete sense: to enter a narrow place, to slip in, to seep inside. […] The word itself describes a seeping. Night does not take the place of day; it enters into it."

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

Here I add what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone, and it is a difference of context:

PlaceWhat īlāj occurs beside
al-Ḥadīd 57/6Creation and the knowledge of all things (ʿalīmun bi-dhāti'ṣ-ṣudūr)
Luqmān 31/29The subjecting of the sun and the moon
Āl ʿImrān 3/27The changing of hands of dominion and raising and abasing

And the difference must be recorded — I give this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the other two places īlāj is a proof of power. Here it does the work of a comparison. The twenty-sixth verse had described the changing of hands of dominion; the twenty-seventh gives a picture that shows how this happens.

For this is exactly the picture of īlāj: night does not cut day off at a stroke; the day grows a little shorter each day, then a little longer. The boundary shifts every day, and on no day can it be said "there, today it changed." And the changing of hands of dominion is most often like this too — what appears as an overturning in a moment is the last step of a long seeping.

I give this as a reading; the verse does not draw this comparison explicitly. What it does draw is the standing of two sentences side by side, and that can be verified from the text.

وَتُخْرِجُ ٱلْحَىَّ مِنَ ٱلْمَيِّتِ

This sentence occurs in several places in the Qurʾān (Yūnus 10/31, al-Anʿām 6/95, al-Rūm 30/19) and was treated at 30/19 in al-Rūm. I rely on that treatment.

In the classical commentaries it is explained in two ways, and both are transmitted:

ReadingIts sense
1Material — a plant from a seed, a living creature from an egg; life from dead earth
2Spiritual — a believer coming out of an unbeliever, an unbeliever out of a believer

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And the second reading agrees with the context of the sūra: from the thirty-third verse the sūra will relate a lineage, and within that lineage there will be both those who are chosen and others.

بِغَيْرِ حِسَابٍ — "without reckoning". Two senses are given in the classical commentaries: either "unlimited, immeasurably abundant", or "without being calculated according to the person's deserving". Both are transmitted.

And the work the two verses do together can be recorded as my own reading: the twenty-sixth verse describes a changing of hands among people, the twenty-seventh a changing of hands in nature. Both are given with the same sequence of verbs (You give–You take / You make pass–You make pass / You bring out–You bring out). That is, the changing of hands of political power is put into the same sentence structure as the changing of places of night and day.

And this is what the verse says to the present: the prayer states that power is not lasting, not as a threat but as a description of an order. The verse neither praises nor blames any government; it names the subject of the verbs of giving and taking. No present-day political conclusion is drawn from this in this commentary.


3/28-30

لَّا يَتَّخِذِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ ٱلْكَٰفِرِينَ أَوْلِيَآءَ مِن دُونِ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ

Lā yattakhidhi'l-muʾminūna'l-kāfirīna awliyāʾa min dūni'l-muʾminīn, wa man yafʿal dhālika fa-laysa mina'llāhi fī shayʾin illā an tattaqū minhum tuqāh, wa yuḥadhdhirukumu'llāhu nafsah, wa ila'llāhi'l-maṣīr

"Let the believers not take those who disbelieve as protectors in place of the believers. Whoever does that has no relation left with God — except that you guard yourselves against a danger from them. God warns you of Himself; and to God is the return."

The extent of the word وَلِىّ

The root و-ل-ي: to be near, to be adjoining. Walī — the one who is near, who takes charge of another's affair. The root was treated across eight occurrences in al-Shūrā and in detail in al-Mumtaḥana.

Per the method (Method) I record this, and it comes out of the wording of the verse:

One. The word is not "friend". Walāya (the bond of mutual protection) means entrusting one's affair to another, declaring one's side. This distinction was set out plainly at 60/8 in al-Mumtaḥana: "God does not forbid you to deal kindly and justly with those who have not fought you over religion and have not driven you from your homes." I rely on that treatment.

Two. The verse's caveat is min dūni'l-muʾminīn — "in place of the believers". This caveat shows what the prohibition is aimed at: a situation of choosing.

Three. The verse does not give a blanket rule of conduct about a group of human beings; it takes up a question of allegiance. No legal ruling is drawn from this in this commentary.

إِلَّآ أَن تَتَّقُوا۟ مِنْهُمْ تُقَىٰةً

The exception must be recorded: the verse sets an exception to its own ruling. Tuqāt, from the root ت-ق-يguarding oneself, taking precaution.

This exception has been discussed at length in the classical legal literature. Per the method (Method) I do not enter that discussion and I issue no legal ruling. What is to be recorded is that the verse itself sets an exception — that is, the ruling is not absolute but qualified.

The twenty-ninth verse says that the hidden and the open are the same (in tukhfū mā fī ṣudūrikum aw tubdūhu yaʿlamhu'llāh), and the thirtieth that everyone will find what he has done brought present: yawma tajidu kullu nafsin mā ʿamilat min khayrin muḥḍarā.

مُّحْضَرًا — root ح-ض-ر: to be present. A passive participle: brought present.

I record this as an observation: the verse does not say that the deed is recounted but that it is brought. And this is the very picture treated at 18/49 in al-Kahf (wa wajadū mā ʿamilū ḥāḍirā). I rely on that treatment.

And the closing sentence is worth recording: wa yuḥadhdhirukumu'llāhu nafsah… wa'llāhu raʾūfun bi'l-ʿibād. In the same context, both a warning and a tenderness. I give this as an observation about the word order: the sūra closes a heavy sentence with the name Raʾūf — and this lies along the same line as the pattern recorded in al-Ḥujurāt of "leaving room after every heavy sentence".


3/31-32

قُلْ إِن كُنتُمْ تُحِبُّونَ ٱللَّهَ فَٱتَّبِعُونِى يُحْبِبْكُمُ ٱللَّهُ وَيَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ ذُنُوبَكُمْ

Qul in kuntum tuḥibbūna'llāha fa'ttabiʿūnī yuḥbibkumu'llāhu wa yaghfir lakum dhunūbakum, wa'llāhu ghafūrun raḥīm · Qul aṭīʿu'llāha wa'r-rasūl, fa-in tawallaw fa-inna'llāha lā yuḥibbu'l-kāfirīn

"Say: 'If you love God, follow me, and God will love you and forgive you your sins.' · Say: 'Obey God and the Messenger.' If they turn away — God does not love those who disbelieve."

The testing of love

The structure of the sentence must be recorded, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it:

  • The condition: in kuntum tuḥibbūna'llāh — "if you love God"
  • The apodosis (a command): fa'ttabiʿūnī — "follow me"
  • The outcome: yuḥbibkumu'llāh — "God will love you"

That is, the order is this: a love claimed → an act → a love answering to it.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the verse does not reject the claim of love; it ties it to something measurable. Love is an inward state and is not seen from outside; ittibāʿ is seen.

And the direction of the verbs is worth recording:

SentenceThe one who lovesThe one loved
Tuḥibbūna'llāhThe human beingGod
Yuḥbibkumu'llāhGodThe human being

Two directions, one root (ح-ب-ب), in the same verse. And between them stands a verb. I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the verse takes love out of being a one-way feeling and turns it into a two-way relation — and the visible link of the relation is the verb in the middle.

وَيَغْفِرْ لَكُمْ ذُنُوبَكُمْ — and forgiveness is set after love, not before. I give this as an observation about the word order.

The thirty-second verse closes the block: aṭīʿu'llāha wa'r-rasūl. And this construction will occur once more in the sūra, at verse 132 — inside the Uḥud block.

VerseContext
32At the end of the block of the Book and the dispute
132Inside the block of war

The same command, on two separate grounds. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And at verse 152 the opposite of the same root will come: wa ʿaṣaytum — "and you disobeyed". The sūra sets down the command twice and records its breach once.


3/33-34

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ ٱصْطَفَىٰٓ ءَادَمَ وَنُوحًا وَءَالَ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ وَءَالَ عِمْرَٰنَ عَلَى ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ · ذُرِّيَّةًۢ بَعْضُهَا مِنۢ بَعْضٍ

Inna'llāha'ṣṭafā Ādama wa Nūḥan wa āla Ibrāhīma wa āla ʿImrāna ʿala'l-ʿālamīn · Dhurriyyatan baʿḍuhā min baʿḍ, wa'llāhu samīʿun ʿalīm

"God chose Adam (Ādam), Noah (Nūḥ), the family of Abraham (Ibrāhīm) and the family of ʿImrān above all beings · as one offspring, one from another. God is hearing, knowing."

ٱصْطَفَىٰ — root: ص-ف-و

The concrete sense of the root is worth recording: ص-ف-و — a thing's being clear, pure, free of sediment. Ṣafwa — the cleanest part of a thing; ṣafī — clear water.

Form VIII (iftiʿāl): iṣṭafā — to pick out and take the pure part of a thing. That is, there is a sifting inside the verb: choosing is taking the clear out of the mixed.

And the distribution of the verb within this sūra must be recorded — this is a fact verifiable from the text:

VerseSentenceWho
33Inna'llāha iṣṭafā Ādama…Four: Adam, Noah, the family of Abraham, the family of ʿImrān
42Inna'llāha iṣṭafāki wa ṭahharaki wa iṣṭafāki ʿalā nisāʾi'l-ʿālamīnMary — twice

Four occurrences in two verses. And in the forty-second verse the verb is repeated twice in the same sentence — this is a concentration verifiable within the sūra, and it will be taken up separately there.

The name of the sūra comes from here

Āla ʿImrān — "the family of ʿImrān". The construct occurs only here in the sūra.

A note per the method (Method): the Qurʾān names ʿImrān in two other places — 3/35 (imraʾatu ʿImrān) and al-Taḥrīm 66/12 (Maryama'bnata ʿImrān). The Qurʾān gives no other information about this person. The genealogical material transmitted in the classical sources is not passed on in this commentary; the only thing the text gives is a name.

ذُرِّيَّةًۢ بَعْضُهَا مِنۢ بَعْضٍ

The construction must be recorded: "an offspring, one part of it from another."

The root ذ-ر-ر / ذ-ر-و — the lexicographers differ over the origin of the word; dhurriyya means progeny, generation. The root was treated at 13/23 in al-Raʿd and at 36/41 in Yāsīn.

And the work of the sentence is worth recording — I give this as my own reading: the verse counts four separate names and then binds them into a single chain. That is, the choosing is given not as four separate events but as one continuing line.

And this is connected with a later sentence of the sūra: at verse 68, inna awla'n-nāsi bi-Ibrāhīma la'lladhīna'ttabaʿūh — "the nearest of people to Abraham are those who followed him". That is, the sūra builds a chain of descent and then ties nearness in that chain to following. This is a weave verifiable from the text, and it will be taken up separately at verse 68.

وَٱللَّهُ سَمِيعٌ عَلِيمٌ — and the verse ends with the name of hearing. I record this as an observation about the word order: in the very next verse there will come an utterance spoken — a vow a woman turned over within herself and then put into words. The name prepares the scene.


3/35-36

إِذْ قَالَتِ ٱمْرَأَتُ عِمْرَٰنَ رَبِّ إِنِّى نَذَرْتُ لَكَ مَا فِى بَطْنِى مُحَرَّرًا · فَلَمَّا وَضَعَتْهَا قَالَتْ رَبِّ إِنِّى وَضَعْتُهَآ أُنثَىٰ وَٱللَّهُ أَعْلَمُ بِمَا وَضَعَتْ وَلَيْسَ ٱلذَّكَرُ كَٱلْأُنثَىٰ

Idh qālati'mraʾatu ʿImrāna rabbi innī nadhartu laka mā fī baṭnī muḥarraran fa-taqabbal minnī, innaka anta's-samīʿu'l-ʿalīm · Fa-lammā waḍaʿathā qālat rabbi innī waḍaʿtuhā unthā wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā waḍaʿat, wa laysa'dh-dhakaru ka'l-unthā, wa innī sammaytuhā Maryama wa innī uʿīdhuhā bika wa dhurriyyatahā mina'sh-shayṭāni'r-rajīm

"When the wife of ʿImrān said: 'My Lord! I have vowed to You what is in my womb — set free. Accept it from me; truly You are the hearing, the knowing.' · And when she gave birth to her she said: 'My Lord! I have given birth to a female.' — and God knew better what she had given birth to — 'and the male is not like the female. I have named her Mary; and I place her and her offspring in Your protection from the accursed Satan.'"


These two verses will be worked through with care. The sentence wa laysa'dh-dhakaru ka'l-unthā in particular is one of the sentences on which the most mistaken rulings have been built. Per the method (Method) I shall first settle the question of whose sentence it is, then give the classical explanations in a table.

مُحَرَّرًا — root: ح-ر-ر

The concrete sense of the root: ح-ر-ر — heat; and to be free, to be released from a bond. Ḥurr — free; taḥrīr — setting loose. The root was treated at 90/13 in al-Balad (fakku raqaba) and at 58/3 in al-Mujādala (taḥrīru raqaba).

A passive participle: muḥarrar — set free, released.

The senses given to this word in the classical commentaries:

#What muḥarrar meansExplanation
1Dedicated to the sanctuaryReleased from worldly affairs and set apart for the service of the sanctuary
2Made pureFor God alone, with no other purpose mixed in
3Exempt from serviceFreed from the obligation of serving his parents

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

And there is a tension in the word itself, and I record it as an observation: muḥarrar means "set free"; but in the sentence this freedom is given by a vow. That is, being loosed from everything else by being bound to one thing. The word carries the logic of a vow by itself.

وَضَعَتْ — a verb repeated three times

The root و-ض-ع: to put a thing down, to set it down. Its use for giving birth comes from here — in Arabic waḍaʿati'l-marʾa means "the woman gave birth"; the picture of the root is the setting down of a carried load.

And the verb occurs four times in two verses:

OrderSentenceWho says it
1Fa-lammā waḍaʿathāThe narrator
2Innī waḍaʿtuhā unthāThe woman
3Wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā waḍaʿatThe narrator — breaking in
4(mā fī baṭnī, 35 — indirectly)The woman

The third occurrence must be recorded, because the whole question of the verse is knotted there.

Who is speaking? — the question of whose sentence it is

There is an interposed clause (jumla muʿtariḍa) in the verse, and this is plainly recorded in the classical commentaries:

"…qālat rabbi innī waḍaʿtuhā unthā — wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā waḍaʿat — wa laysa'dh-dhakaru ka'l-unthā…"

The middle sentence (wa'llāhu aʿlamu bimā waḍaʿat — "and God knew better what she had given birth to") is not the woman's words; it is the narrator breaking in. On this there is broad agreement among the sources.

And the real disagreement is about the sentence after it: wa laysa'dh-dhakaru ka'l-unthā. Whose speech does this sentence continue?

ReadingWhose the sentence isThe direction of the sentence
AA continuation of the woman's words — she returns to her speech after the interposed clauseThe woman is voicing her own expectation: "I had wanted a male; he would not have been like this female" — a human being's own reckoning
BGod's words — a continuation of the interposed clauseAn answer given to the woman's reckoning: "the male is not like this female" — that is, what was expected is not the equal of what was given

Both readings are transmitted in the classical sources. I do not impose a preference.

And it should be seen how much the sense changes between the two readings — this shows why the sentence before us must be worked through with care:

Reading AReading B
Whose the sentence isThe human being'sThe narrator's / God's
What the sentence doesRecords an expectationCorrects an expectation
What al-dhakar isWhat was expected, hoped forWhat was expected, the lesser
To whom it gives precedenceTo neither — a note of a stateTo the female — because ka'l-unthā is taken as the measure

And now, per the method (Method), I enter a note, because this sentence is often misused:

One. Whichever reading is taken, the sentence is not a sentence of general ruling. It is spoken inside a scene, at the moment of a birth, in the context of a particular vow. Every element around the sentence is particular: a woman, a vow, a birth, a name.

Two. The word order of the sentence does not support a reading of disparagement; it blocks it. In Arabic, in the pattern laysa A ka-B, the measure is B — A is what is likened, B is what it is likened to. That is, the sentence makes unthā the measure and dhakar what is measured. This is a fact of word order that comes out of the wording itself, and it has been recorded in the classical commentaries as well.

Three. And the continuation of the verse confirms it. What happens immediately after the sentence: a name is given to the girl (Maryam), protection is sought, and then in verse 37 it is said "Her Lord accepted her with a good acceptance". That is, the vow is accepted — and what was expected in the vow was a male. The flow of the text describes not a deficiency but a change of place.

Four. And the sixth verse of the sūra had laid down the ruling of this scene in advance: huwa'lladhī yuṣawwirukum fi'l-arḥāmi kayfa yashāʾ — "He it is who shapes you in the wombs as He wills." Thirty verses apart, in the same sūra. This is a link verifiable from the text.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: what the two verses do together is to show the difference between a person's plan and what comes about. The woman had made a plan; the plan held, but not in the shape she expected. And the sūra will tell this not as a loss but as an outcome greater than the plan itself — because the child born will be settled at the centre of the family from which the sūra takes its name.

And I record this explicitly: no disparaging ruling about women can be drawn from this sentence; none is drawn in this commentary. What the sentence addresses is not a sex but an expectation.

وَإِنِّى سَمَّيْتُهَا مَرْيَمَ

The verb of naming is worth recording: sammaytuhā — "I named her". The pronoun is emphatic (innī).

And the name will occur six times in the second half of the sūra. In Maryam a sūra bears this name, and Mary's account was treated there in detail.

Per the method (Method) I record this: differing views are transmitted in the classical sources about the meaning of the name, and there is no certain knowledge. I make no claim about its meaning in this commentary.

ٱلشَّيْطَٰنِ ٱلرَّجِيمِrajīm: from the root ر-ج-م, stoned, driven off. The root was treated at 37/7 in al-Ṣāffāt and at 67/5 in al-Mulk (rujūman li'sh-shayāṭīn).

And the extent of the request must be recorded: uʿīdhuhā bika wa dhurriyyatahā — "her and her offspring". That is, the request for protection is stretched a generation further. And that offspring will, later in the sūra, consist of a single person.


3/37

فَتَقَبَّلَهَا رَبُّهَا بِقَبُولٍ حَسَنٍ وَأَنۢبَتَهَا نَبَاتًا حَسَنًا وَكَفَّلَهَا زَكَرِيَّا كُلَّمَا دَخَلَ عَلَيْهَا زَكَرِيَّا ٱلْمِحْرَابَ وَجَدَ عِندَهَا رِزْقًا

Fa-taqabbalahā rabbuhā bi-qabūlin ḥasanin wa anbatahā nabātan ḥasanan wa kaffalahā Zakariyyā, kullamā dakhala ʿalayhā Zakariyya'l-miḥrāba wajada ʿindahā rizqā, qāla yā Maryamu annā laki hādhā, qālat huwa min ʿindi'llāh, inna'llāha yarzuqu man yashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb

"Her Lord accepted her with a good acceptance and made her grow as a good plant grows, and He gave Zechariah charge of her. Whenever Zechariah entered upon her in the sanctuary he found provision beside her. 'Mary! Where does this come to you from?' he said. And she said: 'It is from God. Truly God provides for whom He wills without reckoning.'"

أَنۢبَتَهَا نَبَاتًا حَسَنًا — like a plant

The root ن-ب-ت: a plant's coming up out of the ground. Form IV: anbata — to make grow, to raise.

And the construction of the comparison must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: the object of the verb is a human being, but its verbal noun is the verbal noun of a plant (nabātan). In Arabic this is called the absolute object (mafʿūl muṭlaq), and it reinforces the verb.

That is, the sentence does not say "He raised her well"; it says "He made her grow as one makes a plant grow."

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the comparison carries the sense that the growing happened of itself and unseen. A plant is not seen in the moment of its growing; whoever looks finds it each time a little further grown. And this picture agrees with what follows in the verse: every time Zechariah entered he found something new.

كُلَّمَا دَخَلَ عَلَيْهَاوَجَدَ عِندَهَا رِزْقًا

The word order must be recorded: kullamā — "whenever". This particle conveys repetition, and although the two verbs that follow it are both perfect, the sentence conveys continuance.

That is, the scene is not a one-time event; it is a repeated state.

ٱلْمِحْرَاب — root ح-ر-ب. The lexicographers differ over the origin of the word; it is commonly explained as the foremost, highest or innermost part of a place. The present-day sense of miḥrāb (the niche where the one leading the prayer stands) is a usage that settled later and cannot be read back into the verse. I record this explicitly.

The word occurs twice in the sūra — at 37 (beside Mary) and at 39 (Zechariah himself there). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and it binds the two scenes to the same place.

Question and answer

The scene consists of a question and an answer, and the word order of both is worth recording:

SpeakerWordsWhat it does
ZechariahAnnā laki hādhā — "Where does this come to you from?"Asks for a cause
MaryHuwa min ʿindi'llāh — "It is from God"Names not a cause but a source

I record this as an observation: the question is looking for an intermediary; the answer puts nothing in between. And the last sentence of the answer comes as a rule: inna'llāha yarzuqu man yashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb.

And this sentence is word for word the same as the last sentence of verse 27 of the sūra: wa tarzuqu man tashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb (27) — inna'llāha yarzuqu man yashāʾu bi-ghayri ḥisāb (37).

VerseWho says itAbout whom
27The one praying — second person (tarzuqu)Addressed to God
37Mary — third person (yarzuqu)About an event

The same sentence, one in a prayer and one in a scene. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: what is said in the twenty-seventh verse as a principle is shown in the thirty-seventh as having come about in a room. The sūra states the principle and gives its instance ten verses later.

And in the next verse this scene will have a consequence: Zechariah will pray.


3/38-41

هُنَالِكَ دَعَا زَكَرِيَّا رَبَّهُۥ قَالَ رَبِّ هَبْ لِى مِن لَّدُنكَ ذُرِّيَّةً طَيِّبَةً إِنَّكَ سَمِيعُ ٱلدُّعَآءِ

Hunālika daʿā Zakariyyā rabbah, qāla rabbi hab lī min ladunka dhurriyyatan ṭayyibah, innaka samīʿu'd-duʿāʾ · Fa-nādathu'l-malāʾikatu wa huwa qāʾimun yuṣallī fi'l-miḥrābi anna'llāha yubashshiruka bi-Yaḥyā muṣaddiqan bi-kalimatin mina'llāhi wa sayyidan wa ḥaṣūran wa nabiyyan mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn · Qāla rabbi annā yakūnu lī ghulāmun wa qad balaghaniya'l-kibaru wa'mraʾatī ʿāqir, qāla kadhālika'llāhu yafʿalu mā yashāʾ · Qāla rabbi'jʿal lī āyah, qāla āyatuka allā tukallima'n-nāsa thalāthata ayyāmin illā ramzā, wa'dhkur rabbaka kathīran wa sabbiḥ bi'l-ʿashiyyi wa'l-ibkār

"There and then Zechariah prayed to his Lord: 'My Lord! Grant me from Your presence a goodly offspring; truly You hear prayer.' · The angels called to him while he stood praying in the sanctuary: 'God gives you good news of John — confirming a word from God, a lord, one who holds himself back, and a prophet from among the righteous.' · He said: 'My Lord! How shall I have a boy, when old age has overtaken me and my wife is barren?' He said: 'Even so; God does what He wills.' · 'My Lord! Give me a sign.' He said: 'Your sign is that for three days you shall not speak to people except by gesture. Remember your Lord much, and glorify Him in the evening and in the early morning.'"


This account was treated in detail at 19/1-15 in Maryam. There nidāʾan khafiyyā, wahana'l-ʿaẓmu minnī, ishtaʿala'r-raʾsu shaybā, ʿitiyyā, and the list of what was given to John were analysed. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

The work I shall do here is to show the difference between the two tellings. And the difference can be verified from the text.

The two tellings — a comparison

Maryam 19/1-15Āl ʿImrān 3/38-41
Where the prayer standsThe opening of the sūra — the account begins hereAfter a scenehunālika ("there and then")
The voice of the prayerNidāʾan khafiyyā — with a hidden voiceNo note about the voice
The ground of the prayerWahana'l-ʿaẓmu… wa'shtaʿala'r-raʾsa description of the bodyNo ground — the request directly
What is askedWaliyyan… yarithunīan heirDhurriyyatan ṭayyibatana goodly offspring
Who gives the good newsYā Zakariyyā innā nubashshirukadirectlyFa-nādathu'l-malāʾikathe angels
His state at the moment of the newsNot statedWa huwa qāʾimun yuṣallī fi'l-miḥrāb
The wording of the objectionAnnā yakūnu lī ghulāmun wa kānati'mraʾatī ʿāqiran wa qad balaghtu mina'l-kibari ʿitiyyāAnnā yakūnu lī ghulāmun wa qad balaghaniya'l-kibaru wa'mraʾatī ʿāqir
The wording of the answerKadhālika qāla rabbuka huwa ʿalayya hayyin + wa qad khalaqtuka min qablu wa lam taku shayʾāKadhālika'llāhu yafʿalu mā yashāʾ
The length of the signThalātha layālin sawiyyāthree nightsThalāthata ayyāmin illā ramzāthree days
John's attributesal-ḥukm, ḥanān, zakāt, taqiyy, barran bi-wālidayh, lam yakun jabbāran ʿaṣiyyāMuṣaddiqan bi-kalimatin mina'llāh, sayyidan, ḥaṣūran, nabiyyan mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn

Every row of this table can be verified from the two texts. I now record three observations that come out of the table.

One. Sūrat Maryam tells the person; Āl ʿImrān tells the context. In Maryam there are Zechariah's bones, his hair, the failing of his voice — the state of a human being is described. In Āl ʿImrān there is none of this; in its place stands hunālika — "there and then". That is, the prayer is given as the consequence of the scene seen in the preceding verse (the finding of unlooked-for provision beside Mary).

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in Āl ʿImrān the prayer is an inference. Zechariah has seen a provision that came without a cause, and has asked for his own impossibility. Hunālika is the one word that establishes this link, and it is not in Sūrat Maryam.

Two. In the two sūras the number three is the same and the unit different: thalātha layāl (Maryam) / thalāthata ayyām (Āl ʿImrān). This is a verifiable difference of wording. In the classical commentaries this is explained as two namings of the same span — in Arabic it is common for day and night to be used so as to include one another. I transmit this and build no ruling on it.

Three. The lists of attributes differ, and neither of them is deficient. What is given in Maryam bears on the inner world (ḥanān, zakāt, taqiyy); what is given in Āl ʿImrān bears on position (muṣaddiq, sayyid, nabī). I record this as an observation: the two sūras, telling of the same person, bring different attributes forward, and each sūra takes what suits its own axis. The axis of Sūrat Maryam is al-Raḥmān; the axis of Āl ʿImrān is being chosen, and position.

سَيِّدًا وَحَصُورًا

سَيِّد — the root س-و-د: to go in front, to be at the head. Sayyid — the one who stands before his people. The word occurs rarely in the Qurʾān, and here it is used as the attribute of a prophet.

حَصُور — the root ح-ص-ر: to encircle, to press in, to hold back. Ḥaṣr — narrowing, restriction. Ḥaṣūr is on the faʿūl pattern and conveys intensity.

The senses given to the word in the classical commentaries:

#What ḥaṣūr isExplanation
1One who holds himself backMaster of his appetite, reining in his desire
2One who does not marryKeeping away from women
3One held back from sinOne whose turning to evil is prevented

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

And per the method (Method) I enter a note: from the second reading it cannot be concluded that not marrying is a general excellence; elsewhere the Qurʾān says plainly that prophets had wives and children (al-Raʿd 13/38treated in al-Raʿd). No legal or moral ruling is established on this matter in this commentary.

كَذَٰلِكَ ٱللَّهُ يَفْعَلُ مَا يَشَآءُ

The form of the answer must be recorded, and it differs from the one in Sūrat Maryam.

SūraThe answerWhat it rests on
Maryam 19/9Huwa ʿalayya hayyin wa qad khalaqtuka min qablu wa lam taku shayʾāA past instance — the addressee's own creation
Āl ʿImrān 3/40Kadhālika'llāhu yafʿalu mā yashāʾThe nature of the agent — no instance at all is given

I record this as an observation: in Maryam the objection is met with a proof; in Āl ʿImrān with a declaration. And the context of Āl ʿImrān explains this: in this sūra something like the same sentence will be said to Mary as well, at verse forty-seven (kadhāliki'llāhu yakhluqu mā yashāʾ) — that is, the sentence is here turned into a pattern, and it binds the two annunciations together.

VerseTo whomSentence
40ZechariahKadhālika'llāhu yafʿalu mā yashāʾ
47MaryKadhāliki'llāhu yakhluqu mā yashāʾ

Two sentences on the same pattern; the one difference is in the verb: yafʿal (He does) / yakhluq (He creates). This is a verifiable difference of wording.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: what Zechariah asks for is an exception to an order that is working — a child from an old man. Mary's case, on the other hand, is outside the order. And the verbs appear to have been chosen accordingly: one is doing, the other creating. I give this as an observation; I establish no fixed rule.

إِلَّا رَمْزًا

The root ر-م-ز: to signal with the lip, the eye or the hand — a communication made without the voice. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

And the observation recorded in Maryam can be carried over here: there it was said that the prayer was hidden (nidāʾan khafiyyā), and what was given as a sign also had to do with the voice.

In Āl ʿImrān the prayer is not silent; but the sign is again silence. I record this as an observation: in both sūras the same sign is given — not being able to speak. And in both sūras the same command follows it: sabbiḥ — glorify.

That is, speech with people is cut off, and the remembrance of God goes on. This is a thing shared that can be verified from the two texts.


3/42-44

وَإِذْ قَالَتِ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ يَٰمَرْيَمُ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ ٱصْطَفَىٰكِ وَطَهَّرَكِ وَٱصْطَفَىٰكِ عَلَىٰ نِسَآءِ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَ

Wa idh qālati'l-malāʾikatu yā Maryamu inna'llāha'ṣṭafāki wa ṭahharaki wa'ṣṭafāki ʿalā nisāʾi'l-ʿālamīn · Yā Maryamu'qnutī li-rabbiki wa'sjudī wa'rkaʿī maʿa'r-rākiʿīn · Dhālika min anbāʾi'l-ghaybi nūḥīhi ilayk, wa mā kunta ladayhim idh yulqūna aqlāmahum ayyuhum yakfulu Maryama wa mā kunta ladayhim idh yakhtaṣimūn

"When the angels said: 'Mary! God has chosen you and purified you, and chosen you above the women of all beings. · Mary! Be devoutly obedient to your Lord, prostrate yourself, and bow with those who bow.' · These are among the tidings of the unseen that We reveal to you. You were not with them when they cast their pens to see which of them should have charge of Mary; nor were you with them when they contended."

Twice ٱصْطَفَىٰ

The verb occurs twice in the same verse, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on this repetition:

OrderSentenceQualification
1Inna'llāha'ṣṭafākiUnqualified — absolute
2Wa'ṣṭafāki ʿalā nisāʾi'l-ʿālamīnQualified — "above the women of all beings"
Between themWa ṭahharakiPurification

The classical explanations:

#The difference between the two choosings
1The first is acceptance, the second being set above
2The first is at the birth (the acceptance of the vow), the second at the annunciation
3The first is general (being chosen for a religious life), the second particular (becoming the mother of Jesus)

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

And the verb in the middle must be recorded: ṭahharaki — "purified you". The root ط-ه-ر: material and spiritual purity. The root was treated at 2/222 in al-Baqara and at 74/4 in al-Muddaththir.

The word order is worth recording: purification stands between the two choosings. I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence proceeds choosing–purifying–choosing; that is, the second choosing is not a repetition of the first, for an operation stands between them.

ٱقْنُتِى وَٱسْجُدِى وَٱرْكَعِى

Three commands, and their order must be recorded, because it is the reverse of the customary order of the prayer: bowing comes before prostration; here prostration is named first.

Two explanations of this are transmitted in the classical commentaries:

#Explanation
1The particle wāw does not convey order (muṭlaq al-jamʿ); no temporal order is to be sought among the acts listed
2The order goes by the weight of the acts; the most intense has been brought forward

Both are transmitted. I do not impose a preference and I draw no legal conclusion from this.

ٱقْنُتِى — the root ق-ن-ت: a continuous and silent submission, a standing in one state. The root was treated at 33/31 in al-Aḥzāb and at 66/12 in al-Taḥrīm — and in al-Taḥrīm about this same person: wa kānat mina'l-qānitīn.

And the note maʿa'r-rākiʿīn is worth recording: "together with those who bow".

I record this as an observation: the first two commands are singular and solitary; to the third a note of being together is added. And al-rākiʿīn is a masculine plural. In the classical commentaries this is explained in the sense of "within the congregation". I transmit this and build no ruling on it.

يُلْقُونَ أَقْلَٰمَهُمْ — and the silence of the text

The forty-fourth verse names a scene but does not narrate it: idh yulqūna aqlāmahum ayyuhum yakfulu Maryam — "when they cast their pens to see which of them should have charge of Mary."

The Qurʾān says nothing else about this scene: how many they were, how the pen was cast, who won — none of it. And in the classical commentaries various reports are passed on that fill this gap. Per the method (Method) those reports are not passed on in this commentary.

The verse's own sentence already says why the scene is named: dhālika min anbāʾi'l-ghaybi nūḥīhi ilayk — "these are among the tidings of the unseen that We reveal to you."

And the note repeated twice: wa mā kunta ladayhim — "you were not with them."

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence is repeated twice, for two separate scenes (the casting of pens, the contending). And the work of the repetition is to show the source of the knowledge. The detail of the scene is not given; what is given is where that detail does not come from.

يَخْتَصِمُونَ — the root خ-ص-م: to contend, to dispute at law. The root was treated at 38/64 in Ṣād (takhāṣumu ahli'n-nār) and at 36/49 in Yāsīn.

And there is a point that must be recorded: the verse describes contending over a good thing — over who is to look after the child. I give this as an observation: the sūra always uses the words ikhtilāf and tafarruq negatively (19, 103, 105); the word used here is a different one (ikhtiṣām), and its subject is the sharing out of a responsibility.


3/45-47

إِذْ قَالَتِ ٱلْمَلَٰٓئِكَةُ يَٰمَرْيَمُ إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ يُبَشِّرُكِ بِكَلِمَةٍ مِّنْهُ ٱسْمُهُ ٱلْمَسِيحُ عِيسَى ٱبْنُ مَرْيَمَ وَجِيهًا فِى ٱلدُّنْيَا وَٱلْءَاخِرَةِ وَمِنَ ٱلْمُقَرَّبِينَ

Idh qālati'l-malāʾikatu yā Maryamu inna'llāha yubashshiruki bi-kalimatin minhu'smuhu'l-Masīḥu ʿĪsa'bnu Maryama wajīhan fi'd-dunyā wa'l-ākhirati wa mina'l-muqarrabīn · Wa yukallimu'n-nāsa fi'l-mahdi wa kahlan wa mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn · Qālat rabbi annā yakūnu lī waladun wa lam yamsasnī bashar, qāla kadhāliki'llāhu yakhluqu mā yashāʾ, idhā qaḍā amran fa-innamā yaqūlu lahū kun fa-yakūn

"When the angels said: 'Mary! God gives you good news of a word from Him; his name is the Messiah, Jesus son of Mary; he is honoured in this world and in the hereafter and is of those brought near. · He will speak to people in the cradle and in his maturity, and he is of the righteous.' · She said: 'My Lord! How shall I have a child, when no man has touched me?' He said: 'Even so; God creates what He wills. When He decrees a thing He only says to it 'Be', and it is.'"


This scene was treated at 19/16-21 in Maryam. There intabadhat, ḥijāb, aʿūdhu bi'r-Raḥmān, in kunta taqiyyā and the form of the annunciation were analysed. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. Here I show the difference between the two tellings.

The two tellings — a comparison

Maryam 19/16-21Āl ʿImrān 3/42-47
The sceneIntabadhat… fa'ttakhadhat min dūnihim ḥijābā — a withdrawing and a screenNo scene — no place is named
The one who comesRūḥanāone, fa-tamaththala lahā basharan sawiyyāAl-malāʾikaplural, no description of form
Mary's first reactionInnī aʿūdhu bi'r-Raḥmāni minktaking refugeNo reaction; she first hears praise (42)
The wording of the newsLi-ahaba laki ghulāman zakiyyāBi-kalimatin minhu'smuhu'l-Masīḥu ʿĪsa'bnu Maryam
Is a name givenNoYes — three names at once
Her objectionAnnā yakūnu lī ghulāmun wa lam yamsasnī basharun wa lam aku baghiyyāAnnā yakūnu lī waladun wa lam yamsasnī bashar
The answerKadhāliki qāla rabbuki huwa ʿalayya hayyinKadhāliki'llāhu yakhluqu mā yashāʾ + kun fa-yakūn
The birth scenePresent — the palm tree, the pangs, yā laytanī mittu (23-26)Absent
The return to her peoplePresentfa-atat bihī qawmahā taḥmiluh (27-33)Absent
Its axisWhat Mary went throughThe position of Jesus

The last row of the table explains all the differences, and I record this as my own reading: Sūrat Maryam tells what happened to a human being — fear, taking refuge, the pangs, facing an accusation. Āl ʿImrān, on the other hand, is speaking inside a dispute, and for that reason it counts up who Jesus is and what he is not: a word, Messiah, son of Mary, honoured, brought near, righteous, speaking, a prophet. Eight attributes, and not one of them is "son of God".

In Sūrat Maryam there is a birth; in Āl ʿImrān there is no birth. This is a fact verifiable from the two texts, and it separates the work of the two sūras.

بِكَلِمَةٍ مِّنْهُ — "a word from Him"

The construction must be recorded, and it is one of the places the classical commentaries have dwelt on most.

The root ك-ل-م: to wound; and to utter speech. The lexicographers establish the link thus: an utterance leaves a mark in the hearer. Kalima — a sound that leaves a mark.

And what must be recorded is the preposition: kalimatin minhu — "a word from Him". Min conveys source.

The readings transmitted in the classical commentaries about what the kalima is:

#What the kalima isIts ground
1The command "Be" — Jesus is called a "word" because he came to be by that commandThe end of the same verse: kun fa-yakūn
2The good news itself — the utterance announcedYubashshiruki bi-kalimah — it comes with the verb of announcing
3A naming — a title of JesusThe same construction occurs at al-Nisāʾ 4/171

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

And per the method (Method) I record this plainly: the construction is bounded by the verse's own sentence. The verse does not debate what the kalima is; it gives it as a subject of good news and immediately afterwards names it with three names. No theological debate is entered in this commentary.

And a point of word order must be recorded, and the classical commentaries point to it: bi-kalimatin is feminine, but the pronoun comes masculine: ismuhū — "his name" (not ismuhā).

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence passes from the kalima to a person, and it makes the passage by a pronoun. That is, what is announced is not an utterance but a human being.

ٱلْمَسِيحُ عِيسَى ٱبْنُ مَرْيَمَ — three names at once

Three namings stand side by side, and all three will be at work in the sūra:

NameWhat it conveys
al-MasīḥA title
ʿĪsāA personal name
Ibnu MaryamDescent — through the mother

ٱلْمَسِيح — the root م-س-ح: to stroke with the hand, to wipe. More than one explanation is transmitted in the classical sources for why the word carries this name (because he was anointed, because he travelled about, because he healed the sick by touching them). There is no certain knowledge, and I impose no preference.

And the note ibnu Maryam must be dwelt on: the Qurʾān names Jesus for the most part with this construction. This is a verifiable fact of usage.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the giving of descent through the mother agrees with the later sentence of the verse (lam yamsasnī bashar) — that is, the naming contains the event itself. And the same naming is also the ground of the proof that will be built at verse 59 of the sūra.

وَجِيهًا — and the word order of the list of names

The root و-ج-ه. Wajīhone who has a face, held in esteem, whose word counts. The same root occurred in the twentieth verse in the construction aslamtu wajhī.

And the word order of the list must be recorded:

AttributeIts field
Wajīhan fi'd-dunyā wa'l-ākhiraIn both worlds at once
Wa mina'l-muqarrabīnNearness
Wa yukallimu'n-nāsa fi'l-mahdi wa kahlāSpeaking
Wa mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīnRighteousness

فِى ٱلْمَهْدِ وَكَهْلًا — "in the cradle and in maturity".

The root ك-ه-ل: one who has come to middle age, who has ripened. The word occurs in the Qurʾān only in this construction (here and at 5/110).

And the construction must be recorded, and the classical commentaries have dwelt on it: two states are set side by side — one the age at which speaking is extraordinary, the other the age at which it is ordinary.

I record this as an observation: the sentence does not content itself with either of the two ends. Had only the cradle been named, it would have been a note of a marvel; had only maturity been named, nothing would have been said. What is said when the two are named together is continuance: the speaking is not a one-time sign.

كُن فَيَكُونُ

It was treated at 2/117 in al-Baqara, and the note there was this:

"كُن فَيَكُونُ — 'He says: be; and it is'. The expression pictures creation not as a process but as an utterance. Material, tool, labour, time — none of them is named."

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

Here I add what belongs to Āl ʿImrān alone, and it is a link verifiable within the sūra: the expression occurs twice in the sūra — at 47 and at 59. And at its second occurrence it will be named together with the creation of Adam.

VerseContextIts work
47An answer to Mary's objectionThe meeting of an impossibility
59The comparison of Adam and JesusPart of a proof

The same expression, one an answer and one a proof. This will be taken up separately at verse 59.


3/48-51

وَيُعَلِّمُهُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحِكْمَةَ وَٱلتَّوْرَىٰةَ وَٱلْإِنجِيلَ · وَرَسُولًا إِلَىٰ بَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ

Wa yuʿallimuhu'l-kitāba wa'l-ḥikmata wa't-Tawrāta wa'l-Injīl · Wa rasūlan ilā banī Isrāʾīla annī qad jiʾtukum bi-āyatin min rabbikum annī akhluqu lakum mina'ṭ-ṭīni ka-hayʾati'ṭ-ṭayri fa-anfukhu fīhi fa-yakūnu ṭayran bi-idhni'llāh, wa ubriʾu'l-akmaha wa'l-abraṣa wa uḥyi'l-mawtā bi-idhni'llāh, wa unabbiʾukum bimā taʾkulūna wa mā taddakhirūna fī buyūtikum, inna fī dhālika la-āyatan lakum in kuntum muʾminīn · Wa muṣaddiqan limā bayna yadayya mina't-Tawrāti wa li-uḥilla lakum baʿḍa'lladhī ḥurrima ʿalaykum, wa jiʾtukum bi-āyatin min rabbikum fa'ttaqu'llāha wa aṭīʿūn · Inna'llāha rabbī wa rabbukum fa'ʿbudūh, hādhā ṣirāṭun mustaqīm

"He will teach him the Book, wisdom, the Torah and the Gospel · and (send him) as a messenger to the Children of Israel: 'I have come to you with a sign from your Lord. For you I shape out of clay something in the form of a bird, and I breathe into it; by God's leave it becomes a bird. By God's leave I heal the one born blind and the leper, and I raise the dead. I also tell you what you eat and what you store up in your houses. If you are believers there is in this a sign for you.' · 'Confirming the Torah that was before me, and to make lawful for you some of what was forbidden you…' · 'Truly God is my Lord and your Lord; so serve Him. This is a straight path.'"

بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ — a note repeated twice

This is the most important fact of word order in the block, and it is verifiable: the expression occurs twice in the forty-ninth verse in the form bi-idhni'llāh, and the third verb is tied to the same note.

VerbThe note
Fa-yakūnu ṭayrāبِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ
Wa ubriʾu'l-akmaha wa'l-abraṣ(tied to the same note)
Wa uḥyi'l-mawtāبِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ

And the subjects of the verbs must be recorded: all of them are first person singularakhluqu, anfukhu, ubriʾu, uḥyī, unabbiʾu. "I shape, I breathe, I heal, I raise."

And at the end of every sequence of verbs the same note comes.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the word order of the sentence says two things at once. The acts are not denied — they really are done. But the authority of the acts is each time tied elsewhere. And this is the whole question of the sūra in this block: what Jesus did is not denied; the conclusion drawn from what he did is limited.

And the last sentence of the block does this plainly: inna'llāha rabbī wa rabbukum — "God is my Lord and your Lord." The sentence puts the speaker on the same side as those he addresses.

This sentence occurs several times in the Qurʾān, always in the mouth of Jesus (5/72, 5/117, 19/36, 43/64). It was treated at 19/36 in Maryam. I rely on that treatment.

And it can be compared with the sentence at 29/46 in al-ʿAnkabūt: wa ilāhunā wa ilāhukum wāḥid. The two sentences do the same work, and this will be taken up separately at verse 64 of the sūra.

ٱلْأَكْمَهَ وَٱلْأَبْرَصَ

أَكْمَه — from the root ك-م-ه: blind from birth. And أَبْرَص — from the root ب-ر-ص: stricken with the white skin disease.

Both words occur in the Qurʾān only in these two places (here and at 5/110).

I record this as an observation and I force no connection: the two illnesses have in common that both are visible and lasting. One is from birth, the other carries its mark on the skin. That is, both are conditions that cannot be hidden and do not change by ordinary means.

وَلِأُحِلَّ لَكُم بَعْضَ ٱلَّذِى حُرِّمَ عَلَيْكُمْ

The verse's caveat matters: baʿḍa'lladhī — "some of it". Not all.

Per the method (Method) I record this: this sentence is connected with a ruling named elsewhere in the Qurʾān (al-Nisāʾ 4/160, al-Anʿām 6/146). No legal ruling is built on that connection in this commentary; what is to be recorded is that the sentence speaks of a partial change.

And the closing sentence of the block is worth recording: hādhā ṣirāṭun mustaqīm. The construction was treated in detail in al-Fātiḥa. I do not repeat it here. And it will occur once more in the sūra, at verse 101: wa man yaʿtaṣim bi'llāhi fa-qad hudiya ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm. Two occurrences, one inside an account and one in an address to the community.


3/52-54

فَلَمَّآ أَحَسَّ عِيسَىٰ مِنْهُمُ ٱلْكُفْرَ قَالَ مَنْ أَنصَارِىٓ إِلَى ٱللَّهِ قَالَ ٱلْحَوَارِيُّونَ نَحْنُ أَنصَارُ ٱللَّهِ

Fa-lammā aḥassa ʿĪsā minhumu'l-kufra qāla man anṣārī ila'llāh, qāla'l-ḥawāriyyūna naḥnu anṣāru'llāhi āmannā bi'llāhi wa'shhad bi-annā muslimūn · Rabbanā āmannā bimā anzalta wa'ttabaʿna'r-rasūla fa'ktubnā maʿa'sh-shāhidīn · Wa makarū wa makara'llāh, wa'llāhu khayru'l-mākirīn

"When Jesus sensed disbelief in them he said: 'Who are my helpers on the way to God?' The disciples said: 'We are God's helpers; we have believed in God. Bear witness that we are those who have handed themselves over.' · 'Our Lord! We have believed in what You sent down and we have followed the messenger; write us down among those who bear witness.' · They laid a plot; and God laid His plan. God is the best of planners."

أَحَسَّ — to sense

The root ح-س-س: to perceive by the senses. Form IV: aḥassa — to sense, to feel.

The choice of the word is worth recording: the verse does not say "he saw" or "he knew". Aḥassa — he sensed. That is, the disbelief has not yet been spoken openly.

I record this as an observation: the sentence shows that the response is given before open hostility. And the response given is not a defence but a call: man anṣārī ila'llāh.

ٱلْحَوَارِيُّون — the root ح-و-ر: the lexicographers connect the word with the senses of whiteness and of turning to something; on the origin of ḥawārī there is no firm agreement. I impose no preference in this commentary.

And the last sentence of the answer must be recorded: wa'shhad bi-annā muslimūn — "bear witness that we are those who have handed themselves over".

This is directly connected with verse 19 of the sūra and confirms what I recorded there: the word islām is here the self-naming of the community around Jesus. This is a fact of usage verifiable from the text.

وَمَكَرُوا۟ وَمَكَرَ ٱللَّهُ

The root م-ك-ر: to lay a scheme in secret. The root was treated at 27/50-51 in al-Naml and at 13/42 in al-Raʿd.

Per the method (Method) I enter a note, and it has been kept consistently in the series: when the word is used of God it does not mean deceiving or wronging. In Arabic this is called mushākala (answering with the same word): the response is named with the wording of the first act.

And the sentence itself shows this: wa'llāhu khayru'l-mākirīn — "the best of planners". The attribute "best" records within the sentence that the verb is not meant in a bad sense.

This distinction was treated at 8/30 in al-Anfāl (wa yamkurūna wa yamkuru'llāh). I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.


3/55-58

إِذْ قَالَ ٱللَّهُ يَٰعِيسَىٰٓ إِنِّى مُتَوَفِّيكَ وَرَافِعُكَ إِلَىَّ وَمُطَهِّرُكَ مِنَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟

Idh qāla'llāhu yā ʿĪsā innī mutawaffīka wa rāfiʿuka ilayya wa muṭahhiruka mina'lladhīna kafarū wa jāʿilu'lladhīna'ttabaʿūka fawqa'lladhīna kafarū ilā yawmi'l-qiyāmah, thumma ilayya marjiʿukum fa-aḥkumu baynakum fīmā kuntum fīhi takhtalifūn

"When God said: 'Jesus! I shall take you fully, and raise you to Myself, and purify you of those who disbelieve, and set those who follow you above those who disbelieve until the day of resurrection. Then your return is to Me; and I shall judge between you in what you differed over.'"

مُتَوَفِّيكَ — a disputed word

The root و-ف-ي: to be complete, to be without deficiency. Wafāʾ — completing; īfāʾ — giving a right in full. Form V: tawaffā — to take a thing in full.

At the centre of the root there is no death; there is taking in full. Its use for death comes from the sense of the soul's being taken complete. And the Qurʾān uses the same verb of sleep as well (al-Zumar 39/42, al-Anʿām 6/60) — treated at 39/42 in al-Zumar. I rely on that treatment.

The sense of this word here is disputed in the classical commentaries, and the disagreement has continued. I give it in a table and impose no preference:

#What mutawaffīka meansExplanation
1I shall cause you to dieThe common use of the word; the rafʿ comes after it
2I shall take you in fullThe sense of death is not required; the root is "taking complete"
3I shall take you in a state resembling sleepRests on the Qurʾān's use of the same verb for sleep
4The order is by anticipation and postponement"I shall raise you and (then) cause you to die" — the wāw does not convey order

All four readings are transmitted in the classical sources. I do not impose a preference.

And per the method (Method) I enter a plain note: a wide theological and narrative literature has formed around this verse. That debate is not entered in this commentary. What is to be recorded is that the wording of the verse lists four acts: tawaffī, rafʿ, taṭhīr, jaʿl. And all four are ascribed to God; the subject of none of them is Jesus.

فَوْقَ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ

Per the method (Method) I record this: both sides in the sentence are named by an attributealladhīna'ttabaʿūk (those who followed you) and alladhīna kafarū (those who disbelieved). No people, nation or religious institution is named.

And what the word fawqa (above) conveys is disputed in the classical commentaries:

ReadingWhat fawqa is
1Superiority in proof
2In respect of number and spread
3In respect of position — the superiority of the argument

I transmit what is transmitted; I impose no preference. And no present-day political or social conclusion is drawn from this.

Verses fifty-six and fifty-seven compare two outcomes; verse fifty-eight closes the block: dhālika natlūhu ʿalayka mina'l-āyāti wa'dh-dhikri'l-ḥakīm — "this We recite to you of the signs and of the wise reminder."

I record this as an observation about the word order: before the account ends, the text turns once more to the narrator — just as in verse 44 (dhālika min anbāʾi'l-ghayb). The sūra sets a note of the same kind at both ends of the account.


3/59-60

إِنَّ مَثَلَ عِيسَىٰ عِندَ ٱللَّهِ كَمَثَلِ ءَادَمَ خَلَقَهُۥ مِن تُرَابٍ ثُمَّ قَالَ لَهُۥ كُن فَيَكُونُ

Inna mathala ʿĪsā ʿinda'llāhi ka-mathali Ādam, khalaqahū min turābin thumma qāla lahū kun fa-yakūn · Al-ḥaqqu min rabbika fa-lā takūna mina'l-mumtarīn

"With God the case of Jesus is like the case of Adam: He created him from dust, then said to him 'Be'; and he was. · The truth is from your Lord; so do not be of those who doubt."


This verse is a proof, and proofs are read by being taken apart. I shall set out its structure step by step.

The structure of the proof

The objection is this (it is not stated in the verse, but this is what the proof answers): a human being born without a father is not an ordinary human being; therefore he is something else.

The answer of the proof lies in three steps:

StepSentenceWhat it does
1Ka-mathali ĀdamIt brings an instance — an instance over which there is no dispute
2Khalaqahū min turābIt shows that the instance is further out
3Thumma qāla lahū kun fa-yakūnIt names the shared cause of the two cases

And the force of the proof lies in the second step. This needs opening out.

In the birth of Jesus there is a mother; there is no father. In the creation of Adam there is neither mother nor father. That is, the instance brought is more extraordinary than the case under dispute.

The logic of the proof is this, and it can be seen in a table:

AdamJesusAn ordinary human being
FatherNoneNonePresent
MotherNonePresentPresent
How many causes lackingTwoOneNone

And the conclusion is unavoidable: if the absence of one cause puts a person outside humanity, the absence of two would do so all the more. But no such claim is made about Adam by any side. Therefore the measure is not the number of causes.

In classical logic this is called qiyās bi'l-awlā, an argument a fortiori: a ruling is voided in the weaker instance by being shown not to hold in the stronger one.

I record this way of taking the proof apart as my own reading; but the structure itself comes out of the wording of the verse, and it has been explained in this direction in the classical commentaries as well.

مَثَل — the work of the word

The root م-ث-ل: to resemble, to be equal. Mathal — a likeness, an instance; and the case, the condition of a thing.

And the work of the word in the sentence must be recorded: the verse does not say "Jesus is like Adam". Mathala ʿĪsā… ka-mathali Ādam — "the case of Jesus is like the case of Adam."

I record this as an observation about the word order: what is likened is not the persons but the manner of their coming to be. This also settles the extent of the proof: the verse is not comparing the attributes of two prophets.

And the caveat must be recorded: ʿinda'llāh — "with God". That is, the measure is not people's view.

كُن فَيَكُونُ — the second occurrence

It was treated at 2/117 in al-Baqara; I do not repeat it here.

Here I add the fact within the sūra: the expression occurs twice in the sūra, and the two occurrences are bound to each other.

VerseTo whom it is saidIts work
47To MaryAn answer to an objection — to the question "how can this be?"
59To the one addressedThe last step of a proof

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the forty-seventh verse this expression conveyed a possibility; in the fifty-ninth it is used as a leveller. The same utterance ties two human beings to the same cause and renders the difference between them — one from dust, the other from a mother — ineffective as regards the outcome.

And a point of word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with khalaqahū min turābin (perfect) and ends with fa-yakūn (imperfect). The standing of perfect and imperfect side by side in the same sentence is striking in Arabic.

The explanation in the classical commentaries: the imperfect brings the event before the eyes (ḥikāyat al-ḥāl). I transmit this and add an observation: the sentence narrates a past event and then passes in its last verb to the present — that is, what is narrated is left not as a finished event but as a rule in operation.

ٱلْمُمْتَرِين

The root م-ر-ي: to doubt; and to dispute. Form VIII: imtirāʾ — to fall into doubt. The root was treated at 19/34 in Maryam (yamtarūn) and at 53/55 in al-Najm.

And the word order of the sixtieth verse must be recorded: al-ḥaqqu min rabbika — "the truth is from your Lord". The sentence states a source; a prohibition follows.

I record this as an observation: the sentence that comes after the proof is given does not command that the proof be accepted; it commands not falling into doubt. And the one addressed is the side presenting the proof. That is, the sentence is spoken not to the person who keeps up the dispute but to the one conducting it.


3/61

فَمَنْ حَآجَّكَ فِيهِ مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَكَ مِنَ ٱلْعِلْمِ فَقُلْ تَعَالَوْا۟ نَدْعُ أَبْنَآءَنَا وَأَبْنَآءَكُمْ

Fa-man ḥājjaka fīhi min baʿdi mā jāʾaka mina'l-ʿilmi fa-qul taʿālaw nadʿu abnāʾanā wa abnāʾakum wa nisāʾanā wa nisāʾakum wa anfusanā wa anfusakum thumma nabtahil fa-najʿal laʿnata'llāhi ʿala'l-kādhibīn

"Whoever disputes with you about this after the knowledge that has come to you, say: 'Come, let us call our sons and your sons, our women and your women, ourselves and yourselves; then let us pray with all our hearts and call down the curse of God upon the liars.'"


Per the method (Method) I draw a boundary here, and I write it plainly: a wide literature of reports and a dispute between the schools have formed around this verse. Those reports and that dispute are not entered in this commentary; no personal names are given. I keep within the wording of the verse.

نَبْتَهِل — root: ب-ه-ل

The concrete sense of the root is worth recording, and the lexicographers dwell on it: ب-ه-ل — to let a thing loose, to leave it unrestrained. Bahala'n-nāqata — he did not keep the she-camel from her young but let her loose; he undid her halter.

From this comes ibtihāl: to entreat with abandon, keeping nothing back. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

I record this as an observation: the picture of the root is an untying — the lifting of a restraint. And this is what is asked in the verse: that both sides turn directly to God with no reservation held back.

The structure of the call

Those called are counted in three pairs, and the word order must be recorded:

PairWording
1Abnāʾanā wa abnāʾakum
2Nisāʾanā wa nisāʾakum
3Anfusanā wa anfusakum

All three pairs are symmetrical: each designation is applied to both sides in the same way. And the order is worth recording: sons, women, selves.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the order runs from what a person guards most towards himself. That is, the call does not mean "come, let us argue with each other"; it means "let each side put forward what it values most."

And the logic of the proposal lies here: if a man knows that he is lying, he will not call the price of that lie down upon his own child. That is, the proposal is not a method of debate but a measure of sincerity.

And the verse does not narrate the outcome of the proposal. I record this as an observation: the text does not say whether the encounter took place or not. This silence of the text is preserved in this commentary.

فِيهِ — the reference of the pronoun

There is an indeterminacy in the sentence: ḥājjaka fīh — "disputes with you about this". What does the pronoun refer to?

ReadingWhat the pronoun refers to
1To Jesus — the subject of the preceding block
2To al-ḥaqq — the "truth" of verse 60
3To the whole matter related

All three are transmitted. I do not impose a preference.

مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَكَ مِنَ ٱلْعِلْمِand the most repeated note of the sūra once more: the dispute comes after knowledge has arrived. The same note stood at verse 19; it will come once more at verse 105. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.


3/62-63

إِنَّ هَٰذَا لَهُوَ ٱلْقَصَصُ ٱلْحَقُّ وَمَا مِنْ إِلَٰهٍ إِلَّا ٱللَّهُ

Inna hādhā la-huwa'l-qaṣaṣu'l-ḥaqq, wa mā min ilāhin illa'llāh, wa inna'llāha la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm · Fa-in tawallaw fa-inna'llāha ʿalīmun bi'l-mufsidīn

"Truly this is the true account itself. There is no god but God, and God is al-ʿAzīz, al-Ḥakīm. · If they turn away — God knows those who work corruption."

ٱلْقَصَص — root: ق-ص-ص

The concrete sense of the root was treated in Yūsuf and in al-Qaṣaṣ: ق-ص-ص — to follow a track. Qaṣṣa'l-athara — he followed the trail. From this comes qiṣṣa: to relate an event by tracing its track.

And the construction must be recorded: al-qaṣaṣu'l-ḥaqq — "the true account". That is, at the end of the block the truth of what has been related is recorded separately.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the block turns back to its own source three times — 44 (min anbāʾi'l-ghayb), 58 (natlūhu ʿalayk), 62 (al-qaṣaṣu'l-ḥaqq). Three notes, within a block of thirty verses. This is a verifiable fact.

And the emphatic pattern that closes the block is worth recording: inna hādhā la-huwa'l-qaṣaṣu'l-ḥaqqinna + la + the pronoun of separation (huwa). Three instruments of emphasis together. The same pattern once more in the same verse: wa inna'llāha la-huwa'l-ʿazīzu'l-ḥakīm.

The sixty-third verse closes the block with the pattern of the limit of conveying: fa-in tawallaw… The same pattern occurred at verse 20 as well (wa in tawallaw fa-innamā ʿalayka'l-balāgh). Two occurrences, at the end of two blocks.


3/64

قُلْ يَٰٓأَهْلَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ تَعَالَوْا۟ إِلَىٰ كَلِمَةٍ سَوَآءٍۭ بَيْنَنَا وَبَيْنَكُمْ أَلَّا نَعْبُدَ إِلَّا ٱللَّهَ

Qul yā ahla'l-kitābi taʿālaw ilā kalimatin sawāʾin baynanā wa baynakum allā naʿbuda illa'llāha wa lā nushrika bihī shayʾan wa lā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbāban min dūni'llāh, fa-in tawallaw fa-qūlu'shhadū bi-annā muslimūn

"Say: 'People of the Book! Come to a word that is common between us and you: that we serve none but God, that we associate nothing with Him, and that none of us take others as lords apart from God.' If they turn away, say: 'Bear witness that we are those who have handed themselves over.'"


This verse opens the third block of the sūra and is one of its most-quoted verses. I shall treat it in detail, because both the form of the call and its content are worth recording.

تَعَالَوْا۟ — the word itself

The root ع-ل-و: height. The imperative form of the verb taʿālā: taʿālaw — "come".

And the picture of the word must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: in Arabic taʿāla is properly the calling up of one below by one who is in a high place. In time it took on a general sense of "come"; but the upward movement in its root has remained.

I record this as an observation about the language, and I build no claim of superiority on it — because the verse itself blocks that: the place called to is the middle between the two sides, not the caller's own side.

كَلِمَةٍ سَوَآءٍۭ بَيْنَنَا وَبَيْنَكُمْ — the construction taken apart

The three words must be taken separately.

كَلِمَة — the root ك-ل-م. It was treated at verse 45. And here it comes indefinite: kalimatin — "a word".

سَوَآء — the root س-و-ي: to be equal, to be even, to be level. Sawāʾequal, common, at the same distance from both sides.

The concrete sense of the root is worth recording: istawā — it became level, it came into balance. Sawiyy — even. At the centre of the root stands the absence of tilt: what does not lean to one side.

بَيْنَنَا وَبَيْنَكُمْ — "between us and you". And the repetition of the word bayna must be recorded: it says baynanā wa baynakum, not baynanā wa kum. In Arabic this repetition stresses that the two sides are counted separately.

That is, the construction says: an utterance standing at an equal distance from both sides, imposed by neither upon the other.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the absence of tilt in the root of the word: the call is not "come over to our side". The ground itself is named as neutral. And this is the reverse of what is usual at the opening of a dispute — what is usual is to declare one's own position the ground.

The content of the common word: three items

And the content of the call is given at once. It is three items, and the word order of all three must be recorded:

#ItemIts personWhom it binds
1Allā naʿbuda illa'llāhFirst person plural — "let us not serve"Both sides at once
2Wa lā nushrika bihī shayʾāFirst person pluralBoth sides at once
3Wa lā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbāban min dūni'llāhThird person, reciprocalBoth sides at once

And this is the most important fact of word order in the verse, and it is usually passed over: all three items are in the "we" person.

The verse does not say "do not you associate". It says "let us not serve, let us not associate, let us not take one another as lords".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the inflection of the verbs: the call is not a correction directed at the other side; it is set up as an obligation the two sides will take on together. And this is the one thing that makes the call acceptable — no one says yes to a sentence that begins "you are in the wrong".

The third item: وَلَا يَتَّخِذَ بَعْضُنَا بَعْضًا أَرْبَابًا

The third item stands apart from the first two and must be dwelt on separately.

The first two items are vertical: they order the relation between a human being and God. The third item is horizontal: it orders the relation between one human being and another.

رَبّ — the root ر-ب-ب: the one who nurtures, who owns, who takes charge of another's affair. The root was treated in detail in al-Fātiḥa.

And arbāb is a plural and comes with the caveat min dūni'llāh: "lords apart from God".

What this item describes is explained in the classical commentaries and is generally connected with absolute obedience to religious authorities. I transmit this and add the following as my own reading:

The wording of the item names no class. Baʿḍunā baʿḍan — "some of us, others of us". A reciprocal pronoun. That is, the item does not say who takes whom as a lord; it describes the operation.

And that the item comes third is worth recording. I give this as an observation about the word order: after the common ground is declared, how that ground will be broken is also stated. For even if the two sides agree on the first two items, if the third is violated the partnership turns into a hierarchy set up afresh.

A comparison with al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46

The same line was treated at 29/46 in al-ʿAnkabūt, and there the utterance to be spoken was itself given. The table there was this:

PartWhat it does
Āmannā bi'lladhī unzila ilaynā wa unzila ilaykumCommon ground — the two revelations are named together
Wa ilāhunā wa ilāhukum wāḥidA common addressee
Wa naḥnu lahū muslimūnDeclaring one's own position

I rely on that treatment. And I compare the two verses:

al-ʿAnkabūt 29/46Āl ʿImrān 3/64
ContextJidālthe method of disputingTaʿālawan invitation
To whom the command is givenTo the believers: lā tujādilū… wa qūlūTo the Prophet: qul
Where the common ground is setIn the revelationsunzila ilaynā wa unzila ilaykumIn a wordkalimatin sawāʾin
The common addresseeWa ilāhunā wa ilāhukum wāḥida statementAllā naʿbuda illa'llāhan obligation
The person of the verbsĀmannāfirst person pluralNaʿbuda, nushrikafirst person plural
The closeWa naḥnu lahū muslimūnFa-qūlu'shhadū bi-annā muslimūn
Is there a horizontal itemNoYeslā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbābā
If the other side refuses(Not in the verse)Fa-in tawallaw — a closing sentence is given

I draw three observations from the table, and all three can be verified from the two texts.

One. The two verses end with the same word: muslimūn. In al-ʿAnkabūt wa naḥnu lahū muslimūn, in Āl ʿImrān bi-annā muslimūn. And in both, this word is not a ruling directed at the other side but the speaker's declaration of his own position.

Two. Both verses state what is shared first and what divides afterwards. In al-ʿAnkabūt the two revelations are named together, then naḥnu lahū muslimūn comes. In Āl ʿImrān three shared items are counted, then fa-in tawallaw comes. That is, the sentence of division is spoken after the sentence of sharing, and only if there is a refusal.

Three. Āl ʿImrān says one item more, and that item is horizontal. In al-ʿAnkabūt there is no note about the relation between human beings. I record this as my own reading: the context of the two sūras explains this difference. Al-ʿAnkabūt is a Meccan sūra and its subject is the method of disputing; Āl ʿImrān is Medinan, and what it addresses is not only an opinion but an established order. When one speaks with an order, the question of hierarchy among human beings becomes unavoidable.

فَإِن تَوَلَّوْا۟ فَقُولُوا۟ ٱشْهَدُوا۟ بِأَنَّا مُسْلِمُونَ

What is to be said in the case of refusal is also given. And its word order must be recorded.

What is commanded to be said is not a threat, not an accusation, not even an answer. Ishhadū — "bear witness". What is asked of the other side is not acceptance but testimony.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the verb: ishhadū does not put the other side into a position; it gives them a role — the one who records what he has seen. That is, even the side that refuses is not thrown outside the conversation.

And the same verb occurred earlier in the sūra, in the mouth of the disciples: wa'shhad bi-annā muslimūn (52). There the addressee was God; here the addressees are people.

VerseTo whom ishhad is saidWho says it
52To GodThe disciples
64To the other sideThe believers

The same verb, the same pattern, two different addressees. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

What this says to the present

This verse gives a method for speaking with one who differs, and that method lies in four steps. I draw the steps from the wording of the verse:

StepIts counterpart in the verseWhat it does
1Taʿālaw ilā kalimatin sawāʾinThe ground is declared common
2Allā naʿbuda… wa lā nushrikaThe obligation falls on both sides at once
3Wa lā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbābāThe hierarchy between them is removed
4Fa-in tawallaw fa-qūlū ishhadūEven in the case of refusal the door is not closed

And the fourth step is the one most easily passed over. The verse takes the possibility of refusal into account from the start and gives what is to be said in that case as well. What is given is not a sentence of rupture but a sentence of record.

Per the method (Method) I record this: no blanket ruling about any community can be drawn from this verse — neither favourable nor unfavourable. The verse sets up a call; who answers the call and how is not the subject of the verse. And verse 113 of the sūra will record plainly that the answer is not of one kind.


3/65-68

يَٰٓأَهْلَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لِمَ تُحَآجُّونَ فِىٓ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ وَمَآ أُنزِلَتِ ٱلتَّوْرَىٰةُ وَٱلْإِنجِيلُ إِلَّا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِۦٓ

Yā ahla'l-kitābi lima tuḥājjūna fī Ibrāhīma wa mā unzilati't-Tawrātu wa'l-Injīlu illā min baʿdih, a-fa-lā taʿqilūn · Hā-antum hāʾulāʾi ḥājajtum fīmā lakum bihī ʿilm, fa-lima tuḥājjūna fīmā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm, wa'llāhu yaʿlamu wa antum lā taʿlamūn · Mā kāna Ibrāhīmu yahūdiyyan wa lā naṣrāniyyan wa lākin kāna ḥanīfan musliman, wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīn · Inna awla'n-nāsi bi-Ibrāhīma la'lladhīna'ttabaʿūhu wa hādha'n-nabiyyu wa'lladhīna āmanū, wa'llāhu waliyyu'l-muʾminīn

"People of the Book! Why do you dispute about Abraham? Both the Torah and the Gospel were sent down only after him. Will you not use your reason? · There you are: you disputed about what you had knowledge of; why then do you dispute about what you have no knowledge of? God knows, and you do not know. · Abraham was neither a Jew nor a Christian; he was a ḥanīf, one who had handed himself over, and he was not of the mushrikūn. · The nearest of people to Abraham are those who followed him, and this prophet, and those who believe. God is the protector of the believers."


These four verses build the first proof of the third block. And the kind of proof must be recorded: this is not a proof from history but a proof from the logic of time. I shall treat it in detail, because the form of reasoning built here does not come again so plainly in the sūra.

The logic of time in the proof — أُنزِلَتِإِلَّا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِۦ

The structure of the sentence is this, and it consists of three elements:

ElementWordingWhat it conveys
1Lima tuḥājjūna fī IbrāhīmThere is a dispute, and its subject is a person
2Wa mā unzilati't-Tawrātu wa'l-Injīlu illā min baʿdihThe two books came down after him
3A-fa-lā taʿqilūnLet the reader draw the conclusion

And the second element carries the whole sentence. Its word order must be recorded separately: mā … illā — negation and exception. In Arabic this pattern sets up restriction (ḥaṣr): "not otherwise, but only thus." That is, the sentence does not say "they came down afterwards"; it says "they came down only after him". No other possibility is left.

I write out the logic of the proof plainly, because it looks short and is deep:

A person cannot be assigned to an identity that arose after him. The two adjectives set before Abraham's name (yahūdī, naṣrānī) cannot be attached to a person who lived before the two books that gave rise to those two adjectives. For a name cannot exist before the thing that brings it into being.

This is an objection that removes not the subject of the dispute but the possibility of the dispute. Before saying "Abraham was such and such", the verse says "what you are putting forward cannot be set up in point of time".

I record this as an observation about logic, and its ground is the verse's own wording: the sentence names the error of anachronism (placing a thing in a time that is not its own). And it does so not by a term but by a date: the time when the two books came down.

And I draw a boundary: the verse is not disputing the worth of the two books. In the third verse both were named as hudan li'n-nās (3/3-4). What is at issue here is not the truth of the books but the fact that a person lived before them. The two questions must not be confused.

أَفَلَا تَعْقِلُونَ — the conclusion left unsaid

And the verse does not state the conclusion. The sentence "therefore Abraham was of neither of the two" is not in verse 65; it is held back until verse 67.

I record this as an observation about the word order: verse 66 comes in between, and there the method of disputing is discussed. That is, the order is this — first the proof, then the method, then the conclusion. The conclusion is put last.

The root ع-ق-ل: to bind. ʿIqāl — the cord that binds a camel's knee. The root was treated in many places in the series; I do not repeat it here. What belongs here is this: the picture of the root is binding, and what is asked to be bound here are a date and a claim.

3/66 — what there is knowledge of and what there is not

Hā-antum hāʾulāʾi ḥājajtum fīmā lakum bihī ʿilm, fa-lima tuḥājjūna fīmā laysa lakum bihī ʿilm

The verse divides disputing in two, and the division must be recorded:

KindWordingRuling
Disputing that rests on knowledgeFīmā lakum bihī ʿilmNot forbidden — it is recorded that it happened
Disputing that does not rest on knowledgeFīmā laysa lakum bihī ʿilmLima — "why?"

And this is one of the most notable notes of the sūra in point of method. I give it as my own reading, and its ground is the opposition of the two sentences: the verse does not forbid disputing in itself. What it forbids is groundless disputing. And the measure is not which side one is on but whether one has knowledge in hand.

هَٰٓأَنتُمْ هَٰٓؤُلَآءِ — the coming of two particles of attention () and two demonstratives one after another conveys in Arabic a direct confrontation: "there you are, you of all people." The same pattern will come once more in the sūra: at verse 119, hā-antum ulāʾi tuḥibbūnahum. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and in both the addressee is confronted with a false position.

3/67 — مَا كَانَ إِبْرَٰهِيمُ يَهُودِيًّا وَلَا نَصْرَانِيًّا

The word order of the sentence must be recorded, and it has three steps:

StepWordingIts work
1Mā kāna… yahūdiyyan wa lā naṣrāniyyāIt removes both names
2Wa lākin kāna ḥanīfan muslimanIt puts two attributes in their place
3Wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīnIt closes a third possibility too

And the real point is the difference between the first and second steps: what is removed are names, what is set down are attributes.

Yahūdī and naṣrānī are relative nouns conveying membership — they state belonging to a community. Ḥanīf and muslim, on the other hand, are each a quality: one conveys a turning, the other a handing over. Neither of them points to a group, nor does the plural of either give a list of members.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two kinds of word: the verse does not answer a claim of membership with another claim of membership. The kind of answer is changed — what was asked was "of which side?", and what is given is "of what quality?".

And per the method (Method) I record this plainly: no ruling about any community follows from this verse. The verse removes two names from Abraham; it says nothing about those who bear those names. Verse 113 of the sūra will enter the note on this separately.

حَنِيف — root: ح-ن-ف

The root was analysed in detail at 30/30 in al-Rūm (ḥanīfan fiṭrata'llāh) and at 2/135 in al-Baqara. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. The summary recorded there:

ح-ن-فto incline in one direction, to turn away from crookedness. The lexicographers tie the word to a concrete usage: aḥnaf is a person whose feet turn inward. The idea that comes out of this: a ḥanīf is one who parts from what is common and inclines in another direction.

And what belongs here is this, which I give as an observation about the word order: ḥanīf conveys a parting; and the verse uses it in the very sentence in which two memberships are refused. That is, the picture of the word itself coincides with the work of the sentence: a turning that goes outside the two names.

مُسْلِمًا — root س-ل-م. It was analysed at verse nineteen; I do not repeat it here. The only note belonging here is this: the word comes here indefinite and as an attributemusliman, as an adjective. That is, the sentence points not to an institution but to a state.

3/68 — أَوْلَى ٱلنَّاسِ بِإِبْرَٰهِيمَ

Inna awla'n-nāsi bi-Ibrāhīma la'lladhīna'ttabaʿūhu wa hādha'n-nabiyyu wa'lladhīna āmanū

The root و-ل-ي: nearness, adjacency. Walī — the one who is near. Awlā — the elative: the one who is nearer.

And the verse sets the measure of nearness plainly: alladhīna'ttabaʿūh — "those who followed him". Not descent, not a name, not membership — ittibāʿ.

I record this as an observation: the measure of nearness is drawn out of the dispute itself. The sides were disputing who belonged to Abraham; the verse turns the measure to who followed him. And this measure is not something that can be claimed but something that can be observed.

And the end of the verse must be recorded: wa'llāhu waliyyu'l-muʾminīn — a word from the same root (و-ل-ي), this time of God. That is, the verse closes a dispute about nearness by naming the source of nearness. The use of the same root twice in one verse, in two different directions, is a fact of word order.


3/69-74

وَدَّت طَّآئِفَةٌ مِّنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لَوْ يُضِلُّونَكُمْ … يَٰٓأَهْلَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لِمَ تَلْبِسُونَ ٱلْحَقَّ بِٱلْبَٰطِلِ

Waddat ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitābi law yuḍillūnakum wa mā yuḍillūna illā anfusahum wa mā yashʿurūn · Yā ahla'l-kitābi lima takfurūna bi-āyāti'llāhi wa antum tashhadūn · Yā ahla'l-kitābi lima talbisūna'l-ḥaqqa bi'l-bāṭili wa taktumūna'l-ḥaqqa wa antum taʿlamūn

"A party of the People of the Book wished to lead you astray; yet they lead none astray but themselves, and they do not perceive it. · People of the Book! Why do you deny the signs of God — and you yourselves bearing witness? · People of the Book! Why do you dress truth up in falsehood and conceal the truth knowingly?"

طَآئِفَةٌ مِّنْ — the caveat is placed at the very start

And this is a fact of word order to be underlined in this commentary: the sentence does not say ahlu'l-kitāb; it says ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitāb — "a party of the People of the Book".

Min is here the particle of tabʿīḍ in Arabic (indicating a part of a whole). That is, the subject is not the whole of the set but a part of it.

The same caveat is there in the next verse too: wa qālat ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitāb (72). And at verse 75 it will come once more, this time in both directions.

VerseSubjectExtent
69Ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitābA party
72Ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitābA party
75Wa min ahli'l-kitāb… wa minhumTwo parties, set against each other
113Min ahli'l-kitābi ummatun qāʾimaA party — favourable
199Wa inna min ahli'l-kitābi la-man yuʾminA party — favourable

The same particle in all five verses: min. This is a fact verifiable within the sūra, and it settles how every statement of the sūra about the People of the Book is to be read.

لِمَ تَلْبِسُونَ ٱلْحَقَّ بِٱلْبَٰطِلِ — root: ل-ب-س

The root ل-ب-س: to clothe, to cover over; and from this, to confuse, to make indistinct by covering. Libās — a garment. Labs — confusion, iltibās.

And the picture of the root must be recorded: one thing is put on over another; what is put on does not destroy what is beneath — it makes it invisible.

I give this as an observation about the word: the verse does not say "you destroy the truth". It says you clothe it. That is, the truth stands where it is, but because something has been drawn over it, it is not recognised.

And the verse sets two separate verbs side by side, and the two differ:

VerbThe operationWhat becomes of the truth
TalbisūnMixingIt stands, but is not recognised
TaktumūnConcealingIt is not there at all

Two separate operations, in one sentence. In the first something is added, in the second something is taken away.

And it must be recorded that both sentences end with the same note: wa antum tashhadūn (70) — wa antum taʿlamūn (71). Both are notes of "knowingly". That is, the subject of the verses is not ignorance; it is what is done despite the presence of knowledge. This is the very note set up in the nineteenth verse: min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilm.

3/72-73 — believing in the morning and turning back in the evening

Āminū bi'lladhī unzila ʿala'lladhīna āmanū wajha'n-nahāri wa'kfurū ākhirah, laʿallahum yarjiʿūn

"'At the beginning of the day believe in what has been sent down to those who believe, and at the end of it disbelieve; perhaps they will turn back.'"

وَجْهَ ٱلنَّهَارِ — "the face of the day", that is, its beginning. In Arabic the wajh of a thing is the side of it that appears first.

And the verse describes a method: belief is used as an instrument. To join in the morning and to part in the evening — and the calculated result of this is that the others should fall into indecision (laʿallahum yarjiʿūn).

I record this as an observation and I draw a boundary: the verse describes a tactic and limits the speaker to one party (ṭāʾifatun min). No blanket attribute of any community is drawn from this in this commentary; what is drawn is the naming of a form of conduct.

وَلَا تُؤْمِنُوٓا۟ إِلَّا لِمَن تَبِعَ دِينَكُمْ (73) — "believe none but him who follows your religion". And the work of the sentence must be recorded: the measure of truth is tied not to what is said but to the affiliation of the one who says it.

And the answer comes at once: qul inna'l-hudā huda'llāh — "Say: guidance is the guidance of God." That is, the measure is not the side but the source.

Qul inna'l-faḍla bi-yadi'llāh (73) and yakhtaṣṣu bi-raḥmatihī man yashāʾ (74) — the section closes by saying to whom the choosing belongs. And this does the same work as the verse mālika'l-mulk at verse 26: there dominion, here faḍl. Both verses close a dispute by saying in whose hand a thing is. This is a weave verifiable within the sūra.


3/75-76

وَمِنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ مَنْ إِن تَأْمَنْهُ بِقِنطَارٍ يُؤَدِّهِۦٓ إِلَيْكَ وَمِنْهُم مَّنْ إِن تَأْمَنْهُ بِدِينَارٍ لَّا يُؤَدِّهِۦٓ إِلَيْكَ

Wa min ahli'l-kitābi man in taʾmanhu bi-qinṭārin yuʾaddihī ilayk, wa minhum man in taʾmanhu bi-dīnārin lā yuʾaddihī ilayka illā mā dumta ʿalayhi qāʾimā, dhālika bi-annahum qālū laysa ʿalaynā fi'l-ummiyyīna sabīl, wa yaqūlūna ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhiba wa hum yaʿlamūn · Balā man awfā bi-ʿahdihī wa'ttaqā fa-inna'llāha yuḥibbu'l-muttaqīn

"Among the People of the Book there is one who, if you entrust him with a qinṭār, will give it back to you; and among them there is one who, if you entrust him with a single dinar, will not give it back to you unless you stand over him. That is because they say, 'We have no obligation regarding the ummiyyūn'; and they speak a lie against God knowingly. · No indeed! Whoever fulfils his covenant and guards himself — God loves those who guard themselves."


This verse will be treated in detail in this commentary, because its division settles how the sūra's discussion of the People of the Book is to be read.

The division: وَمِنْوَمِنْهُم

The backbone of the verse is two particles, and both are min:

PartWordingWho
FirstWa min ahli'l-kitābi man…Some of them — the one who returns a trust
SecondWa minhum man…Some of them — the one who does not

And this is the most important fact of the verse and must certainly be brought forward: the sentence is a division, not a ruling.

The verse does not say "the People of the Book betray a trust." Neither does it say "the People of the Book are faithful to a trust." It counts the two groups in the same sentence, in the same pattern, with the same particle. And it counts the favourable one first.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is the sequence: the sentence begins with the trustworthy one. That is, the text's own order blocks the building of a blanket unfavourable ruling at the very first word.

And per the method (Method) I write plainly: no blanket ruling about any religious community can be built on this verse — because the verse itself does not build one. The verse describes two kinds of conduct and assigns a part to each. Whoever does that conduct, the verse speaks of him.

Supports within the series: 29/47 and 13/36

The same division was treated in two separate places in the series, and I rely on them:

PlaceWordingWhat the division is about
al-ʿAnkabūt 29/47Fa'lladhīna ātaynāhumu'l-kitāba yuʾminūna bih, wa min hāʾulāʾi man yuʾminu bihBelieving
al-Raʿd 13/36Wa'lladhīna ātaynāhumu'l-kitāba yafraḥūna bimā unzila ilayk, wa mina'l-aḥzābi man yunkiru baʿḍahRejoicing and denying
Āl ʿImrān 3/75Wa min ahli'l-kitābi man… wa minhum man…Returning a trust

Three sūras, three separate subjects, the same structure. This is a weave verifiable within the series, and I rely on al-ʿAnkabūt 29/47 and al-Raʿd 13/36.

I add the following as my own reading, and it is not binding: when the Qurʾān speaks of the People of the Book it does not build a single sentence of ruling; it builds divided sentences. And the axis of the division is each time a conduct or an attitude, and never a name.

قِنطَار / دِينَار — the opposition of two amounts

At the fourteenth verse al-qanāṭīru'l-muqanṭara was treated, and it was recorded there that qinṭār is a large amount and that the lexicographers do not agree on any definite figure. I rely on that treatment.

And the word order here must be recorded, and it is very fine:

What is entrustedOutcome
The first partQinṭārvery largeHe gives it back
The second partDīnāra single coinHe does not give it back

The opposition shows the conduct of the two sides at their furthest points: one gives back the largest, the other does not give back the smallest. And the two extremes prove that the distinction has nothing to do with the amount. What is being measured is not the size of the property but the attitude of the person.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the choice of the two amounts: had the verse given the same amount to both, the difference would have been a difference of degree. By choosing the two extremes it turns the difference into a difference of kind.

إِلَّا مَا دُمْتَ عَلَيْهِ قَآئِمًا

"Unless you stand over him." And this note describes the second attitude exactly: the return is the result not of an obligation but of supervision.

قَآئِمًا — root ق-و-م: to stand. And the same word will come in a wholly different place in the sūra, at verse 113: ummatun qāʾima — "a community that stands upright". The same word in two different senses: one conveys the one who stands watch, the other the one who stands upright. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and the root picture of the word (to stand) is at work in both.

لَيْسَ عَلَيْنَا فِى ٱلْأُمِّيِّۦنَ سَبِيلٌ — the naming of the pretext

And the verse gives the pretext of the second attitude as well. And this is the real subject of the verse.

Laysa ʿalaynā fi'l-ummiyyīna sabīl — "there is no way (no obligation) upon us regarding the ummiyyūn."

That is, the obligation has been lifted according to who the other party is. The moral rule has been narrowed according to the one addressed.

And the answer the verse gives to this sentence must be recorded, and it has two steps:

One. Wa yaqūlūna ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhiba wa hum yaʿlamūnthe ascribing of this narrowing to God is named separately. That is, what is criticised is not only the conduct; it is the attributing of the conduct to religion.

Two. Balā man awfā bi-ʿahdihī wa'ttaqā (76) — and the counter-sentence comes.

The particle بَلَىٰ in Arabic sets up an affirmative by rejecting a negative sentence. Laysa ʿalaynā… sabīl had been said; balā refutes it directly: "no, it is not so."

And the word order of the sentence put in its place must be recorded: man awfā bi-ʿahdihī wa'ttaqāa conditional sentence, and its subject is man: "whoever." No group name at all.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and it is the sūra's method: a party had narrowed an obligation according to group membership. The answer is given in a sentence that ties the obligation to no group at all. The measure is man — whoever it may be.

What this says to the present

The operation the verse describes is a recognisable operation today too, and it has a name: the narrowing of a moral rule according to the one it is applied to.

A rule is set up "for everyone"; but in practice a circle is drawn, and those outside the circle are taken out of the rule's reach. And this narrowing is generally done with a pretext — because the narrowing itself cannot be defended, but its pretext can.

The verse's answer lies in two places, and both are in the text: the ascribing of the pretext to religion is counted as a separate offence (wa yaqūlūna ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhib), and the counter-measure is set up with a man that recognises no circle (76).

Per the method (Method) I record this: no conclusion about any religious or ethnic group is drawn from this section. What is described is an attitude, and the verse itself, in its first word (wa min), blocked the assigning of that attitude to the whole of a group.


3/77-78

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَشْتَرُونَ بِعَهْدِ ٱللَّهِ وَأَيْمَٰنِهِمْ ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًا · وَإِنَّ مِنْهُمْ لَفَرِيقًا يَلْوُۥنَ أَلْسِنَتَهُم بِٱلْكِتَٰبِ

Inna'lladhīna yashtarūna bi-ʿahdi'llāhi wa aymānihim thamanan qalīlan ulāʾika lā khalāqa lahum fi'l-ākhirati wa lā yukallimuhumu'llāhu wa lā yanẓuru ilayhim yawma'l-qiyāmati wa lā yuzakkīhim wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm · Wa inna minhum la-farīqan yalwūna alsinatahum bi'l-kitābi li-taḥsabūhu mina'l-kitābi wa mā huwa mina'l-kitāb, wa yaqūlūna huwa min ʿindi'llāhi wa mā huwa min ʿindi'llāh, wa yaqūlūna ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhiba wa hum yaʿlamūn

"Those who sell the covenant of God and their oaths for a small price — they have no share in the hereafter; God will not speak to them or look at them on the day of resurrection, nor will He purify them; and theirs is a painful punishment. · A group of them twist their tongues with the Book so that you may think it is from the Book; yet it is not from the Book. 'It is from God', they say; yet it is not from God. And they speak a lie against God knowingly."

يَلْوُۥنَ أَلْسِنَتَهُم — root: ل-و-ي

The root ل-و-ي: to twist, to wring, to turn. To twist a rope, to turn a thing on its own axis.

The root was analysed in al-Munāfiqūn and tabulated there together with the root ح-ر-ف. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. The summary recorded there was this:

ل-و-ي and ح-ر-ف are two names for the same operation. One describes twisting, the other pulling from the edge. Neither breaks; both bend.

And what belongs here is this, and it deserves to be spelled out:

What is twisted is not the Book but the tongue. The verse does not say yalwūna'l-kitāb; it says yalwūna alsinatahum bi'l-kitāb — "they twist their tongues with the Book".

I record this as an observation about the word order, and it is the finest point in the verse: the text is not touched. What is altered is the reciting. The same letters are made to resemble something else by a different movement of the tongue.

And the verse itself says this plainly: li-taḥsabūhu mina'l-kitāb — "so that you may think it is from the Book". The verb is ḥasiba: to think, to suppose. What is aimed at is not a change in the text but a change in the impression in the hearer.

And the root ح-س-ب will come four more times in the sūra after this: lā taḥsabanna / lā yaḥsabanna (169, 178, 180, 188). This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and was recorded in the table in the introduction.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the object of the verb: the sūra uses the verb "to suppose" both here and at the end. Here it is one person making another suppose wrongly; at the end it is a person supposing wrongly of himself. The same verb in two directions.

The rhythm of the sentence: four negations

The seventy-seventh verse sets four negative sentences one after another, and the word order must be recorded:

#SentenceWhat is removed
1khalāqa lahum fi'l-ākhiraA share
2Wa lā yukallimuhumu'llāhSpeech
3Wa lā yanẓuru ilayhimA look
4Wa lā yuzakkīhimPurification

Four negations, and two of them (speech and a look) are words of relation. I record this as an observation: the sentence of punishment leaves the punishment to the last; it first says that the relation is cut off.

ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًا — "a small price". And the construction will come once more in the sūra, at verse 187 (wa'shtaraw bihī thamanan qalīlā) and at verse 199 in the negative (lā yashtarūna bi-āyāti'llāhi thamanan qalīlā). Three occurrences, and the third is the opposite of the first two. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading: the adjective itself carries a ruling. Thamanan qalīlā — the price is named "small". That is, while describing the operation as a transaction, the verse says in the same sentence that the transaction is at a loss.


3/79-80

مَا كَانَ لِبَشَرٍ أَن يُؤْتِيَهُ ٱللَّهُ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ وَٱلْحُكْمَ وَٱلنُّبُوَّةَ ثُمَّ يَقُولَ لِلنَّاسِ كُونُوا۟ عِبَادًا لِّى مِن دُونِ ٱللَّهِ

Mā kāna li-basharin an yuʾtiyahu'llāhu'l-kitāba wa'l-ḥukma wa'n-nubuwwata thumma yaqūla li'n-nāsi kūnū ʿibādan lī min dūni'llāhi wa lākin kūnū rabbāniyyīna bimā kuntum tuʿallimūna'l-kitāba wa bimā kuntum tadrusūn · Wa lā yaʾmurakum an tattakhidhu'l-malāʾikata wa'n-nabiyyīna arbābā, a-yaʾmurukum bi'l-kufri baʿda idh antum muslimūn

"It is not for a human being to whom God has given the Book, judgement and prophethood then to say to people, 'Be servants to me apart from God.' Rather: 'Be rabbānīs, by the Book you teach and by what you study.' · Nor does He command you to take the angels and the prophets as lords. Would He command you to disbelief after you have handed yourselves over?"


These two verses are the unfolding of the third item of verse 64 (wa lā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbāban min dūni'llāh). And this is a link verifiable within the sūra: the same word (arbāb) and the same caveat (min dūni'llāh) occur twice, fifteen verses apart.

مَا كَانَ لِبَشَرٍ — a pattern of impossibility

The pattern mā kāna li-fulānin an yafʿala conveys in Arabic an unfittingness and an impossibility: "this is not a thing that can be for him."

And the choice of subject must be recorded: li-bashar — "for a human being". It does not say prophet; it says human being.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence sets the prohibition on the widest set. Even after the three highest things that can be given to a person have been counted, that person is named "human being".

And the threefold count must be recorded: al-kitāb, al-ḥukm, al-nubuwwa. The same three occurred at verse 48 of the sūra for Jesus, and at 45/16 in al-Jāthiya for the Children of Israel. I rely on al-Jāthiya 45/16-20.

كُونُوا۟ رَبَّٰنِيِّۦنَ — the alternative set in its place

And the verse does not content itself with a prohibition; it sets a sentence in its place. The word order is this:

What is refusedWhat is set down
The commandKūnū ʿibādan lī min dūni'llāhKūnū rabbāniyyīn
Attachment to whomTo the speakerTo the Lord
Its ground(none)Bimā kuntum tuʿallimūna'l-kitāb

رَبَّانِيّ — root ر-ب-ب. The lexicographers differ over the derivation of the word, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhere rabbānī comes from
1A relative form of rabbone attached to the Lord, belonging to the Lord
2From the verb rabba/yarubbuone who nurtures, who brings up
3A scholar occupied with knowledge and teaching

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. But the verse's own note gives an indication, and I record this as an indication, not as a preference: the continuation of the sentence is bimā kuntum tuʿallimūna'l-kitāba wa bimā kuntum tadrusūnteaching and studying. That is, the word is named within the verse together with learning and teaching.

And that the word rabbānī is from the same root as rabb is a fact of word order and must be recorded: in saying "do not take arbāb", the verse gives the alternative with a word from the same root. What is refused is the applying of the root to human beings in the plural (arbāb); what is set down is a relative form of the same root (rabbānī).

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the verse does not forbid attachment, it corrects where the attachment goes. The same root stands both in the prohibition and in the alternative; what changes is to whom the root is applied.

3/80 — the angels and the prophets counted too

And the eightieth verse widens the list: al-malāʾikata wa'n-nabiyyīn.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the prohibition names the two likeliest candidates. A person is not seated in the position of an intermediary on a claim of nearness to a stone or a tree, but to an angel and a prophet. The verse builds the list with the two most revered names — because the question is not whether the intermediary is of worth but whether he stands in between.

And the verse's last note: baʿda idh antum muslimūn — "after you have handed yourselves over". The word is again muslim: the last word of verse 64, the attribute of Abraham in verse 67, and now the state of the one addressed. Three occurrences within sixteen verses. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.


3/81-82

وَإِذْ أَخَذَ ٱللَّهُ مِيثَٰقَ ٱلنَّبِيِّۦنَ

Wa idh akhadha'llāhu mīthāqa'n-nabiyyīna lamā ātaytukum min kitābin wa ḥikmatin thumma jāʾakum rasūlun muṣaddiqun limā maʿakum la-tuʾminunna bihī wa la-tanṣurunnah, qāla a-aqrartum wa akhadhtum ʿalā dhālikum iṣrī, qālū aqrarnā, qāla fa'shhadū wa ana maʿakum mina'sh-shāhidīn · Fa-man tawallā baʿda dhālika fa-ulāʾika humu'l-fāsiqūn

"God took this covenant from the prophets: 'I have given you a Book and wisdom; then, when a messenger comes to you confirming what is with you, you shall surely believe in him and you shall surely help him.' 'Do you affirm this, and do you take up My heavy charge on these terms?' He said. 'We affirm it', they said. 'Then bear witness; and I am with you among the witnesses', He said. · Whoever turns away after this — those are the ones who have gone out of the way."

The subject of the covenant: a chain of confirmation

The content of the pledge must be recorded, and it is tied to two verbs:

VerbWhat is asked
La-tuʾminunna bihBelieving
Wa la-tanṣurunnahHelping

Both verbs come with the nūn of emphasis — in Arabic the most forceful binding form an utterance can take. That is, the pledge is not a loose intention but an undertaking taken in the heaviest pattern.

And the condition itself must be recorded: rasūlun muṣaddiqun limā maʿakum. The attribute of the messenger who comes: one who confirms what is with you. The same attribute was used of the Book in the third verse of the sūra: muṣaddiqan limā bayna yadayh. Two occurrences, one for the Book, one for the messenger. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

إِصْر — root: أ-ص-ر

The root أ-ص-ر: to bind, to hold fast; and a heavy load. Iṣr — both a bond and a burden hard to carry.

And both senses of the word are at work here at once: the pledge taken is both a bond and a burden. The word occurred at 2/286 in al-Baqara (wa lā taḥmil ʿalaynā iṣrā), and there it is the subject of a prayer. Here it is an obligation taken up.

PlaceIṣrWho does what
al-Baqara 2/286Wa lā taḥmil ʿalaynā iṣrāIt is asked that it not be laid on
Āl ʿImrān 3/81Wa akhadhtum ʿalā dhālikum iṣrīIts being taken up is affirmed

Two occurrences, two directions. This is a fact verifiable from the text.

فَٱشْهَدُوا۟ وَأَنَا۠ مَعَكُم مِّنَ ٱلشَّٰهِدِينَ

And the compact closes with a call to bear witness. And both sides of the witnessing are counted.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the verb ishhadū had occurred twice earlier in the sūra (52: the disciples; 64: to the other side). Now for a third time, and this time to the prophets. Three occurrences, three separate addressees:

VerseWho is called to bear witnessWho calls
52GodThe disciples
64The other sideThe believers
81The prophetsGod

Three occurrences, in a single sūra. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

There is a disagreement in the grammar of the verse, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingHow lamā ātaytukum is read
1Lamā — "whatever I have given you" (the relative , with the lām of emphasis before it)
2Limā — "because of My giving" (the lām of causation)

Both are transmitted, and different recitations are found in the variant readings; I impose no preference and give no reciter's name, because I cannot give one with certainty.


3/83-85

أَفَغَيْرَ دِينِ ٱللَّهِ يَبْغُونَ … وَمَن يَبْتَغِ غَيْرَ ٱلْإِسْلَٰمِ دِينًا فَلَن يُقْبَلَ مِنْهُ

A-fa-ghayra dīni'llāhi yabghūna wa lahū aslama man fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi ṭawʿan wa karhan wa ilayhi yurjaʿūn · Qul āmannā bi'llāhi wa mā unzila ʿalaynā wa mā unzila ʿalā Ibrāhīma wa Ismāʿīla wa Isḥāqa wa Yaʿqūba wa'l-asbāṭi wa mā ūtiya Mūsā wa ʿĪsā wa'n-nabiyyūna min rabbihim, lā nufarriqu bayna aḥadin minhum wa naḥnu lahū muslimūn · Wa man yabtaghi ghayra'l-islāmi dīnan fa-lan yuqbala minh, wa huwa fi'l-ākhirati mina'l-khāsirīn

"Is it other than the religion of God that they seek? Yet whoever is in the heavens and the earth has handed himself over to Him, willingly or unwillingly, and to Him they will be returned. · Say: 'We believe in God, and in what was sent down to us, and in what was sent down to Abraham, Ishmael (Ismāʿīl), Isaac (Isḥāq), Jacob and the descendants, and in what was given to Moses, to Jesus and to the prophets from their Lord. We make no distinction between any of them, and we have handed ourselves over to Him.' · Whoever seeks a religion other than islām, it will never be accepted of him, and in the hereafter he will be among the losers."


The eighty-fifth verse, together with verse 19, is one of the two most-quoted and most misused verses of the sūra. I follow here the same procedure I followed at verse 19: first the root, then where it was treated in the series, then what the verse does not say.

إِسْلَٰم — root: س-ل-م

The concrete sense of the root was analysed at 49/14 in al-Ḥujurāt and was quoted at verse 19 of this sūra. I do not repeat it; I summarise:

س-ل-مto be sound, to be flawless, to be complete. Salāma, salām, silm, taslīm are from the same root. At the centre of the root there is an operation: to hand a thing over to the other side in sound condition. Islām is in Form IV: to hand oneself over.

And I rely on the distinction of īmān and islām at 49/14 and do not repeat it. The summary of the table there: īmān conveys what is in the heart, islām what is outward; and there the refusal was read not as an exclusion but as a correction of place.

The context of the verse: 85 cannot be read without 83 and 84

And this is the most important note of this section. The eighty-fifth verse is the last of a sequence of three verses, and the two before it show how the word islām is used in this context:

VerseWordingIn what sense islām / aslama is used
83Wa lahū aslama man fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍOf all that exists — the state of having handed oneself over
84Wa naḥnu lahū muslimūnThe speaker's own position — a declaration
85Wa man yabtaghi ghayra'l-islāmi dīnanA measure

The same root in three verses, on three different scales. This is a fact verifiable from the text.

And the eighty-fourth verse, immediately before the eighty-fifth, gives the list of those believed in — and the list contains eight separate names and a summing "the prophets". That is, immediately before the word "islām", the extent of that word is shown by a list of names.

Lā nufarriqu bayna aḥadin minhum — "we make no distinction between any of them". And this sentence stands at 3/84, one verse before 85.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the two verses: the sentence that commands making no distinction and the sentence that says "no other will be accepted" stand side by side. And this order shows that the second sentence cannot be read so as to cancel the first.

What the verse says and what it does not say

Per the method (Method) I record this plainly — these are limits that come out of the wording of the verse, not a softening brought in from outside:

One. The verse sets a measure; it does not give a list of persons. No community, people or group is named in the sentence. The subject is man — "whoever". And the predicate is yabtaghi — "seeks": a verb.

Two. The choice of the verb must be recorded. Ibtighāʾ (ب-غ-ي, Form VIII) — to seek, to want, to go after. That is, the verse takes as its subject not a state but a seeking. The difference between not knowing a thing and knowing it while seeking another lies in the verb itself.

Three. The root sense of the word blocks any reduction of the verse to a historical-institutional name. The preceding verse (83) uses aslama of everything in the heavens and the earth. In the verse's own context the word points not to an institution but to a state.

Four. This commentary does not enter the debate about excommunication. Who is inside and who is outside this measure is a ruling the verse itself does not make, and it will not be made here. The verse gives a measure; applying the measure to persons is not the work of this commentary. This limit was set at verse 19 and is kept here exactly.

Five. The sūra itself enters a note on this matter, and that note is at verses 113 and 199. Both plainly count the faith and the deeds of a part of the People of the Book, and verse 199 says ulāʾika lahum ajruhum ʿinda rabbihim. In this commentary verse 85 is read together with this note the sūra itself sets down.

طَوْعًا وَكَرْهًا — the pair in verse 83

ط-و-ع — willingly. ك-ر-ه — unwillingly, under compulsion.

And the construction comes as a ḥāl: the handing over takes place in both ways.

The lexicographers differ over the extent of this pair, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat is meant
1All that exists being subject to laws — an involuntary submission that covers everyone
2Believers willingly, the rest by necessity
3Everyone's turning to Him at a moment of distress

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And I record an observation about the word order: before offering a human being any choice, the verse describes the field in which there is no choice. Man fi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ — the extent is the widest possible. That is, the handing over itself is not a choice; what is a choice is whether it is done knowingly.

And the same idea was treated at 22/18 in al-Ḥajj with the word for prostration (a-lam tara anna'llāha yasjudu lahū man fi's-samāwāti wa man fi'l-arḍ). The two sūras state the same extent with two different verbs: one prostration, the other islām. This is a weave verifiable within the series.


3/86-91

كَيْفَ يَهْدِى ٱللَّهُ قَوْمًا كَفَرُوا۟ بَعْدَ إِيمَٰنِهِمْ … إِلَّا ٱلَّذِينَ تَابُوا۟ مِنۢ بَعْدِ ذَٰلِكَ وَأَصْلَحُوا۟

Kayfa yahdi'llāhu qawman kafarū baʿda īmānihim wa shahidū anna'r-rasūla ḥaqqun wa jāʾahumu'l-bayyināt, wa'llāhu lā yahdi'l-qawma'ẓ-ẓālimīn · … · Illa'lladhīna tābū min baʿdi dhālika wa aṣlaḥū fa-inna'llāha ghafūrun raḥīm

"How shall God guide a people who disbelieved after they had believed, after they had borne witness that the messenger is true, and after the clear proofs had come to them? God does not guide a wrongdoing people. · … · Except those who turn back after that and set things right: God is much-forgiving, most merciful."

The building of the sentence: three conditions, then a question

The eighty-sixth verse does not set the ruling down directly; it opens with a question: kayfa — "how?" And it is a question that carries its answer within it (in Arabic, istifhām inkārī).

And three notes are set before the question, and all three convey a prior state:

#NoteWhat it conveys
1Baʿda īmānihimThey had believed
2Wa shahidū anna'r-rasūla ḥaqqThey had borne witness
3Wa jāʾahumu'l-bayyinātThe proofs had come

Three notes, and all three are a repetition of the sūra's main note: something happens after knowledge has come. The same note is at verses 19, 61 and 105 as well. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

The position of the exception — verse 89

And after a sequence of heavy rulings running three verses, verse 89 comes: illa'lladhīna tābū min baʿdi dhālika wa aṣlaḥū.

And the exception has two conditions, and the two are distinct:

ConditionVerbWhere
1Tābūthey turned backWithin
2Aṣlaḥūthey set things rightWithout

I record this as an observation about the word order: repentance alone is not counted sufficient; repair is added beside it. And the same pair occurred at 42/40 in al-Shūrā as well (fa-man ʿafā wa aṣlaḥa) — there for the one who forgives, here for the one who turns back. Two sūras apply the same pair to two different subjects.

And the difference in the ninetieth verse must be recorded: thumma'zdādū kufrā — "then they increased in disbelief". What is excluded from the exception is not the one who does not turn back but the one who increases in the opposite direction. That is, the axis of the ruling is not an event but a direction.

مِلْءُ ٱلْأَرْضِ ذَهَبًا (91) — milʾu'l-arḍi dhahabā: "the earth's fill of gold". And this lies along the same line as al-qanāṭīru'l-muqanṭara in verse 14: the sūra names the largest of hoarded amounts twice, and both times says that it is not enough.


3/92

لَن تَنَالُوا۟ ٱلْبِرَّ حَتَّىٰ تُنفِقُوا۟ مِمَّا تُحِبُّونَ

Lan tanālu'l-birra ḥattā tunfiqū mimmā tuḥibbūn, wa mā tunfiqū min shayʾin fa-inna'llāha bihī ʿalīm

"You will not attain birr until you spend of what you love. And whatever you spend, God knows it."


This verse is the counterpart in Āl ʿImrān of al-Baqara's definition of birr, and it is not fully understood unless the two sūras are read together.

ٱلْبِرّ — on the basis of al-Baqara

Al-birr was analysed in detail at 2/177 in al-Baqara, and the concrete sense of the root was given at 2/44. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. The summary recorded there:

The picture of the root ب-ر-ر is breadth — from the same root barr: dry land, open wide country. And 2/177 defines birr by a list: faith, wealth, worship, character. Within the definition the block on wealth is the longest, and it comes before worship.

And within the definition in al-Baqara there was a note, and the whole of this verse is that note unfolded:

Wa āta'l-māla ʿalā ḥubbihī — "he gave wealth while loving it."

I set the two verses side by side:

al-Baqara 2/177Āl ʿImrān 3/92
Kind of sentenceA definitionlaysa'l-birra… wa lākinna'l-birra man āmanaA conditionlan tanālū… ḥattā
The note of loveʿAlā ḥubbihī — a circumstantial note, inside the listMimmā tuḥibbūnthe condition itself
ExtentA long list: faith, wealth, prayer, alms, covenant, patienceA single item: spending
The one addressedThird person (man āmana)Second person plural (tanālū, tunfiqū)
A cutting offNoneLan — absolute negation

And the difference must be recorded: al-Baqara gives a definition, Āl ʿImrān turns one item of that definition into a threshold.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the kind of the two sentences: in al-Baqara "giving what you love" is an element inside the definition; here it is the condition of entry into the definition. The same element, in one sūra a part, in the other a door.

لَنحَتَّىٰ — the finality of the word order

Both particles of the sentence are strong:

  • لَن — the particle that in Arabic puts the imperfect in the subjunctive and conveys an absolute negation regarding the future. "You will never attain."
  • حَتَّىٰ — the particle of purpose: up to a limit. Here it conveys a condition.

That is, the sentence sets not a recommendation but a threshold.

نَالَ — root ن-و-ل: to stretch out the hand and take, to reach, to obtain. The root was treated at 33/25 in al-Aḥzāb (lam yanālū khayrā) and at 22/37 in al-Ḥajj. I rely on those treatments.

And the occurrence at 22/37 in al-Ḥajj connects directly here, and the two verses should be compared:

PlaceSentenceWhat is not reached / is reached
al-Ḥajj 22/37Lan yanāla'llāha luḥūmuhā wa lā dimāʾuhā wa lākin yanāluhu't-taqwā minkumNot the flesh of the offering but taqwā reaches
Āl ʿImrān 3/92Lan tanālu'l-birra ḥattā tunfiqū mimmā tuḥibbūnThe condition of reaching birr: giving what is loved

The same verb, the same particle of negation (lan), in two different sūras. And in both the measure is taken out of material quantity and tied to intention or attitude. This is a weave verifiable within the series.

مِمَّا تُحِبُّونَ — the work of min

And the particle itself sets a limit, and it is usually passed over: min here is the particle of tabʿīḍ — "of some of what you love".

The verse does not say "give all of what you love".

I record this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is the particle itself: the measure is not the amount given but the kind of what is given. The whole of something unloved may be given and the condition is not met; a part of something loved is given and the condition is met.

And al-Baqara 2/267 is the other half of this verse, and I rely on it:

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū anfiqū min ṭayyibāti mā kasabtum… wa lā tayammamu'l-khabītha minhu tunfiqūn — "Spend of the good things you have earned; and do not pick out the bad of it to give."

The two verses look at the same matter from two directions, and a table can be drawn:

al-Baqara 2/267Āl ʿImrān 3/92
MoodA commandanfiqūA conditionlan tanālū… ḥattā
The measureṬayyibātthe quality of what is givenMimmā tuḥibbūnthe giver's bond with it
The prohibitionLā tayammamu'l-khabīth — do not pick out the bad(No prohibition; a threshold)
Point of viewWhat the receiver will seeWhat the giver will feel

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the two verses together show that spending is measured from two separate places. Al-Baqara looks at the thing given itself; Āl ʿImrān at the giver's relation to that thing. And the second measure is the side of the first that cannot be checked from outside — and indeed it is for just this reason that the verse ends with fa-inna'llāha bihī ʿalīm.

What this says to the present

The measure the verse sets is one that can be applied directly today as well, and it can be reduced to a single question: was the thing given the thing that was easy to give?

When a person gives away something he wanted off his hands, he does two things at once: he is rid of a burden and it counts as giving. The verse's threshold cuts through exactly this doubleness.

And the verse names no amount. The condition is not quantity but bond. This makes the measure work for everyone according to his own situation: the same amount crosses the threshold for one person and not for another.


3/93-95

كُلُّ ٱلطَّعَامِ كَانَ حِلًّا لِّبَنِىٓ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلَ إِلَّا مَا حَرَّمَ إِسْرَٰٓءِيلُ عَلَىٰ نَفْسِهِۦ

Kullu'ṭ-ṭaʿāmi kāna ḥillan li-banī Isrāʾīla illā mā ḥarrama Isrāʾīlu ʿalā nafsihī min qabli an tunazzala't-Tawrāt, qul fa'tū bi't-Tawrāti fa'tlūhā in kuntum ṣādiqīn · Fa-mani'ftarā ʿala'llāhi'l-kadhiba min baʿdi dhālika fa-ulāʾika humu'ẓ-ẓālimūn · Qul ṣadaqa'llāh, fa'ttabiʿū millata Ibrāhīma ḥanīfā, wa mā kāna mina'l-mushrikīn

"Before the Torah was sent down, all food was lawful to the Children of Israel, except what Israel forbade to himself. Say: 'Bring the Torah and recite it, if you are truthful.' · Whoever invents a lie against God after this — those are the wrongdoers. · Say: 'God has spoken truly. So follow the way of Abraham, as a ḥanīf; and he was not of the mushrikūn.'"

The proof again built upon time

And this is the second application of the proof in verse 65, and it is in the same pattern:

VerseThe proofThe note of time
65Abraham lived before the two booksIllā min baʿdih
93The prohibition was laid down before the TorahMin qabli an tunazzala't-Tawrāt

Two verses, within the same block, applying the same reasoning to two different subjects: when a thing came into being limits the claim ascribed to it. This is a weave verifiable within the sūra.

فَأْتُوا۟ بِٱلتَّوْرَىٰةِ فَٱتْلُوهَآ — the form of the call

And the dispute is referred to a text: "bring it and recite it".

I record this as an observation and give it by way of the word order: the sentence uses the other side's book not by rejecting it but by calling for it. And this is consistent with the third verse of the sūra — there it was recorded that the Torah and the Gospel had been sent down.

And the note in kuntum ṣādiqīn: the offer of verification is left open to the other side.

Per the method (Method) I draw a boundary: what the particular prohibition the verse discusses was is transmitted in various forms in the classical sources. I do not go into the detail of those reports in this commentary and I make no preference, because the verse does not name the matter — it states only its time.

مِلَّة — root: م-ل-ل

The root م-ل-ل. The lexicographers explain milla as a way kept to, a manner followed; and they record the word's connection with dictationamlā: to dictate. That is, milla means a way dictated, a way laid out.

And it must be recorded that in the Qurʾān the word conveys not a community but a way. Millata Ibrāhīm — Abraham's way, not Abraham's people. The word was treated at 2/130-135 in al-Baqara; I rely on that treatment.

And the Turkish word millet comes from this root, but its sense has drifted: in Turkish it is the name of a community, in Arabic it is the name of a way. I record this as a note about language, and I draw no sense of "a people" from the verse.


3/96-97

إِنَّ أَوَّلَ بَيْتٍ وُضِعَ لِلنَّاسِ لَلَّذِى بِبَكَّةَ مُبَارَكًا وَهُدًى لِّلْعَٰلَمِينَ

Inna awwala baytin wuḍiʿa li'n-nāsi la'lladhī bi-Bakkata mubārakan wa hudan li'l-ʿālamīn · Fīhi āyātun bayyinātun maqāmu Ibrāhīm, wa man dakhalahū kāna āminā, wa li'llāhi ʿala'n-nāsi ḥijju'l-bayti mani'staṭāʿa ilayhi sabīlā, wa man kafara fa-inna'llāha ghaniyyun ʿani'l-ʿālamīn

"The first House established for people is the one at Bakka: blessed, and a guidance for all beings. · In it are clear signs, and the standing-place of Abraham. Whoever enters it is safe. And the pilgrimage to the House is a duty owed to God by those people who can find a way to it. Whoever denies — God has no need of any of the worlds."


Per the method (Method) I draw a boundary here and shall keep it throughout the section: the detail of the rulings of pilgrimage was treated at 2/196-203 in al-Baqara and at 22/26-33 in al-Ḥajj. I rely on those treatments, do not repeat them, and issue no legal ruling. Only what these two verses add will be recorded here.

أَوَّلَ بَيْتٍ وُضِعَ لِلنَّاسِ — word order

Every word of the sentence carries a note:

WordThe note
AwwalFirst — a claim of priority
Bayt — indefiniteA house — not a particular structure but a kind
Wuḍiʿa — passiveWas established — the one who established it is not named
Li'n-nāsFor people — not for a community

And the note li'n-nās is the most important word of this section. I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence does not say "for us" or "for such and such a community". And this bears directly on the subject of the third block — a dispute about belonging had been running throughout the block.

And the same breadth comes once more at the end of the verse: hudan li'l-ʿālamīn. Two notes, in a single verse: li'n-nās and li'l-ʿālamīn.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the middle of a dispute about belonging that runs by way of a place, the verse cuts the dispute short by saying for whom the place was set down. The claim of priority is accepted (awwal), but no claim of ownership is set up.

بَكَّة — the word itself

The lexicographers differ over the word's relation to Makka, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat Bakka is
1Another name for Mecca — the interchange of mīm and bāʾ (a known sound-change in Arabic)
2A particular place within Mecca — the area where the House stands
3From the root ب-ك-ك: bakka — to press together, a throng; the place where a crowd is packed

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

The third reading is worth recording as an analysis of the root: ب-ك-ك — to crush a thing, to press it, a throng. This is the concrete sense of the word; I make no claim that the verse means that sense.

فِيهِ ءَايَٰتٌۢ بَيِّنَٰتٌ مَّقَامُ إِبْرَٰهِيمَ

And there is a nicety in the word order, and the lexicographers dwell on it: āyātun is plural, and the maqāmu Ibrāhīm that follows it is singular.

ReadingThe relation
1Maqāmu Ibrāhīm is one instance of the plural (a partitive substitute)
2It is an explanation of the whole of the plural (explicative apposition)
3The plural covers all the signs of the place; one of them has been named separately

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

مَقَام — root ق-و-م: the place where one stands. Its link with the other occurrences in the sūra must be recorded: qāʾiman bi'l-qisṭ (18), qāʾimā (75), ummatun qāʾima (113). The same root in four separate places, at four separate pieces of work.

وَمَن دَخَلَهُۥ كَانَ ءَامِنًا — the kind of the sentence

And there is a divergence over whether this sentence is a statement or a performative, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat the sentence does
1A statement — it reports a fact: that place has been made safe
2A performative / in the sense of a command — "let him be safe", that is, whoever enters is not to be touched

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference and I draw no legal ruling from this.

And at 2/125-126 in al-Baqara the note of amn was treated for the same place (wa idh jaʿalna'l-bayta mathābatan li'n-nāsi wa amnā; rabbi'jʿal hādhā baladan āminā). I rely on that treatment.

وَلِلَّهِ عَلَى ٱلنَّاسِ حِجُّ ٱلْبَيْتِ — the word order of the obligation

And the building of the sentence must be recorded, because this pattern is rare in the Qurʾān:

Wa li'llāhi ʿala'n-nāsi ḥijju'l-bayt — "To God, upon people, is the pilgrimage to the House."

ElementWordingIts work
Whose rightLi'llāhbrought forwardThe one to whom the obligation is owed
Upon whomʿAla'n-nāsPeople — again the wide set
WhatḤijju'l-baytThe obligation itself
The caveatMani'staṭāʿa ilayhi sabīlāThe condition of ability

And the coming of li'llāh and ʿala'n-nās before the noun conveys in Arabic a restriction. That is, the sentence sets up a relation of debt: the creditor and the debtor are named.

اِسْتَطَاعَ — root ط-و-ع (Form X): to be able. And the same root occurred at verse 83 as ṭawʿan. The same root, one conveying willing submission, the other being able.

Per the method (Method) I record this: the extent of istiṭāʿa (safety of the road, financial condition, bodily health, travel with a close relative) has been discussed in detail in classical law, and there are differences among the schools. That discussion is not entered in this commentary and no view is preferred. The only thing recorded is that the verse ties the obligation to a condition.

وَمَن كَفَرَ فَإِنَّ ٱللَّهَ غَنِىٌّ عَنِ ٱلْعَٰلَمِينَand the verse closes by saying that the one who lays down the obligation expects no benefit from it. The same idea was set up for the offering at 22/37 in al-Ḥajj (lan yanāla'llāha luḥūmuhā wa lā dimāʾuhā). The two sūras enter the same note for two different acts of worship.


3/98-101

قُلْ يَٰٓأَهْلَ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لِمَ تَكْفُرُونَ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ … وَمَن يَعْتَصِم بِٱللَّهِ فَقَدْ هُدِىَ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ

Qul yā ahla'l-kitābi lima takfurūna bi-āyāti'llāhi wa'llāhu shahīdun ʿalā mā taʿmalūn · Qul yā ahla'l-kitābi lima taṣuddūna ʿan sabīli'llāhi man āmana tabghūnahā ʿiwajan wa antum shuhadāʾ, wa ma'llāhu bi-ghāfilin ʿammā taʿmalūn · Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū in tuṭīʿū farīqan mina'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba yaruddūkum baʿda īmānikum kāfirīn · Wa kayfa takfurūna wa antum tutlā ʿalaykum āyātu'llāhi wa fīkum rasūluh, wa man yaʿtaṣim bi'llāhi fa-qad hudiya ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm

"Say: 'People of the Book! Why do you deny the signs of God? God is witness to what you do.' · Say: 'People of the Book! Why do you turn the believer away from the path of God, seeking to make it crooked — and you yourselves witnesses?' … · You who believe! If you obey a group of those who were given the Book, they will turn you back to denial after your believing. · How can you deny — when the signs of God are recited to you and His messenger is among you? Whoever holds fast to God has been guided to a straight path."

The close of the block and the change of addressee

The ninety-ninth verse closes the third block; with the hundredth the addressee changes: instead of yā ahla'l-kitāb, yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū.

And this transition was recorded in the structure of the sūra (the table of blocks in the introduction). Here the form of the transition must be recorded:

VerseAddressSubject
98, 99Yā ahla'l-kitābOutward — denial and obstruction
100Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanūInward — the danger of following
101Wa kayfa takfurūnInward — the reminder of one's own state

And in the hundredth verse the caveat is entered again: farīqan mina'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāb — "a group". The same particle min for the fifth time. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

تَبْغُونَهَا عِوَجًا — root: ع-و-ج

The root ع-و-ج: crookedness. The lexicographers record a distinction: ʿiwaj (with i) for crookedness in abstract things — speech, an affair, a religion; ʿawaj (with a) for crookedness in visible things — a wall, a staff.

And the form used in the verse is ʿiwajan: that is, what they want to bend is not a visible object but a waysabīlu'llāh.

I record this as an observation about the word and rely on the lexicographers' distinction; I make no claim that the choice of word was deliberate.

And the verb must be recorded: tabghūnahā — root ب-غ-ي, "to want, to seek". The same root occurred at verse 19 as baghyan baynahum, and at verse 83 as yabghūn, at verse 85 as yabtaghi. This root in four separate places in the sūra, at four separate pieces of work.

وَمَن يَعْتَصِم بِٱللَّهِ — a bridge to verse 103

And the hundred and first verse gives in advance the key verb of the next block: yaʿtaṣim.

The root ع-ص-م: to hold on, to cling fast; and from this, to protect. ʿIṣma — being kept safe. Maʿṣūm — the one kept safe. And the concrete usage the lexicographers record: ʿiṣām — the cord that ties the mouth of a waterskin.

The root was treated at 22/78 in al-Ḥajj, at 33/17 in al-Aḥzāb, at 60/10 in al-Mumtaḥana and at 11/43 in Hūd. I rely on those treatments.

And what belongs here is this, and it is a fact of word order: the same verb comes twice, two verses apart, and its objects differ:

VerseVerbWhat is held on to
101Wa man yaʿtaṣim bi'llāhTo God — directly
103Wa'taṣimū bi-ḥabli'llāhTo the rope of God — by way of something between

Two verses, one root, two different objects. And the first is singular (man), the second plural (iʿtaṣimū), and to the second jamīʿan has been added.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the word order of the two verses: the first verse describes the holding fast of a single person, the second the holding fast of a community together. And in the second an object comes in between: ḥabl. That is, one person holds on directly; a community holds on to something shared.


3/102-103

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱتَّقُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ حَقَّ تُقَاتِهِۦ · وَٱعْتَصِمُوا۟ بِحَبْلِ ٱللَّهِ جَمِيعًا وَلَا تَفَرَّقُوا۟

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'ttaqu'llāha ḥaqqa tuqātihī wa lā tamūtunna illā wa antum muslimūn · Wa'taṣimū bi-ḥabli'llāhi jamīʿan wa lā tafarraqū, wa'dhkurū niʿmata'llāhi ʿalaykum idh kuntum aʿdāʾan fa-allafa bayna qulūbikum fa-aṣbaḥtum bi-niʿmatihī ikhwānā, wa kuntum ʿalā shafā ḥufratin mina'n-nāri fa-anqadhakum minhā

"You who believe! Guard yourselves before God as guarding is due, and do not die except as those who have handed themselves over. · Hold fast, all of you together, to the rope of God, and do not scatter. Remember the favour of God upon you: you were enemies, and He knit your hearts together, and by His favour you became brothers. You were on the edge of a pit of fire, and He rescued you from it."


These two verses open the fourth block, and the subject of the block is single: the inside of the community. I shall treat it in detail.

حَقَّ تُقَاتِهِۦ — the construction taken apart

Taqwā was analysed in al-Baqara and I do not repeat it here. What belongs here is the construction before the word: ḥaqqa tuqātih.

The pattern حَقّ + a genitive conveys in Arabic the doing of a thing to the measure it deserves. And the same pattern was treated in the series at 22/74 and 22/78 in al-Ḥajj:

PlaceConstructionAbout what
al-Ḥajj 22/74Mā qadaru'llāha ḥaqqa qadrihEstimation — it conveys a falling short
al-Ḥajj 22/78Wa jāhidū fi'llāhi ḥaqqa jihādihStriving — a command
Āl ʿImrān 3/102Ittaqu'llāha ḥaqqa tuqātihTaqwā — a command

Three occurrences, and I rely on al-Ḥajj 22/74-78.

And it is recorded in the classical sources that the construction gives rise to a difficulty, and the disagreement is not to be concealed: is it possible for a human being "to guard himself as guarding is due"?

ReadingHow the construction is understood
1To the utmost of one's power — according to a person's capacity
2An absolute measure — and al-Taghābun 64/16 (fa'ttaqu'llāha ma'staṭaʿtum) ties this measure to the limit of ability
3The construction conveys a direction, not a point to be reached

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

وَلَا تَمُوتُنَّ إِلَّا وَأَنتُم مُّسْلِمُونَ — a point of word order

The wording of the sentence carries a difficulty, and the lexicographers dwell on it: death is not a thing that can be commanded or forbidden.

And the solution lies in the structure of the sentence: the prohibition is laid not on dying but on the state of the dying. In Arabic this is a prohibition falling on a circumstantial note: what is forbidden is not to die but to die in a state of not having handed oneself over.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence thereby commands a continuance. Since the time of death is not known, to say "die in that state" is to say "be in that state at every moment".

وَٱعْتَصِمُوا۟ بِحَبْلِ ٱللَّهِ — two words

ٱعْتَصِمُوا۟ — root ع-ص-م, Form VIII. The root was analysed at verse 101; I do not repeat those notes. What belongs here: Form VIII (iftiʿāl) conveys in Arabic that the act is done with care and by one's own effort. Iʿtiṣām — to fasten oneself, to cling.

حَبْل — the root ح-ب-ل: rope, bond. The concrete sense of the word is a rope, and its derivatives keep this: ḥabl — a rope; ḥibāla — a snare-cord; and ḥubl — pregnancy (the most concrete form of a bond).

And the word ḥabl will come once more nine verses later in the sūra, this time not in the plural but in a paired construction: illā bi-ḥablin mina'llāhi wa ḥablin mina'n-nās (112). Two occurrences, in a single sūra.

VerseḤablWhose rope
103Ḥabli'llāhsingular, definiteThe rope of God — the one to be held
112Ḥablin mina'llāh and ḥablin mina'n-nāsTwo ropes — bonds that afford protection

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra, and both occurrences of the word carry the idea of a bond.

And there is a divergence in the classical commentaries over what ḥablu'llāh is, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat ḥablu'llāh is
1The Qurʾān
2The covenant of God
3Religion, the unity of the community
4Obedience

All four are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

But the verse's own word order gives an indication, and I record this as an indication, not as a preference: immediately after the command comes wa lā tafarraqū. That is, the holding fast stands in the same sentence as the not scattering. And the note jamīʿan makes the subject of the command plural. Whatever the thing held on to may be, the verse names it as something that holds people together.

A comparison with 2/256: ٱلْعُرْوَةِ ٱلْوُثْقَىٰ

At 2/256 in al-Baqara al-ʿurwa al-wuthqā was treated (fa-qadi'stamsaka bi'l-ʿurwati'l-wuthqā lā-nfiṣāma lahā) and the same family of verbs was there too: istamsaka — he took hold. I rely on that treatment and compare the two verses:

al-Baqara 2/256Āl ʿImrān 3/103
What is heldAl-ʿurwa al-wuthqā — the firm handleḤablu'llāh — the rope of God
The picture of the objectA handle — the grip of a vessel or a loadA rope — something that extends, held out from a distance
The verbIstamsaka (م-س-ك) — to hold, to keep in handIʿtaṣama (ع-ص-م) — to be protected by holding on
The subjectSingularman yakfur bi'ṭ-ṭāghūti wa yuʾmin bi'llāhPluraliʿtaṣimū… jamīʿan
The added noteLā-nfiṣāma lahāit does not break (a quality of the object)Wa lā tafarraqūdo not scatter (an obligation on the subject)
ContextThere is no compulsion in religion — a person's choiceThe unity of the community

I draw three observations from the table, and all three can be verified from the two texts.

One. The pictures of the two objects differ, and the difference does work. An ʿurwa is a handle: it is joined to the object, it is close, it is held with one hand. A ḥabl is a rope: it extends, it is held out from a distance, and more than one hand can hold the same rope.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concrete sense of the two words: in al-Baqara the one holding on is singular and the object is chosen to fit one hand; in Āl ʿImrān the ones holding on are plural and the object is chosen to fit many hands. The two verses give the same idea on two different scales.

Two. Firmness is placed in two different places in the two verses. In al-Baqara firmness is a quality of the object: lā-nfiṣāma lahā — it does not break. In Āl ʿImrān nothing is said about the object; the obligation is laid on the subject: wa lā tafarraqū. That is, the rope does not break; what breaks is those who let go of it.

Three. Both verses set the holding fast after a choice. In al-Baqara there is the condition man yakfur bi'ṭ-ṭāghūti wa yuʾmin bi'llāh; in Āl ʿImrān the command is directed to those who believe (yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū).

إِذْ كُنتُمْ أَعْدَآءً فَأَلَّفَ بَيْنَ قُلُوبِكُمْ

ألف — root أ-ل-ف: to unite, to be knit together, to grow accustomed. Ulfa — cohesion. Alf — a thousand (a gathered multitude). And the core the lexicographers record: separate things coming together and growing used to one another.

And the subject of the verb must be recorded: fa-allafa — the subject is God. The uniting is not told as an achievement of the parties.

The same verb and the same note occur at 8/63 in al-Anfāl (law anfaqta mā fi'l-arḍi jamīʿan mā allafta bayna qulūbihim wa lākinna'llāha allafa baynahum) and there it is said plainly: it is a work that cannot be done by spending wealth. I rely on that treatment.

PlaceSentenceWhat it adds
al-Anfāl 8/63Mā allafta bayna qulūbihimIt is recorded as what a human being cannot do
Āl ʿImrān 3/103Fa-allafa bayna qulūbikumWhat has happened is recalled

The two verses use the same verb at two different pieces of work: one an impossibility, the other something accomplished. This is a weave verifiable within the series.

عَلَىٰ شَفَا حُفْرَةٍ مِّنَ ٱلنَّارِ — the description itself

شَفَا — root ش-ف-و/ي: the edge of a thing, its brink, its threshold. Shafa — lip (the edge of the mouth) is from the same root. And the lexicographers explain shafā as "the point nearest to falling".

حُفْرَة — root ح-ف-ر: a dug pit.

And the word order of the description must be recorded, and it has three elements: ʿalā shafā ḥufratin mina'n-nār — edge, pit, fire. Three words set up a measure of distance: the person is not inside the fire but on the edge of the pit.

I record this as an observation: the description tells of a moment — the moment at which the fall has not happened but a single step's distance remains. And the verb of rescue is chosen accordingly: fa-anqadhakum (ن-ق-ذ) — to pull out, to rescue. The verb conveys not the taking out of one who has fallen but the pulling back of one who is about to fall.

And the standing of the two descriptions in the same verse is a fact of word order: from enmity to brotherhood, and a moving away from the edge of the pit. Two separate pictures, two faces of a single favour.


3/104-105

وَلْتَكُن مِّنكُمْ أُمَّةٌ يَدْعُونَ إِلَى ٱلْخَيْرِ · وَلَا تَكُونُوا۟ كَٱلَّذِينَ تَفَرَّقُوا۟ وَٱخْتَلَفُوا۟

Wa'ltakun minkum ummatun yadʿūna ila'l-khayri wa yaʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfi wa yanhawna ʿani'l-munkari wa ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn · Wa lā takūnū ka'lladhīna tafarraqū wa'khtalafū min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-bayyināt, wa ulāʾika lahum ʿadhābun ʿaẓīm

"Let there be among you a community calling to the good, enjoining what is right and forbidding what is wrong. Those are the ones who prosper. · Do not be like those who split apart and fell into division after the clear proofs had come to them. For them there is a great punishment."

مِنكُمْ — the disagreement over the reach of the particle

The lexicographers differ over the function of the particle min in the verse, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat minkum meansConsequence
1Tabʿīḍ — "some of you"The duty lies on a group (read as a collective obligation, farḍ kifāya)
2Bayāniyya — "be so, that community being you"The duty lies on all of them

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference and I draw no legal ruling from this.

But one datum of the text can be recorded, and I record it: the same three attributes will be laid six verses later, at verse 110, on the whole community (taʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfi wa tanhawna ʿani'l-munkar) — and there the particle min is absent. This is the difference of word order between the two verses, and they can also be read as completing each other.

The order of the three verbs

#VerbDirection
1Yadʿūna ila'l-khayrCalling — positive, the widest
2Yaʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfEnjoining — the good that is known
3Yanhawna ʿani'l-munkarForbidding — what is rejected

And the order must be recorded: calling first, forbidding last.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the verbs: the list opens with the positive and closes with the negative. And the first verb (daʿwa) carries no compulsion at all — it only calls.

مَعْرُوف / مُنكَر — both words are built on the same logic, and their formation must be recorded:

  • مَعْرُوف — root ع-ر-ف: known, recognised. A passive participle.
  • مُنكَر — root ن-ك-ر: not recognised, found strange. A passive participle.

Both are built on the axis of recognition, and both are in the passive pattern. That is, the good is named "what is known" and the evil "what is found strange".

And the three occur three times in the sūra: 104, 110, 114. And the subjects of the three differ:

VerseSubjectWho
104Ummatun minkumA community from among you
110Kuntum khayra ummatinThe whole of the community addressed
114Ummatun qāʾima min ahli'l-kitābA community standing upright from among the People of the Book

Three occurrences, three separate subjects — and the third is from the People of the Book. This is a fact verifiable within the sūra and settles directly how verse 110 is to be read. We shall return to it below.

مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا جَآءَهُمُ ٱلْبَيِّنَٰتُ — the third occurrence of the note

This construction was treated at verse 19, and a table of five places was drawn up there. I rely on al-Baqara 2/213, al-Shūrā 42/14 and al-Jāthiya 45/17 and do not repeat them.

There are two notes that belong here:

One. The word that comes here is al-bayyināt, not al-ʿilm. At verse 19 of the sūra al-ʿilm came. That is, the sūra uses the same pattern twice with two different words.

VersePatternWhat comes
19Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmKnowledge
105Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-bayyinātThe clear proofs

Two. In the other occurrences this sentence is a statement; here it is the ground of a prohibition. Wa lā takūnū ka'lladhīna… — "do not be like them". That is, a sentence said about others is turned into an example for the one addressed.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the mood of the sentence: the sūra tells this here not as a piece of history but as a possibility. It is assumed that the same thing may happen to the one addressed. And indeed the sūra will record at verse 152 that something like it did happen.

The two occurrences of the root ف-ر-ق in the sūra must be recorded: wa lā tafarraqū (103) — ka'lladhīna tafarraqū (105). One a prohibition, the other an instance of its breach; two verses apart. This was recorded in the table in the introduction.


3/106-109

يَوْمَ تَبْيَضُّ وُجُوهٌ وَتَسْوَدُّ وُجُوهٌ

Yawma tabyaḍḍu wujūhun wa taswaddu wujūh, fa-amma'lladhīna'swaddat wujūhuhum a-kafartum baʿda īmānikum fa-dhūqu'l-ʿadhāba bimā kuntum takfurūn · Wa amma'lladhīna'byaḍḍat wujūhuhum fa-fī raḥmati'llāhi hum fīhā khālidūn · Tilka āyātu'llāhi natlūhā ʿalayka bi'l-ḥaqq, wa ma'llāhu yurīdu ẓulman li'l-ʿālamīn · Wa li'llāhi mā fi's-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍ, wa ila'llāhi turjaʿu'l-umūr

"On a day when some faces will grow white and some faces will grow black. … · These are the signs of God; We recite them to you with the truth. God wills no wrong to any of the worlds. · Whatever is in the heavens and the earth belongs to God; and to God all affairs are returned."

Word order: أَمَّاوَأَمَّا and the reversal of the sequence

And there is a fact in the word order that must be recorded: in counting the two groups, the verse opens with the faces that grow black.

Yet in the first half of verse 106 the order is the reverse: tabyaḍḍu (grow white) first, taswaddu (grow black) after. In the second half, on the other hand, fa-amma'lladhīna'swaddat comes first.

OrderFirst half (106a)Second half (106b-107)
1Tabyaḍḍugrowing whiteIswaddatgrown black
2Taswaddugrowing blackIbyaḍḍatgrown white

This is a chiastic arrangement (laff wa nashr mushawwash). And it has a consequence worth recording: the block ends with mercy (fa-fī raḥmati'llāhi hum fīhā khālidūn). That is, the reversal of the sequence settles which sentence will be the section's last.

I record this as an observation about the word order; I make no claim about reckonings or numbers.

And the sentence a-kafartum baʿda īmānikum must be recorded: the same construction occurs at 106 as a question, at 90 as a statement, at 100 as a warning. Three occurrences, in a single sūra:

VerseWordingMood
90Kafarū baʿda īmānihimA statement
100Yaruddūkum baʿda īmānikum kāfirīnA warning
106A-kafartum baʿda īmānikumA question

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.


3/110

كُنتُمْ خَيْرَ أُمَّةٍ أُخْرِجَتْ لِلنَّاسِ تَأْمُرُونَ بِٱلْمَعْرُوفِ وَتَنْهَوْنَ عَنِ ٱلْمُنكَرِ وَتُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱللَّهِ

Kuntum khayra ummatin ukhrijat li'n-nāsi taʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfi wa tanhawna ʿani'l-munkari wa tuʾminūna bi'llāh, wa law āmana ahlu'l-kitābi la-kāna khayran lahum, minhumu'l-muʾminūna wa aktharuhumu'l-fāsiqūn

"You have been the best community brought forth for people: you enjoin what is right, forbid what is wrong, and believe in God. Had the People of the Book believed, it would have been better for them. Among them are believers; but most of them have gone out of the way."


Per the method (Method) this verse will be treated in this commentary with great care. The reason is plain: it is one of the verses most used to set up a claim of superiority for a community. And the rule of this commentary was laid down at the head of the sūra — no blanket ruling is made about any group. What I shall show below is that this rule is not a sensitivity brought in from outside but the verse's own word order.

The structure of the sentence: where in the sentence the attributes stand

The word order of the verse is this:

ElementWordingKind
1Kuntum khayra ummatinThe ruling
2Ukhrijat li'n-nāsA qualifying clause
3Taʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfA verbal sentence
4Wa tanhawna ʿani'l-munkarA verbal sentence
5Wa tuʾminūna bi'llāhA verbal sentence

And the real question is the position in the sentence of the third, fourth and fifth elements.

In Arabic these three verbal sentences following a nominal sentence are analysed in two ways, and the lexicographers divide here. The disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat the three verbal sentences areConsequence
1Ḥāl — the state in which the ruling is laid down"You have been the best community — while being thus"
2The ground of the ruling (an explanatory resumption, istiʾnāf bayānī)"You are the best, because you do these things"
3An explanation of khayra ummatin"The best community is this: …"

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And what must now be recorded is this, and it is the same on all three readings: on none of the three readings are the attributes separable from the ruling. The ruling is tied to the three verbs — whether as state, as ground, or as explanation. That is, the phrase "best community" does not stand alone in the sentence without the three verbs.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and it can be verified from the wording of the verse: there is no reading of the sentence in which the three verbs can be taken out.

The three attributes themselves

#AttributeDirection
1Taʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfOutward — to another
2Wa tanhawna ʿani'l-munkarOutward — to another
3Wa tuʾminūna bi'llāhInward — to oneself

And that two of the attributes are turned towards people joins with the preceding note (ukhrijat li'n-nās).

أُخْرِجَتْ لِلنَّاسِ — "brought forth for people". The verb is passive: the one who brings forth is not named. And the note li'n-nās states by reference to whom the community is described.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two notes (li'n-nās and the two outward-facing verbs): the verse describes not a position but a work. The community is named as "brought forth" not for itself but for others. And its quality is measured by two verbs turned towards others.

A comparison with 2/143: أُمَّةً وَسَطًا

At 2/143 in al-Baqara ummatan wasaṭan was treated, and I rely on that treatment. What was recorded there:

The root و-س-ط carries two senses at once: middle (between two extremes) and most valuable, choicest (wasaṭu'l-qawm, the best of a people). And the task was defined there not as superiority but as witnessing: shuhadāʾa ʿala'n-nās. And this was recorded: "A community's witness is borne not by what it says but by the state in which it is seen."

I set the two verses side by side:

al-Baqara 2/143Āl ʿImrān 3/110
The constructionUmmatan wasaṭanKhayra ummatin
The verbJaʿalnākum"We made you", the agent statedUkhrijatpassive, the agent not stated
By reference to whomShuhadāʾa ʿala'n-nāsUkhrijat li'n-nās
The kind of taskWitnessing — being seenEnjoining and forbidding — speaking
The noteWa yakūna'r-rasūlu ʿalaykum shahīdāthey too are under scrutinyThe three verbs — the attributes are inside the sentence
The tense of the sentenceJaʿalnāperfect, a thing doneKuntumperfect, and the three verbs imperfect

And the last row must be opened out separately, because it is the most disputed point of the verse.

كُنتُمْ — the work of the perfect verb

Kuntum is in the perfect: "you have been / you were". And the three verbs that follow are in the imperfect: taʾmurūna, tanhawna, tuʾminūna — they convey continuance.

The lexicographers differ over what the tense conveys, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat kuntum conveys
1Kāna redundant / complete — in the sense of "you are"; it conveys no time
2An attribute realised in the past — "you became so"
3It has been so decreed in God's knowledge / in the Preserved Tablet
4A conditioned ruling — valid so long as the attributes continue

All four are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

But one datum of the text can be recorded, and I record it: the predicate of the sentence is perfect, and all three of the attributes are imperfect. In Arabic the imperfect conveys continuance and renewal. That is, the attributes are set up not as a completed event but as an ongoing work. This gives an indication in favour of the fourth reading; but I record it as an indication, not as a preference.

Per the method (Method): what the verse does not say

I now record this plainly. These are limits that come out of the wording of the verse:

One. No people, race, language or geography is named in the verse. What is named is a community, and the community is described by three verbs. No superiority for any people or group can be drawn from this verse — because the verse names no people.

Two. The ruling cannot be separated from the attributes. It was shown above on all three readings: the three verbs are load-bearing in the sentence. To take the ruling without carrying the attributes requires cutting the sentence in two; and the word order does not allow it.

Three. The verse's own second half prevents its first half from turning into an instrument of blanket ruling. The second half is this: minhumu'l-muʾminūna wa aktharuhumu'l-fāsiqūn. That is, a division is made even for the other side — "among them are believers."

I record this as an observation about the word order: even while passing a ruling about a group, the verse divides that group in two. A blanket ruling is not in the verse's own sentence.

Four. And the sūra will enter this note again and plainly three verses later: laysū sawāʾan (113). In this commentary verse 110 is read together with that note the sūra itself sets down.

Five. Present-day politics and claims of superiority are not entered. This is the rule of Method, and it is recalled here again, because this verse has been used most in that field.

What this says to the present

What this verse says to the present runs in exactly the opposite direction from the claim drawn out of it, and this can be shown from the wording of the verse:

The verse looks like a sentence of praise; but every element in it is a burden. Ukhrijat li'n-nās — to be brought forth for others is not a privilege but a duty. Taʾmurūna and tanhawna — both verbs cost labour, and both carry risk. Tuʾminūna bi'llāh — the third is the support of the other two.

And a sentence does not stand when all the conditions that carry it have fallen away.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: to read this verse as a sentence of identity requires cutting the sentence right through the middle. Read whole, the verse is not an attribute but a description of a work.


3/111-112

لَن يَضُرُّوكُمْ إِلَّآ أَذًى · ضُرِبَتْ عَلَيْهِمُ ٱلذِّلَّةُ أَيْنَ مَا ثُقِفُوٓا۟ إِلَّا بِحَبْلٍ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ وَحَبْلٍ مِّنَ ٱلنَّاسِ

Lan yaḍurrūkum illā adhā, wa in yuqātilūkum yuwallūkumu'l-adbāra thumma lā yunṣarūn · Ḍuribat ʿalayhimu'dh-dhillatu ayna mā thuqifū illā bi-ḥablin mina'llāhi wa ḥablin mina'n-nāsi wa bāʾū bi-ghaḍabin mina'llāhi wa ḍuribat ʿalayhimu'l-maskana, dhālika bi-annahum kānū yakfurūna bi-āyāti'llāhi wa yaqtulūna'l-anbiyāʾa bi-ghayri ḥaqq, dhālika bimā ʿaṣaw wa kānū yaʿtadūn

"They will do you no harm beyond annoyance… · Wherever they are found, abasement is stamped upon them — except by a rope from God and a rope from people. … This is because they denied the signs of God and killed the prophets without right; this is because they disobeyed and transgressed."

The place of the exception: إِلَّا بِحَبْلٍ

And the most important element of the verse is the exception in its middle, and it is usually passed over: illā bi-ḥablin mina'llāhi wa ḥablin mina'n-nās.

That is, the ruling is not absolute; it has a caveat, and the caveat is inside the sentence. Two ropes: one from God, one from people.

And the word ḥabl had occurred nine verses earlier, at verse 103. The comparison of the two occurrences was recorded above.

ذِلَّة — root ذ-ل-ل: lowness, submission. Dhalūl — a tamed animal, one brought under. And the opposite of the root is ʿizza.

مَسْكَنَة — root س-ك-ن: stillness, immobility. Miskīn — one who cannot move, who is helpless.

And it must be recorded that both words come with the same verb: ḍuribat — "was struck". In Arabic the verb ḍaraba is used also for the pitching of a tent and the stamping of a seal. And the verb is passive: the one who strikes is not named.

The same two words and the same verb occur together at 2/61 in al-Baqara (wa ḍuribat ʿalayhimu'dh-dhillatu wa'l-maskanatu wa bāʾū bi-ghaḍabin mina'llāh). I rely on that treatment. The difference between the two verses must be recorded, and it is the point this commentary draws attention to:

al-Baqara 2/61Āl ʿImrān 3/112
The two wordsAl-dhillatu wa'l-maskanatogetherAl-dhilla… and then separately al-maskanaparted
The exceptionNoneIllā bi-ḥablin mina'llāhi wa ḥablin mina'n-nās
The groundBimā ʿaṣaw wa kānū yaʿtadūnThe same

And the difference is at the most important place: in giving the same ruling, Āl ʿImrān adds an exception.

Per the method (Method) I record this plainly: these two verses cannot be read as a blanket ruling about a community. The reason is not brought in from outside; it is from the text itself, in three places:

One. The ground of the ruling is counted at the end of the verse by verbs: denial, killing prophets, disobedience, transgression. That is, the ruling is tied not to a name but to a list of conduct.

Two. There is an exception in the middle of the sentence, and the exception says that the ruling can be lifted.

Three. And one verse later the sūra will set up the division plainly: laysū sawāʾan (113).


3/113-115

لَيْسُوا۟ سَوَآءً مِّنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ أُمَّةٌ قَآئِمَةٌ يَتْلُونَ ءَايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ ءَانَآءَ ٱلَّيْلِ وَهُمْ يَسْجُدُونَ

Laysū sawāʾan min ahli'l-kitābi ummatun qāʾimatun yatlūna āyāti'llāhi ānāʾa'l-layli wa hum yasjudūn · Yuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhiri wa yaʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfi wa yanhawna ʿani'l-munkari wa yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt, wa ulāʾika mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn · Wa mā yafʿalū min khayrin fa-lan yukfarūh, wa'llāhu ʿalīmun bi'l-muttaqīn

"They are not all alike. Among the People of the Book there is a community that stands upright: they recite the signs of God through the watches of the night, prostrating themselves. · They believe in God and the Last Day, enjoin what is right, forbid what is wrong, and hasten to good works. Those are among the righteous. · No good they do will go unrewarded; and God knows those who guard themselves."


This verse is singled out in this commentary and is the note under which all the sūra's statements about the People of the Book are to be read. The note was entered in the introduction to the sūra; here its ground is shown from the text.

لَيْسُوا۟ سَوَآءً — the sentence itself

Two words. And both are familiar from another place in the sūra.

سَوَآء — root س-و-ي: to be equal, to be even. The word was analysed at verse 64: kalimatin sawāʾin baynanā wa baynakum. What was recorded there: at the centre of the root stands the absence of tilt — what does not lean to one side.

And now the same word comes negated:

VerseWordingWhat it does
64Kalimatin sawāʾin baynanā wa baynakumCommon ground — the two sides are equal
113Laysū sawāʾan"They are not all alike" — a set is not uniform

The same word, at two different pieces of work. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and was recorded in the table in the introduction.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the two occurrences of the word: the sūra settles two separate questions of equality with the same word. In one place it says that the ground between two sides is equal; in the other that one side is not uniform within itself. Both are the work of the same root: measuring.

أُمَّةٌ قَآئِمَةٌ — and the counting of the attributes

Ummatun qāʾimaa community that stands upright. The root ق-و-م was treated at verses 96-97 (maqāmu Ibrāhīm), occurred at verse 18 as qāʾiman bi'l-qisṭ and at verse 75 as qāʾimā. The fourth occurrence is here.

And the attributes given to this community must be counted, because they can be compared with the attributes the sūra gives to its own community:

#Attribute (113-114)Elsewhere in the sūra
1Yatlūna āyāti'llāhi ānāʾa'l-laylCf. 17: al-mustaghfirīna bi'l-asḥār
2Wa hum yasjudūn
3Yuʾminūna bi'llāhi wa'l-yawmi'l-ākhirCf. 110: wa tuʾminūna bi'llāh
4Wa yaʾmurūna bi'l-maʿrūfThe same as 110 and 104
5Wa yanhawna ʿani'l-munkarThe same as 110 and 104
6Wa yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrātCf. 133: wa sāriʿū ilā maghfiratin
The rulingWa ulāʾika mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn

And what the table shows is a fact verifiable from the text: all three of the attributes given to the community addressed in verse 110 are given here to a community from among the People of the Book.

I record this as an observation, and it is the sūra's own method: the attributes are named together with whoever carries them. The same three verbs occur, for two separate communities, within the same group of verses. That is, the sūra shows three verses apart that the attribute is not proper to one group.

The sūra's statements about the People of the Book — a table together with the note of 113

I now give all the sūra's statements about the People of the Book together. The purpose of the table is to show the note of extent of each statement. The notes of extent are taken from the wording of the verses themselves.

VerseStatementNote of extent — from the verse's own wording
64Taʿālaw ilā kalimatin sawāʾinA call — not a ruling; and with fa-in tawallaw the possibility of refusal is taken into account from the start
65-68Lima tuḥājjūna fī IbrāhīmTo those who dispute — and the answer is given by an attribute (ḥanīfan musliman)
69Waddat ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitābMin — a party
70-71Lima takfurūn / lima talbisūnTo those who do the act — in the interrogative
72Wa qālat ṭāʾifatun min ahli'l-kitābMin — a party
75Wa min ahli'l-kitāb… wa minhumAn open division — and the favourable one first
78Wa inna minhum la-farīqanMin — a part
98-99Lima takfurūn / lima taṣuddūnTo those who do the act — in the interrogative
100In tuṭīʿū farīqan mina'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitābMin — a group
110La-kāna khayran lahumA division within the sentence itself: minhumu'l-muʾminūn
112Ḍuribat ʿalayhimu'dh-dhillaAn exception within the sentence: illā bi-ḥablin mina'llāh; and the ground counted by verbs
113-115Laysū sawāʾan… ummatun qāʾimaAn open note — the attributes counted, and mina'ṣ-ṣāliḥīn said
199Wa inna min ahli'l-kitābi la-man yuʾminMin — and lahum ajruhum ʿinda rabbihim

Two facts follow from the table and can be verified from the text:

One. There is not a single unfavourable sentence of ruling in the sūra built about the whole of the People of the Book. Every statement carries either a particle min, or an exception, or a division, or the note of the interrogative mood.

Two. The sūra builds a favourable ruling plainly in two places: 113-115 and 199. And both come after the sūra's heaviest statements — 113 immediately after 112; 199 at the end of the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the placing of the note immediately after the heavy statement can be read as a method of the sūra. The text meets the generalising of its own sentence within itself.

And per the method (Method) I record this: in this commentary no blanket ruling about any religious or ethnic group has been drawn from any statement of the sūra. This is the note the sūra itself sets down.

وَمَا يَفْعَلُوا۟ مِنْ خَيْرٍ فَلَن يُكْفَرُوهُ

The concrete sense of the root ك-ف-ر is to cover. And here the verb is passive and negative: lan yukfarūh — "it will not be covered", that is, it will not be left unrewarded.

I record this as an observation about the word: the same root had been used throughout the sūra for denial; here it is used for a deed's not being covered up. That is, the root conveys denial, ingratitude and the concealing of a work alike.

And the subject of the sentence must be recorded: wa mā yafʿalū min khayrin — a conditional sentence, and the subject of the condition is not tied to any group. The sentence holds whoever it is that does the good.


3/116-120

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ لَن تُغْنِىَ عَنْهُمْ أَمْوَٰلُهُمْ … لَا تَتَّخِذُوا۟ بِطَانَةً مِّن دُونِكُمْ

Inna'lladhīna kafarū lan tughniya ʿanhum amwāluhum wa lā awlāduhum mina'llāhi shayʾā, wa ulāʾika aṣḥābu'n-nāri hum fīhā khālidūn · Mathalu mā yunfiqūna fī hādhihi'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā ka-mathali rīḥin fīhā ṣirrun aṣābat ḥartha qawmin ẓalamū anfusahum fa-ahlakat'hu… · Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā tattakhidhū biṭānatan min dūnikum lā yaʾlūnakum khabālan waddū mā ʿanittum, qad badati'l-baghḍāʾu min afwāhihim wa mā tukhfī ṣudūruhum akbar… · Hā-antum ulāʾi tuḥibbūnahum wa lā yuḥibbūnakum… · In tamsaskum ḥasanatun tasuʾhum wa in tuṣibkum sayyiʾatun yafraḥū bihā, wa in taṣbirū wa tattaqū lā yaḍurrukum kayduhum shayʾā, inna'llāha bimā yaʿmalūna muḥīṭ

"Neither their wealth nor their children will avail those who disbelieve anything against God… · What they spend in this life of the world is like a wind carrying a searing cold: it strikes the tilth of a people who wronged themselves and destroys it… · You who believe! Do not take as intimates those who are not of you: they spare no effort to harm you, and they wish you distress. Hatred has spilled from their mouths; and what their breasts conceal is greater… · There you are: you love them, and they do not love you… · If good touches you it grieves them; if evil strikes you they rejoice at it. But if you are steadfast and guard yourselves, their scheming will do you no harm at all. God encompasses what they do."

مَثَلُكَمَثَلِ رِيحٍ فِيهَا صِرٌّ

صِرّ — root ص-ر-ر: the lexicographers explain the word as severe cold or as a wind that makes a searing sound; there is an idea of pressing and of sound in the root (ṣarra — it creaked, it pressed).

And the structure of the comparison must be recorded:

ElementIts counterpart in the comparison
Mā yunfiqūnThe tilth — laboured over, grown
Rīḥun fīhā ṣirrThe wind — coming from outside
Fa-ahlakat'huDestruction

I record this as an observation: what is destroyed in the comparison is not the wealth spent but the return on the spending. The tilth had already grown — what is lost is the crop.

And the word rīḥ had occurred in another idiom at 8/46 in al-Anfāl (wa tadhhaba rīḥukum) and there the wind meant strength. The same word in two sūras, at two separate pieces of work: one the going of strength, the other the destroying of tilth. This is a fact verifiable within the series.

بِطَانَة — root: ب-ط-ن

The root ب-ط-ن: the inside, the belly, what is hidden. Baṭn — belly. Bāṭin — what is within. And biṭāna, for the lexicographers, is the lining of a garment — the face that does not show outwardly and touches the body.

And its opposite is recorded by the lexicographers too: ẓihāra — the outer face of a garment.

I record this as an observation about the word: the word does not say "companion" or "friend". It says lining — that is, the innermost, what touches the skin, what is not seen from outside. And the prohibition falls not on the relation but on this degree of the relation.

ولا يَأْلُونَكُمْ خَبَالًاlā yaʾlūnakum khabālā: root أ-ل-و, "to fall short of nothing, to hold back from nothing". And khabāl (خ-ب-ل): a derangement of mind and body, corruption.

And the verse's notes must be recorded, because the ground of the prohibition is inside the verse and is tied not to a name but to an attitude:

#The groundWording
1That they hold back from nothing in harming youLā yaʾlūnakum khabālā
2That they wish you distressWaddū mā ʿanittum
3That the hatred shows in their wordsQad badati'l-baghḍāʾu min afwāhihim
4That what is concealed is greater stillWa mā tukhfī ṣudūruhum akbar

Per the method (Method) I record this: all four grounds describe an attitude; none of them gives a group's name. The verse says min dūnikum, and the measure of that is the four attitudes counted below it. No ruling about any community is built on this verse in this commentary — and the sūra itself has already entered this note at verse 113.

وَإِن تَصْبِرُوا۟ وَتَتَّقُوا۟ — the close of the block

And the fourth block closes with a condition: wa in taṣbirū wa tattaqū lā yaḍurrukum kayduhum shayʾā.

And the pair (ṣabr + taqwā) occurs three times in the sūra:

VerseWordingContext
120In taṣbirū wa tattaqūThe close of the block — enmity
125Balā in taṣbirū wa tattaqūA promise of help
186Wa in taṣbirū wa tattaqū fa-inna dhālika min ʿazmi'l-umūrTesting

Three occurrences, the same two verbs. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

I record this as an observation: in all three places the pair changes the outcome of something the other side will do. That is, the verse does not remove the outward pressure; it ties its effect to an inward attitude.


3/121-122

وَإِذْ غَدَوْتَ مِنْ أَهْلِكَ تُبَوِّئُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ مَقَٰعِدَ لِلْقِتَالِ

Wa idh ghadawta min ahlika tubawwiʾu'l-muʾminīna maqāʿida li'l-qitāl, wa'llāhu samīʿun ʿalīm · Idh hammat ṭāʾifatāni minkum an tafshalā wa'llāhu waliyyuhumā, wa ʿala'llāhi fa'l-yatawakkali'l-muʾminūn

"When you set out early from your family to station the believers in their posts for the fighting. God is hearing, knowing. · When two parties among you were inclined to falter; yet God was the protector of both. Let the believers rely on God alone."


This verse opens the fifth and longest block of the sūra. Per the method (Method) I draw a boundary and shall keep it throughout the block: in the discussion of Uḥud I do not go into the detail of the reports or into personal names. The verses themselves name no one anywhere — no commander, no tribe, no unit. This silence of the text is preserved in this commentary.

The only thing to be recorded is this: in the classical sources this block is identified as Uḥud, and this identification is widespread. I transmit it in language that plainly marks the uncertainty; I do not ascribe it word for word to any particular report.

غَدَوْتَ — root: غ-د-و

The root غ-د-و: the early hour of morning; and setting out at that hour. Ghadāt — morning. Ghuduww — the morning departure. And the opposite of the root is rawāḥ — the evening return.

And the choice of the verb must be recorded: the verse does not say "you set out", it says "you set out early in the morning". The hour is inside the verb.

مِنْ أَهْلِكَ — "from your family". And this note has been chosen for the opening of the block.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the block opens not with a scene of battle but with a leaving of the house. And two words stand together: ahl (family) and al-qitāl (fighting). In one sentence the nearest thing and the harshest thing stand side by side.

تُبَوِّئُ ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ مَقَٰعِدَ — root: ب-و-أ

The root ب-و-أ: to settle in a place, to lodge; and to settle someone in a place. Mubawwaʾ — the place one is settled in. Bāʾa — he returned, he came to a place.

And the same root occurred at 22/26 in al-Ḥajj: wa idh bawwaʾnā li-Ibrāhīma makāna'l-bayt — "when We assigned to Abraham the place of the House". I rely on that treatment.

PlaceVerbWhat is settled
al-Ḥajj 22/26Bawwaʾnā li-Ibrāhīma makāna'l-baytA place of worship
Āl ʿImrān 3/121Tubawwiʾu'l-muʾminīna maqāʿida li'l-qitālBattle posts

The same root, two different settlings. This is a fact verifiable within the series.

مَقَاعِد — the plural of maqʿad; root ق-ع-د: to sit. That is, "places to sit in" — posts.

I record this as an observation about the word: the place appointed for battle is named with a word from a root of staying still, not of movement. And as the block goes on this word will take on its sense — because what is described at verse 152 is exactly the abandoning of the place held.

أَن تَفْشَلَا — the first occurrence of the root

The root ف-ش-ل: to slacken, to come undone, to be unable to act for fear. The lexicographers explain the root as the coming undone of courage and strength; it is a state between fear and exhaustion.

And the root occurs twice in the sūra: here (an tafshalā) and at verse 152 (fashiltum).

VerseWordingMoodWhat it conveys
122Hammat ṭāʾifatāni minkum an tafshalāAn approachhamma: to be minded toIt did not happen
152Ḥattā idhā fashiltumAccomplishedIt happened

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and binds the two ends of the block. This link will be treated in detail below at verse 152.

And the end of verse 122 must be recorded: wa'llāhu waliyyuhumā. That is, about the two parties inclined to falter the verse does not pass a ruling of loss; it says that the protection continues.

I record this as an observation about the word order: while naming a failing, the sentence writes immediately afterwards that the bond has not broken. And this structure will be repeated throughout the sūra's Uḥud block — at 152 wa la-qad ʿafā ʿankum, at 155 wa la-qad ʿafa'llāhu ʿanhum.


3/123-127

وَلَقَدْ نَصَرَكُمُ ٱللَّهُ بِبَدْرٍ وَأَنتُمْ أَذِلَّةٌ

Wa la-qad naṣarakumu'llāhu bi-Badrin wa antum adhilla, fa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tashkurūn · Idh taqūlu li'l-muʾminīna a-lan yakfiyakum an yumiddakum rabbukum bi-thalāthati ālāfin mina'l-malāʾikati munzalīn · Balā in taṣbirū wa tattaqū wa yaʾtūkum min fawrihim hādhā yumdidkum rabbukum bi-khamsati ālāfin mina'l-malāʾikati musawwimīn · Wa mā jaʿalahu'llāhu illā bushrā lakum wa li-taṭmaʾinna qulūbukum bih, wa ma'n-naṣru illā min ʿindi'llāhi'l-ʿazīzi'l-ḥakīm · Li-yaqṭaʿa ṭarafan mina'lladhīna kafarū aw yakbitahum fa-yanqalibū khāʾibīn

"God helped you at Badr when you were weak; so guard yourselves before God, that you may be thankful. · When you were saying to the believers: 'Is it not enough for you that your Lord should reinforce you with three thousand angels sent down?' · Yes: if you are steadfast and guard yourselves, and they come upon you at once, your Lord will reinforce you with five thousand angels marked out. · God made this only as good news for you and so that your hearts might be set at rest by it. Help comes only from God, al-ʿAzīz and al-Ḥakīm."

A return to an earlier one: بِبَدْرٍ

And the block, in its second verse, turns back to an earlier one. In the sūra this is the second occurrence:

VerseExpressionWhat it does
13Qad kāna lakum āyatun fī fiʾatayni'ltaqatāUnnamed — "two companies that met"
123Naṣarakumu'llāhu bi-BadrNamed

Two occurrences, and the first is unnamed. This is a fact verifiable within the sūra.

وَأَنتُمْ أَذِلَّةٌ — "when you were weak". The root ذ-ل-ل was treated at verse 112 (al-dhilla). The same root in two separate places, eleven verses apart: one a ruling, the other a note of a state.

I record this as an observation: the reminder names not the victory but the condition in which the victory began. The weight of the sentence lies not in naṣarakum but in wa antum adhilla.

وَمَا ٱلنَّصْرُ إِلَّا مِنْ عِندِ ٱللَّهِ — the place of the note

And verse 126 comes immediately after the two verses in which the number of the angels is named, and it enters a note.

The word order of the note is this, and it has two steps:

StepWordingWhat it says
1Wa mā jaʿalahu'llāhu illā bushrā lakum wa li-taṭmaʾinna qulūbukumThe work of what was given: good news and being set at rest
2Wa ma'n-naṣru illā min ʿindi'llāhThe source of the help: not the number

And both sentences are built with illā — the pattern of restriction.

I record this as an observation about the word order: immediately after giving a number, the verse says that the number is not the cause. That is, the figure is given not as a reckoning of force but as a note about morale.

And the same note is at 8/10 in al-Anfāl as well (wa mā jaʿalahu'llāhu illā bushrā wa li-taṭmaʾinna bihī qulūbukum, wa ma'n-naṣru illā min ʿindi'llāh) and it is almost word for word the same. I rely on that treatment and record this correspondence between the two verses as a fact verifiable from the text.

Per the method (Method) I record this: no description whatever is entered in this section of how or in what form the angels were present. The verse gives the adjectives munzalīn (sent down) and musawwimīn (marked out) and says nothing else. This silence of the text is preserved. And there is disagreement over the sense of musawwimīn — as with al-khaylu'l-musawwama in verse 14, the root س-و-م conveys both to mark and to turn loose; I impose no preference.


3/128-129

لَيْسَ لَكَ مِنَ ٱلْأَمْرِ شَىْءٌ

Laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾun aw yatūba ʿalayhim aw yuʿadhdhibahum fa-innahum ẓālimūn · Wa li'llāhi mā fi's-samāwāti wa mā fi'l-arḍ, yaghfiru li-man yashāʾu wa yuʿadhdhibu man yashāʾ, wa'llāhu ghafūrun raḥīm

"Nothing of the matter falls to you: either He turns to them in mercy or He punishes them, for they are wrongdoers. · Whatever is in the heavens and the earth belongs to God; He forgives whom He wills and punishes whom He wills. God is much-forgiving, most merciful."


This verse is a link in the line of "the limit of responsibility" treated in many places in the series, and it is to be added to the table at 28/56 in al-Qaṣaṣ.

The sharpest expression of the limit

The table set up at 28/56 in al-Qaṣaṣ was this, and I rely on it:

PlaceExpressionWhat it limits
al-Aḥqāf 46/35BalāghThe task — it is to convey
al-Zumar 39/41Wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-wakīlResponsibility
Qāf 50/45Wa mā anta ʿalayhim bi-jabbārThe authority to compel
Fāṭir 35/8Fa-lā tadhhab nafsuka ʿalayhim ḥasarātGrief
Luqmān 31/23Fa-lā yaḥzunka kufruhGrief
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56Lā tahdī man aḥbabtaLove — the closest bond

And in this commentary I add this verse to the table:

PlaceExpressionWhat it limits
Āl ʿImrān 3/128Laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾunThe matter itself — no share at all in the outcome

And the difference of the added link must be recorded, because it stands apart from the others:

In the other six verses what is limited is a particular authority, a feeling or a task: giving guidance, being a trustee, compelling, grieving. Here, on the other hand, what is limited is al-amr — the matter itself. And the negation is made with the most general word: shayʾun — "nothing at all".

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the breadth of the word: the others were closing off a field; this verse leaves no field. Mina'l-amri shayʾun — "nothing of the matter".

The context of the sentence and a difficulty of word order

And the lexicographers differ over the syntactic analysis (iʿrāb) of the sentence, and the disagreement is not to be concealed. The difficulty is this: what is the expression aw yatūba ʿalayhim attached to?

ReadingThe attachmentSense
1Laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾun is an interposed clause; aw yatūba attaches to li-yaqṭaʿa in the preceding verse"Either He cuts off a part of them, or crushes them, or turns to them in mercy, or punishes them"
2Aw yatūba attaches directly to laysa laka"Nothing of this matter falls to you — neither the acceptance of their repentance nor their punishment"

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

But there is a conclusion common to both readings, and I record it: on either reading the deciding party is not the one addressed. And the continuation of the verse confirms it: yaghfiru li-man yashāʾu wa yuʿadhdhibu man yashāʾ (129).

The verse's place in the block

And where the verse is placed must be recorded, because it cannot be separated from its content.

VerseSubject
123-127Help — Badr, the angels, the good news
128Laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾun
130-136Ribā, spending, anger, pardon

That is, the sentence of the limit of responsibility has been placed immediately after the verses in which the help is described.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: in the place where the help is described, it is said once more that the one who asks for help and the one who gives it are distinct. And this is the note of verse 126 (wa ma'n-naṣru illā min ʿindi'llāh) seen from the human side. One states the source of the help, the other the owner of the decision.


3/130-132

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ لَا تَأْكُلُوا۟ ٱلرِّبَوٰٓا۟ أَضْعَٰفًا مُّضَٰعَفَةً

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā taʾkulu'r-ribā aḍʿāfan muḍāʿafatan wa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūn · Wa'ttaqu'n-nāra'llatī uʿiddat li'l-kāfirīn · Wa aṭīʿu'llāha wa'r-rasūla laʿallakum turḥamūn

"You who believe! Do not consume ribā, doubled and multiplied, and guard yourselves before God, that you may prosper. · Guard yourselves against the fire prepared for those who deny. · Obey God and the Messenger, that you may be shown mercy."

Relying on al-Baqara

Ribā was treated in detail at 2/275-281 in al-Baqara — the sense of the root, the definition of the transaction, its difference from trade, the drawing of the limit. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

Only two things are to be recorded here, and both are proper to this verse.

One. The length of the verse. In al-Baqara the subject runs for seven verses; here it is a single verse. And this is an instance of the principle recorded in the introduction to the sūra: Āl ʿImrān names what has been treated in al-Baqara in the form of a reminder.

Two. The note أَضْعَٰفًا مُّضَٰعَفَةً and the disagreement it gives rise to.

The root ض-ع-ف: a fold, a multiple. Ḍiʿf — the multiple of a thing. And the construction is a noun and an adjective from the same root: aḍʿāfan muḍāʿafatan — "multiplied multiples". The same form of emphasis was in verse 14 as well: al-qanāṭīru'l-muqanṭara. Two occurrences, in a single sūra.

And there is a divergence over the function of the construction in the ruling, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat aḍʿāfan muḍāʿafatan is
1A restrictive qualification (iḥtirāzī) — the prohibition is only for the form that is multiplied over and over
2A description of the actual state — it describes the common practice and does not narrow the ruling; al-Baqara 2/278-279 already sets the limit absolutely

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference and I issue no legal ruling. This is the same limit recorded in al-Baqara.

And I record an observation about the word order: the three verses end with three separate sentences of consequence — tufliḥūn (130), li'l-kāfirīn (131), turḥamūn (132). And tufliḥūn will come once more in the last verse of the sūra (200).

وَأَطِيعُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ وَٱلرَّسُولَ — root ط-و-ع. And the same command occurs twice in the sūra: at 32 and at 132. And at verse 152 its breach will be recorded: wa ʿaṣaytum. Command, command, breach — this is a weave verifiable within the sūra and was recorded in the table in the introduction.


3/133-136

وَسَارِعُوٓا۟ إِلَىٰ مَغْفِرَةٍ مِّن رَّبِّكُمْ · ٱلَّذِينَ يُنفِقُونَ فِى ٱلسَّرَّآءِ وَٱلضَّرَّآءِ وَٱلْكَٰظِمِينَ ٱلْغَيْظَ وَٱلْعَافِينَ عَنِ ٱلنَّاسِ

Wa sāriʿū ilā maghfiratin min rabbikum wa jannatin ʿarḍuha's-samāwātu wa'l-arḍu uʿiddat li'l-muttaqīn · Alladhīna yunfiqūna fi's-sarrāʾi wa'ḍ-ḍarrāʾi wa'l-kāẓimīna'l-ghayẓa wa'l-ʿāfīna ʿani'n-nās, wa'llāhu yuḥibbu'l-muḥsinīn · Wa'lladhīna idhā faʿalū fāḥishatan aw ẓalamū anfusahum dhakaru'llāha fa'staghfarū li-dhunūbihim wa man yaghfiru'dh-dhunūba illa'llāh, wa lam yuṣirrū ʿalā mā faʿalū wa hum yaʿlamūn

"Race towards forgiveness from your Lord and towards a garden whose breadth is the heavens and the earth, prepared for those who guard themselves. · They are those who spend in ease and in hardship, who swallow their anger and who pardon people. God loves those who do good. · And those who, when they commit an indecency or wrong themselves, remember God and ask forgiveness for their sins — and who forgives sins but God? — and who do not persist in what they did, knowing what it was."

وَسَارِعُوٓا۟ — the pattern of the root

The root س-ر-ع: speed. And the verb is in Form III (mufāʿala, sāraʿa): in Arabic this form conveys reciprocity and competition.

I record this as an observation about the word: the command means not "hurry" but "race". And racing requires the presence of another.

And the same root was used at verse 114 of a community from among the People of the Book: wa yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt. Two occurrences, the same form:

VerseWordingWhoMood
114Yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrātA community from among the People of the BookA statement — they do it
133Wa sāriʿū ilā maghfiratinThe community addressedA command

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: an act described as what others do is, nineteen verses later, commanded to the one addressed.

And the measure used in describing the garden must be recorded: ʿarḍuha's-samāwātu wa'l-arḍ — "its breadth is the heavens and the earth". And the word ʿarḍ (breadth) has been chosen; not ṭūl (length). The same measure is at 57/21 in al-Ḥadīd as well (ʿarḍuhā ka-ʿarḍi's-samāʾi wa'l-arḍ). Two sūras use the same measure.

3/134 — four attributes

#AttributeField
1Yunfiqūna fi's-sarrāʾi wa'ḍ-ḍarrāʾiWealth — in two opposite conditions
2Wa'l-kāẓimīna'l-ghayẓAnger — holding in
3Wa'l-ʿāfīna ʿani'n-nāsPardon — letting go
4Wa'llāhu yuḥibbu'l-muḥsinīnDoing good — the sentence that gives the ruling

And the word order of the first attribute must be recorded: fi's-sarrāʾi wa'ḍ-ḍarrāʾi — two opposite conditions. س-ر-ر (joy, ease) and ض-ر-ر (harm, hardship). The two words are on the same measure (faʿlāʾ) and are alike in sound as well. That is, by putting the two extremes into the same pattern the sentence makes spending independent of circumstance.

ٱلْكَٰظِمِينَ ٱلْغَيْظَ — root: ك-ظ-م

The root was analysed in detail at 68/48 in al-Qalam (makẓūm), tabulated by difference of pattern at 43/17-18 in al-Zukhruf, and treated at 12/84 in Yūsuf (kaẓīm) and at 40/18 in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) (kāẓimīn). I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them. A summary of what was recorded there:

The concrete sense of the root: kaẓama'l-qirba — he filled a waterskin and tied its mouth. That is, a vessel filled and stopped at the mouth. The pressure inside is there; but it cannot get out. The difference of pattern: makẓūm is a passive participle — stopped from outside; kaẓīm is the intensive on faʿīl — one who ties his own mouth shut.

And there are three notes belonging here.

One. The pattern here is kāẓim — an active participle. That is, the word conveys the one who is doing the work. Makẓūm is passive, kaẓīm is intensive; kāẓim is the one performing the act.

PatternPlaceWho
مَكْظُوم — passive participleal-Qalam 68/48Stopped from outside
كَظِيمfaʿīl (intensive)Yūsuf 12/84, al-Zukhruf 43/17One who stops his own inside
كَاظِم — active participleĀl ʿImrān 3/134, Ghāfir 40/18The one doing the holding in

Three patterns, one root — and this distinction was tabulated in al-Qalam and al-Zukhruf.

Two. And the object of the word is al-ghayẓ. It was recorded in al-Mulk: ghayẓ is swallowed anger. And at 68/48 in al-Qalam the tension between these two was dealt with honestly — in one place the Qurʾān praises the swallowing of anger (this verse), and in another a prophet "calling out while his anger was swallowed" is named as a negative example. I rely on the analysis there and do not repeat it.

Three. And the real note belonging here is the order in the list, and I give it as my own reading:

The second attribute is holding in (kāẓim); the third attribute is letting go (ʿāfī).

The root ع-ف-و: to wipe away, to leave no trace; and from this, to pardon. The lexicographers give as an instance the wind's wiping away a trace: ʿafati'r-rīḥu'l-athar.

AttributeThe operationWhere
KāẓimHolding in — not letting outInside
ʿĀfīWiping — leaving no recordInside

And the two verbs do not look in the same direction: one blocks the exit, the other does away with what is inside.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the picture of the two roots: holding anger in does not mean that the anger has ended — the skin is still full. Pardoning, on the other hand, empties what is full. The order is meaningful for this reason: first not letting it out, then not keeping it in.

And the note ʿani'n-nās: the pardon is opened to everyone, without its being said from whom. The same note of breadth is in the sūra as li'n-nās at verses 96 and 110 as well.

3/135 — not persisting

Wa lam yuṣirrū ʿalā mā faʿalū wa hum yaʿlamūn

The root ص-ر-ر: to bind oneself to a thing and keep at it, to hold tight. And the same root occurred at verse 117 as ṣirr (a searing cold) — and there too there was an idea of pressing in the root. Two occurrences, the same root, two different derivatives.

And the note itself must be recorded: the list sets no condition of sinlessness. The attribute is not not committing an indecency; it is not persisting after having committed one.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the conditional sentence begins with idhā faʿalū — "when they have done it". That is, the act is assumed to have taken place. The measure lies not in whether the event happens but in what is done after it.


3/137-138

قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِكُمْ سُنَنٌ فَسِيرُوا۟ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ

Qad khalat min qablikum sunanun fa-sīrū fi'l-arḍi fa'nẓurū kayfa kāna ʿāqibatu'l-mukadhdhibīn · Hādhā bayānun li'n-nāsi wa hudan wa mawʿiẓatun li'l-muttaqīn

"Ways have passed before you. So travel in the land and see what the end of the deniers was. · This is a clear statement for people, and a guidance and an admonition for those who guard themselves."

سُنَن — root: س-ن-ن

The root س-ن-ن: to make a thing flow evenly and continuously, to open a way. The lexicographers explain the root by continuous flow: sanna'l-māʾa — he made the water flow. Sinān — a spear-point (levelled by whetting). Sunna — a way opened and travelled.

And the word is here plural and indefinite: sunanun — "certain ways".

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence conveys not a single law but more than one way. And the verb is khalat — "have passed": it conveys what has been left behind.

And the form of the command must be recorded, and this is the verse's own distinctive side: fa-sīrū fi'l-arḍi fa'nẓurū.

VerbThe operation
SīrūTravel — the body
UnẓurūLook — the eye

Both commands are concrete. That is, the verse does not transmit a piece of knowledge; it gives a method: go and see.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the concreteness of the two verbs: the conclusion to be drawn is not stated. What is stated is where the conclusion is to be found. And that place is outside the text — in the land.

And this is what the verse says to the present: the past is set down not as a narrative handed on but as a field to be gone to and looked at. I record this as a point of view and do not force it: the work the verse commands is a method that coincides with the work done today by fields such as history and archaeology — going to the remains and drawing a conclusion from them. This is recorded not as a claim of a "miracle" but as a direct consequence of the wording of the verse.

هَٰذَا بَيَانٌ لِّلنَّاسِ وَهُدًى وَمَوْعِظَةٌ لِّلْمُتَّقِينَand the word order must be recorded: three words, two addressees.

WordTo whom
BayānLi'n-nāsto people
Hudan + mawʿiẓaLi'l-muttaqīnto those who guard themselves

That is, the clear statement to everyone; the guidance and the admonition to the one who profits by it. This has the same structure as the note hudan li'l-muttaqīn at 2/2 in al-Baqara, and I rely on that treatment.


3/139-141

وَلَا تَهِنُوا۟ وَلَا تَحْزَنُوا۟ وَأَنتُمُ ٱلْأَعْلَوْنَ إِن كُنتُم مُّؤْمِنِينَ

Wa lā tahinū wa lā taḥzanū wa antumu'l-aʿlawna in kuntum muʾminīn · In yamsaskum qarḥun fa-qad massa'l-qawma qarḥun mithluh, wa tilka'l-ayyāmu nudāwiluhā bayna'n-nās, wa li-yaʿlama'llāhu'lladhīna āmanū wa yattakhidha minkum shuhadāʾ, wa'llāhu lā yuḥibbu'ẓ-ẓālimīn · Wa li-yumaḥḥiṣa'llāhu'lladhīna āmanū wa yamḥaqa'l-kāfirīn

"Do not slacken and do not grieve: you are the higher, if you are believers. · If a wound has touched you, a like wound touched that people too. Those days We turn about among people — so that God may know those who believe and take witnesses from among you. God does not love the wrongdoers. · And so that God may refine those who believe and wear away those who deny."

و-ه-ن — on the basis of the series

The root و-ه-ن: the coming undone of strength, the failing of capacity. The root was treated at 31/14 in Luqmān (wahnan ʿalā wahn — the mother's labour of carrying), at 29/41 in al-ʿAnkabūt (awhanu'l-buyūt — the spider's house), at 8/18 in al-Anfāl (mūhinu kaydi'l-kāfirīn) and at 47/35 in Muḥammad (fa-lā tahinū). I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them.

And the root occurs twice in the sūra, and the relation of the two occurrences must be recorded:

VerseWordingMood
139Wa lā tahinūA prohibition — "do not slacken"
146Fa-mā wahanū limā aṣābahum fī sabīli'llāhA statement — "they did not slacken"

A prohibition and an instance, seven verses apart. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and was recorded in the table in the introduction.

I record this as an observation about the word order: having forbidden a thing, the sūra tells of those who kept to that prohibition. And in verse 146 three verbs are counted: mā wahanū, wa mā ḍaʿufū, wa ma'stakānū. That is, the prohibition is given with one word, the instance with three.

وَأَنتُمُ ٱلْأَعْلَوْنَ — the keeping of the limit

And this construction was treated at 47/35 in Muḥammad, and a limit was set there. I keep that limit here exactly.

I set the two verses side by side:

Muḥammad 47/35Āl ʿImrān 3/139
WordingFa-lā tahinū wa tadʿū ila's-salmi wa antumu'l-aʿlawnWa lā tahinū wa lā taḥzanū wa antumu'l-aʿlawn
The same rootو-ه-نو-ه-ن
The noteWa'llāhu maʿakumIn kuntum muʾminīn
ContextA moment of an offerAfter a defeat

And in both verses the construction does not stand alone: in one wa'llāhu maʿakum is added, in the other in kuntum muʾminīn.

Per the method (Method) I record this plainly and keep the limit set at 47/35 in Muḥammad:

One. The construction is qualified by a conditional clause: in kuntum muʾminīn. In Arabic the particle in conveys a condition. That is, the sentence does not convey an unconditional superiority.

Two. The construction stands in a context of consolation. The sentence comes after two prohibitions: do not slacken, do not grieve. That is, what is said is not a claim of superiority but a sentence of morale.

Three. And the very next verse says that this is not a permanent position: wa tilka'l-ayyāmu nudāwiluhā bayna'n-nās. That is, the construction blocks the drawing of a lasting superiority from it one verse later.

Four. In this commentary no claim of superiority for any community, people or state is drawn from this construction, and present-day politics is not entered.

وَتِلْكَ ٱلْأَيَّامُ نُدَاوِلُهَا بَيْنَ ٱلنَّاسِ — root: د-و-ل

And this is one of the most important concepts of the block and must be treated in detail.

The root د-و-ل. The root was analysed at 59/7 in al-Ḥashr (kay lā yakūna dūlatan bayna'l-aghniyāʾi minkum) and reference was made there to this verse. I rely on that treatment and take the description given there:

The original sense of the root is a thing's passing from hand to hand, coming round by turns, the turn changing. Dāla yadūlu: it came round, the turn changed. Mudāwala: to pass a thing round from hand to hand. And the word we use in Turkish today, devlet (state), is from this root; within the word there is an idea of taking turns. From the same root, in Turkish, tedavül — the circulation of money.

And I spell out what belongs here.

One. The form of the verb must be recorded: nudāwiluhā — from Form III (mufāʿala). This form conveys in Arabic reciprocity and doing by turns. Qātala — he fought back and forth. Sāraʿa — he raced. And dāwala — he turned about by turns.

That is, the pattern of the verb says the sense of the root a second time: both the root and the form convey taking turns.

Two. The object of the verb must be recorded: al-ayyām — "the days".

In Arabic the word ayyām conveys not only calendar days but also the events a people has been through. And this usage is old in the Arabic language. That is, what is turned about is not time but states.

Three. And the subject of the verb must be recorded: nudāwilu — first person plural, that is, God. The turning about is not tied to a chance or to a law of nature.

Four. And the field of the circulation must be recorded: bayna'n-nās — "among people".

This note is the widest word of the verse. The sentence does not say "between the two sides" or "between you and them".

Now I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding; its ground is the picture of the root and of the form:

The concrete picture of the root is a passing from hand to hand — an object's not staying in one hand. And the verse uses this picture for superiority. That is, superiority is named not as a possession but as something that passes from hand to hand.

And this has two consequences, and both are in the verse's own context:

ConsequenceWhom it looks toIts ground in the verse
For the defeatedThis state is not permanentNudāwiluhā — the turn comes round
For the victorThis state is not your propertyBayna'n-nās — among everyone

And the verse gives both consequences at once; it does not choose one.

And the placing of the sentence in the middle of an account of defeat is a fact of word order: the preceding sentence says that the wound was mutual (fa-qad massa'l-qawma qarḥun mithluh), and the sentences after it count the purpose of the testing. That is, the note of "taking turns" stands between the consolation and the purpose.

قَرْح — root ق-ر-ح: a wound. The word is read in the variant readings both as qarḥ and as qurḥ; the lexicographers distinguish one as the wound itself and the other as the pain of the wound, and some count them synonymous. I record the disagreement, impose no preference, and give no reciter's name.

يُمَحِّصَ / يَمْحَقَ — two verbs

The root م-ح-ص: to pick a thing clean of its dross, to purify. The lexicographers give as an instance the refining of gold in fire.

The root م-ح-ق: to destroy by diminishing, to efface. And the same root occurred at 2/276 in al-Baqara: yamḥaqu'llāhu'r-ribā. Two occurrences, the same verb.

And the setting of the two verbs side by side must be recorded:

VerbThe operationTo whom
YumaḥḥiṣRefining — separating out what is foreign withinTo those who believe
YamḥaqWearing away — finishing by diminishingTo those who deny

Both verbs convey a diminishing; but one purifies and the other consumes. I record this as an observation about the words: the same operation (taking away) gives two different outcomes.


3/142-143

أَمْ حَسِبْتُمْ أَن تَدْخُلُوا۟ ٱلْجَنَّةَ وَلَمَّا يَعْلَمِ ٱللَّهُ ٱلَّذِينَ جَٰهَدُوا۟ مِنكُمْ

Am ḥasibtum an tadkhulu'l-jannata wa lammā yaʿlami'llāhu'lladhīna jāhadū minkum wa yaʿlama'ṣ-ṣābirīn · Wa la-qad kuntum tamannawna'l-mawta min qabli an talqawhu fa-qad raʾaytumūhu wa antum tanẓurūn

"Or did you suppose that you would enter the garden before God had marked out those of you who strive and those who are steadfast? · You were indeed wishing for death before you met it. Now you have seen it — and you were looking on."

حَسِبْتُمْ — the line of the root in the sūra

The root ح-س-ب occurs six times in the sūra, and four of the occurrences were recorded in the table in the introduction (169, 178, 180, 188). Two further occurrences must be added here: 78 (li-taḥsabūhu) and 142 (am ḥasibtum).

VerseWordingWho supposes
78Li-taḥsabūhu mina'l-kitābThe one addressed — another makes him suppose
142Am ḥasibtum an tadkhulu'l-jannataThe one addressed — he supposes it himself
169Wa lā taḥsabanna'lladhīna qutilū… amwātāThe one addressed — a false supposition is forbidden
178Wa lā yaḥsabanna'lladhīna kafarūThe other side
180Wa lā yaḥsabanna'lladhīna yabkhalūnThe miserly
188taḥsabanna'lladhīna yafraḥūnThe one addressed — about others

Six occurrences, in a single sūra. This is a fact verifiable within the sūra and is the completed form of the table in the introduction.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the sūra uses one verb of "supposing" in six separate places, and each time it corrects a false reckoning. And all the reckonings corrected are of the same kind: drawing a conclusion from what is seen.

وَلَمَّا يَعْلَمِ ٱللَّهُ — the sense of the verb of knowing

There is a difficulty in the sentence, and the classical sources take it up: does an event have to occur for God to know?

ReadingHow yaʿlam is understood
1The coming to pass of the knowledge in fact — that is, the realising of what the knowledge requires
2In the sense of marking out — the knowledge is already there, the separating comes about
3Making visible — the knowledge comes out for others

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

But one datum of the text can be recorded: in the same sūra verse 179 devotes a sentence directly to this question — mā kāna'llāhu li-yadhara'l-muʾminīna ʿalā mā antum ʿalayhi ḥattā yamīza'l-khabītha mina'ṭ-ṭayyib. And the verb used there is yamīza: to separate. That is, the sūra supplies its own word. This is a link verifiable within the sūra.

3/143 — what was wished for and what was seen

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: fa-qad raʾaytumūhu wa antum tanẓurūn.

Both verbs convey seeing, but they are not the same:

VerbRootWhat it conveys
Raʾaytumūhuر-أ-يYou saw — a seeing accomplished
Tanẓurūnن-ظ-رYou were looking — a looking still going on

The lexicographers distinguish the two: naẓar is looking, ruʾya is seeing. A person may look and not see.

And the verse uses both at once. I record this as an observation about the words: the sentence says "you saw" and adds to it "you were looking". Two verbs together set up a record of witnessing that leaves no excuse.


3/144

وَمَا مُحَمَّدٌ إِلَّا رَسُولٌ قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِهِ ٱلرُّسُلُ

Wa mā Muḥammadun illā rasūlun qad khalat min qablihi'r-rusul, a-fa-in māta aw qutila'nqalabtum ʿalā aʿqābikum, wa man yanqalib ʿalā ʿaqibayhi fa-lan yaḍurra'llāha shayʾā, wa sa-yajzi'llāhu'sh-shākirīn

"Muḥammad is only a messenger; messengers have passed away before him. If then he dies or is killed, will you turn back on your heels? Whoever turns back on his heels does God no harm at all. God will reward the thankful."


This verse will be treated in detail. The reason is this: it is the only verse in the sūra in which the Prophet's name occurs, and that name occurs inside a sentence of limit.

Where the name occurs

The name Muḥammad occurs in four places in the Qurʾān. And the sole occurrence in this sūra is here.

And the pattern of the sentence must be recorded: mā … illā — negation and exception, that is, ḥaṣr. This pattern was used at verse 65 as well (wa mā unzilati't-Tawrātu wa'l-Injīlu illā min baʿdih). Two occurrences, at two different pieces of work; and both set up a limitation.

I record this as an observation about the word order: immediately after naming the name, the sentence uses a particle of limitation. Mā Muḥammadun illā rasūl — "only a messenger". And rasūlun is indefinite: "a messenger", not the messenger.

قَدْ خَلَتْ مِن قَبْلِهِ ٱلرُّسُلُ — a qualifying clause

And the qualifier of the indefinite is a clause: qad khalat min qablihi'r-rusul — "messengers have passed away before him".

The root خ-ل-و: to pass away, to become empty. And the same verb had occurred seven verses earlier in the sūra: qad khalat min qablikum sunan (137). Two occurrences, the same verb:

VerseWhat has passed away
137Sunanun — ways, laws
144Al-rusul — the messengers

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the sūra uses the same verb twice, and in both it says that an ongoing order has been at work before as well. One for events, the other for persons.

أَفَإِي۟ن مَّاتَ أَوْ قُتِلَ — the counting of two possibilities together

And the sentence names two possibilities at once: māta aw qutila — "if he dies or is killed".

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence does not report an event; it sets up a condition. And the condition has two branches. And both are tied to the same consequence — that is, the distinction does not change the answer given.

And the same pair will occur twice more in the sūra: wa la-in qutiltum fī sabīli'llāhi aw muttum (157) and wa la-in muttum aw qutiltum (158). Three occurrences, and in the last two the order is reversed. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

ٱنقَلَبْتُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ — the description itself

The root ق-ل-ب: to turn, to turn upside down. The root ع-ق-ب: heel; and from this, the one who comes after.

And the description is concrete and was treated at 2/143 in al-Baqara (man yanqalibu ʿalā ʿaqibayh) and this was recorded there:

"A concrete picture: a person walking turns first on his heel in order to turn back. The expression conveys a change of direction by a movement of the body."

I rely on that treatment. And I compare the two verses:

al-Baqara 2/143Āl ʿImrān 3/144
ContextThe change of the qiblaThe possibility of the messenger's death
Attachment to what is testedHabit or the commandThe person or the message
MoodMan yanqalibuthird person, a statementInqalabtumsecond person plural, a question

And the two verses use the same description in two different testings. I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the comparison of the two contexts: in both places the question asked is the same — is what one is attached to the means or the thing itself? In al-Baqara the means is a direction, here a person.

The work the verse does

And now I record what the verse does as a whole.

The verse does three things in succession:

StepWordingIts work
1Mā Muḥammadun illā rasūlIt defines the position — a messenger
2Qad khalat min qablihi'r-rusulIt says that he is not unique
3A-fa-in māta aw qutila'nqalabtumIt asks where the attachment has been set

And the third step is in the interrogative — not a ruling. That is, the verse makes no accusation; it voices a possibility and puts it to the one addressed.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the distinction the verse sets up is between the messenger and the one who sends. A messenger is temporary — messengers passed away before him too. And the validity of a message cannot be tied to the lifetime of the one who brings it.

And the last half of the sentence completes this: fa-lan yaḍurra'llāha shayʾā — "he does God no harm at all." That is, the turning back of the one who turns back affects not the message but himself.

The same note will come twice more in the sūra: lā yaḍurrūna'llāha shayʾā (176) and lan yaḍurrū'llāha shayʾā (177). Three occurrences, in a single sūra. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

Per the method (Method) I record this: I transmit no report about the event and the words said in connection with this verse as related in the sources, and I give no personal names. The only thing that can be recorded is this: the classical sources place this verse in the context of Uḥud, and this identification is widespread. The verse itself gives no event and no personal name, and this silence is preserved.

What this says to the present

The distinction the verse sets up is one that works in every age: the tying of an idea or a work to the person who carries it.

When a work is built on one person, the work goes when that person goes. The verse's question (a-fa-in māta… inqalabtum) probes exactly this point.

And the measure the verse gives does not belittle a person. What it says is that the messenger is a messenger — that is, that what he brought is greater than himself. This is a sentence that does not devalue the carrier; it puts what is carried first.


3/145-148

وَمَا كَانَ لِنَفْسٍ أَن تَمُوتَ إِلَّا بِإِذْنِ ٱللَّهِ كِتَٰبًا مُّؤَجَّلًا

Wa mā kāna li-nafsin an tamūta illā bi-idhni'llāhi kitāban muʾajjalā, wa man yurid thawāba'd-dunyā nuʾtihī minhā wa man yurid thawāba'l-ākhirati nuʾtihī minhā, wa sa-najzi'sh-shākirīn · Wa ka-ayyin min nabiyyin qātala maʿahū ribbiyyūna kathīrun fa-mā wahanū limā aṣābahum fī sabīli'llāhi wa mā ḍaʿufū wa ma'stakānū, wa'llāhu yuḥibbu'ṣ-ṣābirīn · Wa mā kāna qawlahum illā an qālū rabbana'ghfir lanā dhunūbanā wa isrāfanā fī amrinā wa thabbit aqdāmanā wa'nṣurnā ʿala'l-qawmi'l-kāfirīn · Fa-ātāhumu'llāhu thawāba'd-dunyā wa ḥusna thawābi'l-ākhira, wa'llāhu yuḥibbu'l-muḥsinīn

"No soul dies except by God's leave: it is a writ whose term is set. Whoever wants the reward of this world, We give him of it; whoever wants the reward of the hereafter, We give him of it. And We shall reward the thankful. · How many a prophet has fought, and with him many rabbānīs; they did not slacken at what befell them in the way of God, nor did they weaken, nor did they submit. God loves the steadfast. · Their only word was: 'Our Lord! Forgive us our sins and our excess in our affair, make our feet firm, and help us against the people who deny.' · So God gave them the reward of this world and the good reward of the hereafter. God loves those who do good."

كِتَٰبًا مُّؤَجَّلًا — the work of two words

ك-ت-ب — a writ. أ-ج-ل — with a term set. And the construction: "a writ whose term is set".

I record this as an observation about the word order, and its being placed inside a block about a defeat is significant: the sentence says that death is not tied to battle. And this is the first form of a note that will be repeated at verses 156 and 168 — there the saying "had they been with us they would not have died" will be transmitted and refuted.

3/146 — three verbs

Fa-mā wahanū… wa mā ḍaʿufū… wa ma'stakānū

VerbRootWhat it conveys
Wahanūو-ه-نThe coming undone of strength — the counterpart of the prohibition at 139
Ḍaʿufūض-ع-فWeakening
Istakānūس-ك-نSubmitting, cowering — the picture of the root is stillness

All three verbs are negated. And the field of the three differs: the first is capacity, the second strength, the third bearing.

I record this as an observation about the words: the list moves from inside outward — first the coming undone within, then the weakness in the body, then the submission shown outwardly.

And the root of the verb istakānū is س-ك-ن, the same root as maskana in verse 112. Two occurrences, the same root: one in a ruling, the other in a negation.

رِبِّيُّون — there is disagreement over the reading and the sense of the word, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat ribbiyyūn is
1From the root ر-ب-ب — those attached to the Lord; close to the rabbāniyyīn of verse 79
2Numerous companiesribba: a large company
3Scholars, those who know

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The word is also read with different vowels in the variant readings; I give no reciter's name.

3/147 — the structure of the prayer

And the word order of the prayer must be recorded, because its sequence is striking:

#RequestField
1Ighfir lanā dhunūbanāSin
2Wa isrāfanā fī amrināExcess in the affair
3Wa thabbit aqdāmanāSteadfastness
4Wa'nṣurnā ʿala'l-qawmi'l-kāfirīnHelp

And the real note is this: the prayer does not begin by asking for help. Help is fourth in order.

The first two requests concern their own failings. And the second must be recorded separately: isrāfanā fī amrinā — "our excess in our affair".

The root س-ر-ف: to overstep the bound, to lose the measure. And the note is fī amrinā — that is, not in worship but in the affair.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the prayer: the prayer names its own share before asking for help from outside. And this coincides with the axis recorded in the introduction to the sūra — in three separate places (7, 152, 165) the sūra asked that a person see his own share. This prayer is that share spoken in the person's own mouth.

And fa-ātāhumu'llāhu thawāba'd-dunyā wa ḥusna thawābi'l-ākhira (148) — the answer gives both of the two choices counted at verse 145 at once. That is, the two recompenses counted separately at 145 are given together at 148. This is a link verifiable from the text.


3/149-151

إِن تُطِيعُوا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ يَرُدُّوكُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū in tuṭīʿu'lladhīna kafarū yaruddūkum ʿalā aʿqābikum fa-tanqalibū khāsirīn · Bali'llāhu mawlākum wa huwa khayru'n-nāṣirīn · Sa-nulqī fī qulūbi'lladhīna kafaru'r-ruʿba bimā ashrakū bi'llāhi mā lam yunazzil bihī sulṭānā, wa maʾwāhumu'n-nār, wa biʾsa mathwa'ẓ-ẓālimīn

"You who believe! If you obey those who deny, they will turn you back on your heels; then you will turn back as losers. · No: God is your patron, and He is the best of helpers. · We shall cast terror into the hearts of those who deny — because they associated with God what He sent down no warrant for."

أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ — the third occurrence in five verses

And the description of aʿqāb occurs three times at short intervals in the sūra:

VerseWordingThe cause
144Inqalabtum ʿalā aʿqābikumThe possibility of the messenger's going
144Wa man yanqalib ʿalā ʿaqibayhA general ruling
149Yaruddūkum ʿalā aʿqābikumObeying another

Three occurrences, within six verses. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

And the difference must be recorded: at 144 the one who turns back turns of himself; at 149 another turns him back (yaruddūkum). The same movement, two different agents.

And the same structure was at verse 100: yaruddūkum baʿda īmānikum kāfirīn — there the subject was a group from among the People of the Book, here those who deny. Two verses use the same verb with two different subjects. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

بَلِ ٱللَّهُ مَوْلَىٰكُمْthe particle bal leaves the preceding sentence and puts another in its place. And the word mawlā is from the root و-ل-ي — at verse 68 it occurred as waliyyu'l-muʾminīn. Two occurrences, the same root.


3/152-153

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا فَشِلْتُمْ وَتَنَٰزَعْتُمْ فِى ٱلْأَمْرِ وَعَصَيْتُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ مَآ أَرَىٰكُم مَّا تُحِبُّونَ

Wa la-qad ṣadaqakumu'llāhu waʿdahū idh taḥussūnahum bi-idhnihī ḥattā idhā fashiltum wa tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amri wa ʿaṣaytum min baʿdi mā arākum mā tuḥibbūn, minkum man yurīdu'd-dunyā wa minkum man yurīdu'l-ākhira, thumma ṣarafakum ʿanhum li-yabtaliyakum, wa la-qad ʿafā ʿankum, wa'llāhu dhū faḍlin ʿala'l-muʾminīn · Idh tuṣʿidūna wa lā talwūna ʿalā aḥadin wa'r-rasūlu yadʿūkum fī ukhrākum fa-athābakum ghamman bi-ghammin li-kaylā taḥzanū ʿalā mā fātakum wa lā mā aṣābakum, wa'llāhu khabīrun bimā taʿmalūn

"God had indeed made good His promise to you: by His leave you were cutting them down. Until you slackened, and quarrelled over the affair, and disobeyed after He had shown you what you love. Among you were those who wanted this world and those who wanted the hereafter. Then He turned you away from them, to test you; and He has indeed pardoned you. God is bountiful to the believers. · When you were climbing away, turning back for no one, while the messenger was calling you from behind you. So He repaid you with grief upon grief — that you might not sorrow over what you had missed nor over what befell you. God is aware of what you do."


This verse is the second of the three sentences recorded in the introduction as the axis of the sūra, and it carries the densest textual data in the block. It will be treated in detail.

Three verbs, in one sentence

At the centre of the verse stand three verbs, and all three are in the second person plural:

#VerbRootWhat
1Fashiltumف-ش-لYou slackened
2Tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amrن-ز-عYou quarrelled
3ʿAṣaytumع-ص-يYou disobeyed

And the subject of all three is the one addressed. This was recorded in the introduction to the sūra.

A comparison with 8/46 — one of the strongest textual data of the sūra

At 8/45-47 in al-Anfāl this chain was treated, and I rely on it:

Wa lā tanāzaʿū fa-tafshalū wa tadhhaba rīḥukum "Do not quarrel with one another; or you will slacken and your wind will go." And the chain was recorded there: tanāzuʿ (quarrelling) → fashal (slackening) → dhahābu'r-rīḥ (the going of strength). Three steps, in one sentence.

And now I set the two verses side by side. This is a datum verifiable from the text and must be given in a table:

al-Anfāl 8/46Āl ʿImrān 3/152
MoodA prohibitionlā tanāzaʿūA statementtanāzaʿtum
TimeFuture — before it happensPast — after it has happened
ن-ز-عTanāzaʿūforbiddenTanāzaʿtumcome to pass
ف-ش-لTafshalū — warned of as a consequenceFashiltumcome to pass
OrderQuarrelling first, slackening afterSlackening first, quarrelling after
The third elementWa tadhhaba rīḥukum — the going of strengthWa ʿaṣaytum — disobeying
The closing sentenceWa'ṣbirū inna'llāha maʿa'ṣ-ṣābirīnWa la-qad ʿafā ʿankum

I draw four observations from the table, and all four can be verified from the two texts.

One. The two verses use the same two roots: ن-ز-ع and ف-ش-ل. And the places in the Qurʾān where these two roots stand together are few. In al-Anfāl in the imperative mood, in Āl ʿImrān as an accomplished fact.

Two. Al-Anfāl is a warning; Āl ʿImrān is a record. One says "if you do this, that will happen"; the other says "you did this".

Three. The order is reversed in the two verses, and this must be recorded. In al-Anfāl the quarrelling is the cause and the slackening the consequence (lā tanāzaʿū fa-tafshalū — the fāʾ conveys consequence). In Āl ʿImrān, on the other hand, slackening is counted first and quarrelling after.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the two orders do not conflict. Al-Anfāl sets up a rule — quarrelling leads to slackening. Āl ʿImrān tells of an event, and in the event the two happened together. The sequence of a rule and the sequence of an event need not be the same.

Four. And the most important difference is at the end. Al-Anfāl ends with a command: wa'ṣbirū. Āl ʿImrān, by contrast, ends with a sentence of pardon: wa la-qad ʿafā ʿankum.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the close of the two verses: a command is put at the end of a warning, because there is still something to be done. A pardon is put at the end of a record, because what has been done cannot be taken back.

And this is a structure repeated throughout the sūra's Uḥud block, and it is seen in three places:

VerseThe failing recordedImmediately after
122Hammat ṭāʾifatāni minkum an tafshalāWa'llāhu waliyyuhumā
152Fashiltum wa tanāzaʿtum wa ʿaṣaytumWa la-qad ʿafā ʿankum
155Alladhīna tawallaw minkumWa la-qad ʿafa'llāhu ʿanhum

Three occurrences, in a single block. This is a weave verifiable within the sūra.

فِى ٱلْأَمْرِ — the subject of the quarrel

And the subject of the quarrel is named: fi'l-amr — "over the affair".

And the word al-amr occurs four times in this block, and each time at a different piece of work:

VerseWordingWhat
128Laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾThe affair — the decision
152Wa tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amrThe affair — the subject of the quarrel
154Hal lanā mina'l-amri min shayʾThe affair — as a question
154Qul inna'l-amra kullahū li'llāhThe affair — the answer
159Wa shāwirhum fi'l-amrThe affair — the subject of consultation

Five occurrences, within thirty-two verses. This is a fact verifiable within the sūra.

And I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the same word conveys three separate things in the block — the affair quarrelled over, the owner of the decision, and the affair to be consulted about. And the block sets these in an order: the affair was quarrelled over (152), it was asked and answered whose the affair is (154), and consultation about the affair was commanded (159).

مِن بَعْدِ مَآ أَرَىٰكُم مَّا تُحِبُّونَ

And the pattern of the note is familiar: min baʿdi mā… — for the fourth time in the sūra.

VerseMin baʿdi mā — after what
19Jāʾahumu'l-ʿilm
61Jāʾaka mina'l-ʿilm
105Jāʾahumu'l-bayyināt
152Arākum mā tuḥibbūn

And the fourth stands apart from the others: what comes here is not a knowledge or a proof but the realising of what was wanted.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the four occurrences of the pattern: the sūra uses the same pattern both for the coming of knowledge and for the meeting of a wish. And after both the same thing happens: a breaking down. That is, the sūra says with the same pattern that both knowledge and success are a testing.

مِنكُم مَّن يُرِيدُ ٱلدُّنْيَا وَمِنكُم مَّن يُرِيدُ ٱلْءَاخِرَةَ

And the division is set up this time within the community itself. And the particle is again min.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and it is the sūra's method: the sūra had divided the People of the Book with min (69, 72, 75, 78, 100, 113, 199); now it divides those it addresses with the same particle.

And this is the textual ground of the rule this commentary has kept throughout the sūra: the division is not a measure applied to outsiders; it is a measure the text applies to every community.

3/153 — the scene of the flight

Idh tuṣʿidūna wa lā talwūna ʿalā aḥadin wa'r-rasūlu yadʿūkumukhrākum

Verb / wordRootWhat it conveys
Tuṣʿidūnص-ع-دTo go up — to climb the slope
Lā talwūna ʿalā aḥadل-و-يTurning to look at no one
Yadʿūkumد-ع-وCalling
Ukhrākumأ-خ-رYour rear — the hindmost

And the root ل-و-ي must be recorded: the root occurred at verse 78 (yalwūna alsinatahum). Two occurrences, the same root, two different pieces of work:

VerseWordingWhat is twisted
78Yalwūna alsinatahum bi'l-kitābThe tongue — bending the recitation
153Wa lā talwūna ʿalā aḥadThe neck — turning to look back

The concrete sense of the root is at work in both: to twist, to turn. In one the tongue is twisted, in the other the neck is not turned. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

غَمًّۢا بِغَمٍّ — root غ-م-م: to cover, to overspread. Ghamām — cloud (what covers the sky). And ghamm is the grief that covers a person's inside.

And the construction sets two griefs one upon the other: ghamman bi-ghamm. And there is disagreement over its syntax, and it is not to be concealed:

ReadingHow ghamman bi-ghamm is taken
1Grief upon grief — two griefs one after the other
2A grief in return for a grief — the bāʾ conveys requital
3The grief's making the earlier grief forgotten

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the ground of the sentence must be recorded: li-kaylā taḥzanū ʿalā mā fātakum wa lā mā aṣābakum — "that you might not sorrow over what you missed nor over what befell you".

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence separates two distinct sorrows — over what was not obtained and over what came upon them. And both are grammatically negated.


3/154-155

ثُمَّ أَنزَلَ عَلَيْكُم مِّنۢ بَعْدِ ٱلْغَمِّ أَمَنَةً نُّعَاسًا

Thumma anzala ʿalaykum min baʿdi'l-ghammi amanatan nuʿāsan yaghshā ṭāʾifatan minkum, wa ṭāʾifatun qad ahammat'hum anfusuhum yaẓunnūna bi'llāhi ghayra'l-ḥaqqi ẓanna'l-jāhiliyya, yaqūlūna hal lanā mina'l-amri min shayʾ, qul inna'l-amra kullahū li'llāh… · Inna'lladhīna tawallaw minkum yawma'ltaqa'l-jamʿāni innama'stazallahumu'sh-shayṭānu bi-baʿḍi mā kasabū, wa la-qad ʿafa'llāhu ʿanhum, inna'llāha ghafūrun ḥalīm

"Then, after the grief, He sent down upon you a security, a drowsiness that overcame a party of you. Another party had been made anxious by their own selves: they thought of God what is not the truth, the thought of the age of ignorance. 'Have we any part in this affair?' they were saying. Say: 'The affair belongs entirely to God.' … · As for those of you who turned away on the day the two hosts met, Satan sought to make them slip because of some of what they had earned. And God has indeed pardoned them. God is much-forgiving, most forbearing."

أَمَنَةً نُّعَاسًا — the setting of two words side by side

أ-م-ن — security. ن-ع-س — light sleep, drowsiness.

And the word order must be recorded: amanatan first, nuʿāsan after. The second is the explanation of the first (an appositive substitute). That is, what was sent down is "security", and the visible form of that security is a drowsiness.

I record this as an observation: the sentence tells an inward state by a sign visible in the body. Fear drives sleep away; the verse counts the coming of sleep as the mark of security.

And the same event is told at 8/11 in al-Anfāl as well (idh yughashshīkumu'n-nuʿāsa amanatan minh) and there the order of the words is reversed: nuʿās first, amana after. The two sūras use the same two words in reverse order. This is a fact verifiable from the text.

ظَنَّ ٱلْجَٰهِلِيَّةِ — the construction itself

The root ج-ه-ل: not to know; and for the lexicographers also to act in anger, without measure. That is, the opposite of the root is not only ʿilm but also ḥilm.

And the construction occurs rarely in the Qurʾān. And its use here is of a thought: ẓanna'l-jāhiliyya.

I record this as an observation about the word: the construction is used not as the name of a period but as the name of a way of thinking. And what it is about is stated in the verse: yaẓunnūna bi'llāhi ghayra'l-ḥaqq — about God.

هَلْ لَّنَا مِنَ ٱلْأَمْرِ مِن شَىْءٍ — question and answer

And the wording of the question and the answer must be recorded, because they are built with the same words:

Wording
The questionHal lanā mina'l-amri min shayʾ
The answerQul inna'l-amra kullahū li'llāh

And the same construction (mina'l-amri… shayʾ) had occurred twenty-six verses earlier, at verse 128: laysa laka mina'l-amri shayʾun.

Two occurrences, the same construction, two different addressees:

VerseTo whom it is saidMood
128To the ProphetA declaration
154To those who ask — as an answerQuestion and answer

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the same limit is said first to the person in the highest position, then to those who ask. That is, the answer rests not on who the questioner is but on no one's having any part in it.


3/156-158

لَا تَكُونُوا۟ كَٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَقَالُوا۟ لِإِخْوَٰنِهِمْ … لَّوْ كَانُوا۟ عِندَنَا مَا مَاتُوا۟ وَمَا قُتِلُوا۟

Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanū lā takūnū ka'lladhīna kafarū wa qālū li-ikhwānihim idhā ḍarabū fi'l-arḍi aw kānū ghuzzan law kānū ʿindanā mā mātū wa mā qutilū, li-yajʿala'llāhu dhālika ḥasratan fī qulūbihim, wa'llāhu yuḥyī wa yumīt, wa'llāhu bimā taʿmalūna baṣīr · Wa la-in qutiltum fī sabīli'llāhi aw muttum la-maghfiratun mina'llāhi wa raḥmatun khayrun mimmā yajmaʿūn · Wa la-in muttum aw qutiltum la-ila'llāhi tuḥsharūn

"You who believe! Do not be like those who deny and who say of their brothers who travelled in the land or went out to fight: 'Had they been with us they would not have died and would not have been killed' — that God may make this a regret in their hearts. It is God who gives life and gives death… · If you are killed in the way of God, or die, a forgiveness and a mercy from God are better than all they gather. · Whether you die or are killed, it is to God that you will be gathered."

The logic of the saying and its refutation

Law kānū ʿindanā mā mātū wa mā qutilū — "had they been with us they would not have died and would not have been killed".

And the saying binds two things together: the place one is in, and death.

And its refutation is inside the verse, and it has two steps:

StepWordingWhat it does
1Li-yajʿala'llāhu dhālika ḥasratan fī qulūbihimWhat the saying does to them
2Wa'llāhu yuḥyī wa yumītTo whom death belongs

And the first step is striking. I record this as an observation about the word order: the verse does not first refute the saying logically; it says what it does to the one who says it. Ḥasra — the burning felt over what has been missed. That is, the sentence of "if only" produces a burning instead of giving consolation.

And its logical refutation had already been set up at verse 145: wa mā kāna li-nafsin an tamūta illā bi-idhni'llāhi kitāban muʾajjalā. Two verses, eleven verses apart, take up the same matter from two directions: one the rule, the other the outcome of the saying.

And the same saying will come once more at verse 168, in another mouth: law aṭāʿūnā mā qutilū. Two occurrences, in a single block. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

157-158: the reversal of the order

VerseOrder
157Qutiltum aw muttumbeing killed first
158Muttum aw qutiltumdying first

And the ends of the two verses differ as well:

VerseThe closeWhat it conveys
157La-maghfiratun mina'llāhi wa raḥmatun khayrun mimmā yajmaʿūnA comparison — with what is gathered
158La-ila'llāhi tuḥsharūnAn arrival — where to

I record this as an observation about the word order: the two verses give the same two verbs in reverse order, and one states the recompense, the other the destination. And the reversed order shows that the two sentences are not the same as each other.


3/159

فَبِمَا رَحْمَةٍ مِّنَ ٱللَّهِ لِنتَ لَهُمْ وَلَوْ كُنتَ فَظًّا غَلِيظَ ٱلْقَلْبِ لَٱنفَضُّوا۟ مِنْ حَوْلِكَ

Fa-bimā raḥmatin mina'llāhi linta lahum, wa law kunta faẓẓan ghalīẓa'l-qalbi la'nfaḍḍū min ḥawlik, fa'fu ʿanhum wa'staghfir lahum wa shāwirhum fi'l-amr, fa-idhā ʿazamta fa-tawakkal ʿala'llāh, inna'llāha yuḥibbu'l-mutawakkilīn

"By a mercy from God you were gentle with them. Had you been harsh and hard of heart, they would have scattered from around you. So pardon them, ask forgiveness for them, and consult them in the affair. And when you have decided, rely on God; God loves those who rely on Him."


This verse will be treated in detail. The reason is this: immediately after an account of a defeat and a disobedience, it is a verse that tells the one it addresses to pardon, to ask forgiveness and to consult. And it is the only place where the command to consult occurs.

فَبِمَا رَحْمَةٍ — the opening of the sentence

And the lexicographers differ over the in the opening, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat is
1Redundant — for emphasis; "by a mercy from God"
2An indefinite qualified noun — "by such a mercy that…"

Both are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And a fact of word order must be recorded: the sentence ties the gentleness first to its cause. Fa-bimā raḥmatin mina'llāh — the cause stands at the head of the sentence; linta lahum comes after. That is, the source is stated before the quality itself is named.

لِنتَ — root: ل-ي-ن

The root ل-ي-ن: softness. Layyin — soft. And the lexicographers tie the concrete sense of the root to the sense of touch: not hard, soft to the hand.

فَظًّا غَلِيظَ ٱلْقَلْبِ — the two words taken apart

And the two words must be taken separately, because they do not say the same thing.

فَظّ — root ف-ظ-ظ. The lexicographers explain the word as coarse, harsh, rebuffing, and for the concrete sense of the root they transmit a striking usage: faẓẓ — the water in a camel's rumen. The water a traveller left without water drinks after slaughtering the camel — foul to the mouth, repellent. From this an idea of repulsion has remained in the word.

I transmit this in the form the lexicographers give it; I make no firm claim about the derivation.

And the field of faẓẓ must be recorded: speech and conduct — that is, what shows outwardly.

غَلِيظ — root غ-ل-ظ: thick, coarse, heavy. Ghilẓa — thickness. The root was treated at 4/21 in al-Nisāʾ (mīthāqan ghalīẓā), at 48/29 in al-Fatḥ (fa'staghlaẓa), in Hūd and in al-Aḥzāb. I rely on those treatments.

And here the word comes in a construct: ghalīẓa'l-qalb — "thick of heart". That is, its field is within.

I put the two words in a table:

WordRootIts concrete pictureIts field
فَظّف-ظ-ظRepellent, foul to the mouthOutward — speech, conduct
غَلِيظُ ٱلْقَلْبِغ-ل-ظThick, not fineInward — the heart

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the fields of the two words: the sentence counts two separate failings — the visible side of one, the invisible side of the other. And it negates both at once. That is, gentleness is neither only in manner nor only within.

لَٱنفَضُّوا۟ مِنْ حَوْلِكَ — root: ف-ض-ض

The root ف-ض-ض. The root was analysed in detail at 62/11 in al-Jumuʿa. I rely on that treatment and take the description given there:

Its concrete sense: to break a thing and scatter its pieces, to part what is joined, to open what is sealed. Faḍḍa'l-khātama — he broke the seal. In Form VII (infaḍḍa) it becomes reflexive: to scatter of oneself, to fall apart.

And what belongs here is this: the picture of the root is a breaking — the falling apart of what was joined.

And the form of the verb must be recorded: infaḍḍū — Form VII, reflexive. That is, no one scatters them; they scatter of themselves.

I record this as an observation about the word: the verse tells the consequence of harshness not as a driving off or a sending away but as a scattering of itself. And this lies along the same line as the command wa lā tafarraqū at verse 103 — there scattering was forbidden; here what leads to scattering is named.

And I record the link between 62/11 in al-Jumuʿa and this verse, and it is verifiable from the text:

PlaceVerbThe cause of the scattering
al-Jumuʿa 62/11Infaḍḍū ilayhāTrade and diversion — a pull from outside
Āl ʿImrān 3/159La'nfaḍḍū min ḥawlikHarshness — a push from within

The same root, two different causes: one pulls from outside, the other pushes from within.

Three commands

And after the conditional sentence three commands come, and their order must be recorded:

#CommandDirectionSubject
1Fa'fu ʿanhumTo the pastWhat has happened
2Wa'staghfir lahumUpwardOn their behalf
3Wa shāwirhum fi'l-amrTo the futureThe work to be done

And the order sets up a sequence of time: past, intercession, future.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the three commands: the third command is the heaviest. For the first two close what has happened; the third gives the same people a say once again.

And its context must not be forgotten: at verse 152 it was said tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amr — "you quarrelled over the affair". And now at verse 159 it says shāwirhum fi'l-amrthe same construction.

This is a fact verifiable within the sūra and worth recording: the affair that was quarrelled over and the affair about which consultation is commanded are named with the same word.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the consequence of a quarrel is given not as the removal of consultation on the matter quarrelled over but as the commanding of consultation. That is, the text does not draw from a consultation that turned out badly the conclusion that consultation should be abolished.

شُورَىٰ — a comparison with 42/38

The root ش-و-ر was analysed in detail at 42/38 in al-Shūrā. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it; I summarise:

The concrete sense of the root: shāra'l-ʿasal — he took the honey out of the hive. The honey is inside the hive; it is unseen, closed in, and getting it out takes labour. And all the branches of the root carry the same coreashāra (to point), shawār (goods put on display): to bring a thing out of where it is and set it in the open. And this was recorded there: "Within a community there is opinion, but until it is brought out it does not exist."

And now I compare the two verses. This is a datum verifiable within the series:

al-Shūrā 42/38Āl ʿImrān 3/159
The wordShūrāa nounShāwiran imperative verb
Kind of sentenceA nominal sentencewa amruhum shūrā baynahumA commandwa shāwirhum fi'l-amr
What it conveysAn attribute — this is their stateA command — do this
To whomTo a community — third personTo one person — second person
ContextA list of attributes — between prayer and spendingThe aftermath of a defeat
WhereBaynahumamong themFi'l-amrin the affair
What followsWa mimmā razaqnāhum yunfiqūnFa-idhā ʿazamta fa-tawakkal ʿala'llāh

I draw three observations from the table, and all three can be verified from the two texts.

One. One is an attribute, the other a command — and this is said by two different forms of the word. In al-Shūrā a noun (shūrā), in Āl ʿImrān a verb (shāwir). That is, the same root conveys in one place the state of a community and in the other a duty given to one person.

Two. In al-Shūrā a nominal sentence is used, and it was recorded in al-Shūrā that this conveys continuance. Here, on the other hand, the imperative is used, and the command comes after an event. The two moods do two different pieces of work: one conveys a lasting quality, the other a thing to be done in a particular situation.

Three. And the two verses together give a whole. The verse in al-Shūrā says that consultation is the quality of a community; the verse in Āl ʿImrān shows that it is not abandoned even at the hardest moment.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: whether a quality is really a quality becomes clear at the moment when things go badly. And Āl ʿImrān chooses exactly that moment.

Per the method (Method) I record this: no form of government and no political model is drawn from this verse. The same note was entered at 42/38 in al-Shūrā and is kept here. The verse commands consultation; it says nothing about the institutional form of consultation.

فَإِذَا عَزَمْتَ فَتَوَكَّلْ

The root ع-ز-م: to resolve firmly upon a matter, to be determined. And the subject of the verb is singular: ʿazamta — "when you have decided".

And this gives rise to a fact of word order that must be recorded:

StageVerbPerson
ConsultationShāwirhumPlural — with them
DecisionʿAzamtaSingular — you
RelianceFa-tawakkalSingular — you

I record this as an observation about the word order: the consultation is plural, the decision singular. And in binding the two together the verse uses the particle fa — that is, the decision comes after the consultation.

And the command to rely must be recorded: reliance is set not in place of consultation but after it. The two are in the same sentence and neither cancels the other.

And this finding was already recorded at 42/36 in al-Shūrā — there a conclusion was drawn from reliance and consultation standing in the same list. I rely on that treatment.

What this says to the present

What the verse says to the present lies in two places, and both come out of the wording.

One. The verse sets manner down as a matter of consequence. La'nfaḍḍū min ḥawlik — the consequence of harshness is scattering. And this is not a moral counsel but a note about how things work: people leave the place from which they are pushed.

Two. The verse does not draw from a participation that turned out badly the conclusion that participation should be removed. A quarrel occurred (152), and afterwards consultation was commanded (159). This is a link set up in two verses with the same word (al-amr) and verifiable from the text.


3/160-164

إِن يَنصُرْكُمُ ٱللَّهُ فَلَا غَالِبَ لَكُمْ … لَقَدْ مَنَّ ٱللَّهُ عَلَى ٱلْمُؤْمِنِينَ إِذْ بَعَثَ فِيهِمْ رَسُولًا مِّنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ

In yanṣurkumu'llāhu fa-lā ghāliba lakum, wa in yakhdhulkum fa-man dha'lladhī yanṣurukum min baʿdih, wa ʿala'llāhi fa'l-yatawakkali'l-muʾminūn · Wa mā kāna li-nabiyyin an yaghulla, wa man yaghlul yaʾti bimā ghalla yawma'l-qiyāma, thumma tuwaffā kullu nafsin mā kasabat wa hum lā yuẓlamūn · … · La-qad manna'llāhu ʿala'l-muʾminīna idh baʿatha fīhim rasūlan min anfusihim yatlū ʿalayhim āyātihī wa yuzakkīhim wa yuʿallimuhumu'l-kitāba wa'l-ḥikmata wa in kānū min qablu la-fī ḍalālin mubīn

"If God helps you, none can overcome you; and if He leaves you without help, who is there that could help you after Him? Let the believers rely on God alone. · It is not for a prophet to defraud regarding the spoils. Whoever defrauds will come with what he took on the day of resurrection… · God has favoured the believers by sending among them a messenger from among themselves: he recites His signs to them, purifies them, and teaches them the Book and wisdom. Before that they were in manifest straying."

3/160 — the opposition of two conditions

ConditionConsequenceWord order
In yanṣurkumu'llāhFa-lā ghāliba lakumA negative nominal sentence — absolute
Wa in yakhdhulkumFa-man dha'lladhī yanṣurukum min baʿdihA question — left unanswered

And the kind of the two consequences differs: the first is a ruling, the second a question.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the answer to the second branch is not written. The question leaves the gap for the reader to fill — and this is the same method as a-fa-lā taʿqilūn at verse 65.

The root خ-ذ-ل: to withhold help, to leave alone. And khidhlān is not enmity; it is the withdrawal of support.

3/161 — وَمَا كَانَ لِنَبِىٍّ أَن يَغُلَّ

And the pattern is familiar: mā kāna li-… — it occurred at verse 79 as mā kāna li-basharin.

VersePatternWhat is refused
79Mā kāna li-basharin an yaqūla… kūnū ʿibādan līMaking others servants of oneself
161Mā kāna li-nabiyyin an yaghullaDefrauding regarding the spoils

Two occurrences, the same pattern. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

The root غ-ل-ل: to slip a thing in secretly, to hide it. Ghulūl — in particular the taking of something from the spoils in secret. And from the same root ghull — the collar put round the neck; and ghill — the rancour hidden within. The shared core of the root: a thing's coming in between, its getting inside.

And a difference in the reciting of the word is transmitted — the verb is read both in the active (yaghulla) and in the passive (yughalla); on this the sense becomes either "that he should defraud" or "that he should be defrauded". Both readings are transmitted; I impose no preference and give no reciter's name.

3/164 — لَقَدْ مَنَّ ٱللَّهُرَسُولًا مِّنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ

And four verbs are counted, and their order must be recorded:

#VerbThe work
1Yatlū ʿalayhim āyātihReciting
2Wa yuzakkīhimPurifying
3Wa yuʿallimuhumu'l-kitābTeaching the Book
4Wa'l-ḥikmaTeaching wisdom

And the purifying comes before the teaching.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the same four verbs occur at 2/129 in al-Baqara, in Abraham's prayer, and at 2/151. And there the order differs: at 2/129 yuzakkīhim is put last, here it stands second. The difference between the two arrangements is a fact verifiable from the text; I draw no ruling from it.

مِّنْ أَنفُسِهِمْ — "from among themselves". And this note is to be read together with verse 144: there it is said that the messenger is mortal, here that he is one of them. The two notes look in the same direction.


3/165-168

قُلْ هُوَ مِنْ عِندِ أَنفُسِكُمْ

A-wa-lammā aṣābatkum muṣībatun qad aṣabtum mithlayhā qultum annā hādhā, qul huwa min ʿindi anfusikum, inna'llāha ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīr · Wa mā aṣābakum yawma'ltaqa'l-jamʿāni fa-bi-idhni'llāhi wa li-yaʿlama'l-muʾminīn · Wa li-yaʿlama'lladhīna nāfaqū… · Alladhīna qālū li-ikhwānihim wa qaʿadū law aṭāʿūnā mā qutilū, qul fa'draʾū ʿan anfusikumu'l-mawta in kuntum ṣādiqīn

"When an affliction touched you, though you had inflicted twice its like, you said: 'Where is this from?' Say: 'It is from yourselves.' God has power over all things. · What befell you on the day the two hosts met was by God's leave — that He might know the believers. · And that He might know those who played the hypocrite… · They are the ones who, sitting at home, said of their brothers: 'Had they obeyed us they would not have been killed.' Say: 'Then ward off death from yourselves, if you are truthful.'"

قُلْ هُوَ مِنْ عِندِ أَنفُسِكُمْ — the third note of the sūra

This sentence is the third of the three sentences recorded in the introduction to the sūra. And the table of the three was given there:

VerseSentenceTo whom
7Fa-ammā'lladhīna fī qulūbihim zayghunTo the reader
152Fashiltum wa tanāzaʿtum wa ʿaṣaytumTo the community
165Qul huwa min ʿindi anfusikumDirectly

And the third is the shortest and the plainest.

And the word order of the sentence must be recorded:

ElementWordingIts work
The questionAnnā hādhā — "where is this from?"The cause is sought outside
The commandQulThe answer is given
The answerHuwa min ʿindi anfusikumThe cause is turned inward

And the construction min ʿindi must be recorded. It occurs several times in the sūra, and always conveys a source:

VerseConstructionSource
37Huwa min ʿindi'llāhFrom God
78Huwa min ʿindi'llāhi wa mā huwa min ʿindi'llāhA claim and its refutation
126Wa ma'n-naṣru illā min ʿindi'llāhThe source of the help
165Huwa min ʿindi anfusikumFrom yourselves

Four occurrences, the same construction. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the four occurrences of the construction: the sūra uses the same pattern both for the source of the help and for the source of the affliction. And the two are tied to different places: the help is from His presence, the cause of the affliction from yourselves.

165 and 166 together

And the two verses must be read together, because they say two different things about the same event:

VerseWordingWhat it says
165Huwa min ʿindi anfusikumThe cause — the human share
166Fa-bi-idhni'llāhThe leave — the event's coming to pass

And the two do not conflict. I record this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is the succession of the two verses: one verse ties the cause to the human being, the next ties the coming to pass of the event to leave. The two sentences answer two different questions: "why did it happen?" and "how did it happen?"

And the order must be recorded: the human share is stated first.

168 — the second occurrence of the saying

Law aṭāʿūnā mā qutilū — "had they obeyed us they would not have been killed".

And this saying is the second form of the saying in verse 156:

VerseThe sayingThe condition
156Law kānū ʿindanā mā mātū wa mā qutilūPlace — had they been with us
168Law aṭāʿūnā mā qutilūObedience — had they followed us

Two occurrences, the same structure, two different conditions. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

And the form of the answer must be recorded: qul fa'draʾū ʿan anfusikumu'l-mawta in kuntum ṣādiqīn — "then ward off death from yourselves, if you are truthful".

I record this as an observation about the word order: the answer is not a counter-claim; it is the applying of the claim's own logic to itself. If the place one is in or the decision one takes prevents death, the same must hold for the speakers. And the verb is in the imperative: idraʾū — "ward off".


3/169-171

وَلَا تَحْسَبَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ قُتِلُوا۟ فِى سَبِيلِ ٱللَّهِ أَمْوَٰتًۢا بَلْ أَحْيَآءٌ عِندَ رَبِّهِمْ يُرْزَقُونَ

Wa lā taḥsabanna'lladhīna qutilū fī sabīli'llāhi amwātā, bal aḥyāʾun ʿinda rabbihim yurzaqūn · Fariḥīna bimā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlihī wa yastabshirūna bi'lladhīna lam yalḥaqū bihim min khalfihim allā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn · Yastabshirūna bi-niʿmatin mina'llāhi wa faḍlin wa anna'llāha lā yuḍīʿu ajra'l-muʾminīn

"Do not suppose those killed in the way of God to be dead. Rather they are alive, provided for with their Lord. · They rejoice in what God has given them of His bounty, and they rejoice for those who have not yet joined them from behind: no fear shall be upon them, and they shall not grieve. · They rejoice in a favour and a bounty from God; and God does not let the reward of the believers go to waste."


This verse must be read together with 2/154 in al-Baqara, and the difference between the two verses is the point this commentary draws attention to.

A comparison with 2/154

At 2/154 in al-Baqara this verse was already named and a table was drawn up. I rely on that treatment and widen the table:

al-Baqara 2/154Āl ʿImrān 3/169
MoodWa lā taqūlū — "do not say"Wa lā taḥsabanna — "do not suppose"
What is intervened inSpeechSupposition
The addresseePlural — the communitySingular — with the nūn of emphasis
The verbLi-man yuqtaluimperfect, ongoingAlladhīna qutilūperfect, accomplished
The closeWa lākin lā tashʿurūn — "you do not perceive"ʿInda rabbihim yurzaqūn — "they are provided for"
What is givenThe limit of knowledgeA part of the knowledge

And it was recorded in al-Baqara:

"One states the limit of the knowledge, the other gives a part of the knowledge. The verse in al-Baqara breaks off without saying anything about the nature of that life."

I rely on that treatment and now record what Āl ʿImrān adds.

One. The prohibition is laid not on speech but on supposition. Al-Baqara says lā taqūlū (do not say); here it says lā taḥsabanna (do not suppose). The two are separate fields: one language, the other judgement.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two verbs: al-Baqara was intervening in the naming; Āl ʿImrān intervenes in the appraisal behind the naming. And the order is meaningful — first the word was corrected, then the conviction.

Two. And the verb yurzaqūn is added.

The root ر-ز-ق: what is brought regularly to someone. And the verb is passive: the giver is not spoken of, the state of receiving is conveyed.

I record this as an observation about the word: al-Baqara says "they are alive" and stops. Āl ʿImrān adds a verb — and the verb added is the most everyday mark of life: being fed. That is, the presence of life is shown not by an adjective but by a verb.

Three. And I keep the limit here as well. This was recorded in al-Baqara and holds exactly:

"I do not say what the text does not say about what kind of life this is, where it goes on, or in what form."

Āl ʿImrān says ʿinda rabbihim (with their Lord) and yurzaqūn (they are provided for); and in verses 170-171 it adds two more verbs: fariḥīn (they rejoice) and yastabshirūn (they receive good news / they rejoice). I go no further than these.

170-171: the direction of the rejoicing

And the word order of the two verses must be recorded, because rejoicing is named twice and about two different things:

VerseVerbThe object of the rejoicing
170Fariḥīna bimā ātāhumu'llāhWhat has been given to them
170Wa yastabshirūna bi'lladhīna lam yalḥaqū bihimThose left behind
171Yastabshirūna bi-niʿmatin mina'llāhi wa faḍlFavour and bounty

And the middle one is worth recording: part of the rejoicing is not for themselves but for those who have not yet come.

I record this as an observation about the word order: while telling of a loss the verse turns the gaze to those left behind. And the word spoken is given not in their mouths but about them: allā khawfun ʿalayhim wa lā hum yaḥzanūn.

And this construction is one that occurs often in the Qurʾān and was treated at 2/38, 2/62 and 2/112 in al-Baqara. I rely on those treatments.

بشر — root ب-ش-ر: the outer surface of the skin; and from this, joy showing on the face. The root was treated in Maryam and Hūd. And in Form X (yastabshirūn) the seeking or the mutual showing of joy is conveyed.


3/172-175

حَسْبُنَا ٱللَّهُ وَنِعْمَ ٱلْوَكِيلُ · إِنَّمَا ذَٰلِكُمُ ٱلشَّيْطَٰنُ يُخَوِّفُ أَوْلِيَآءَهُۥ

Alladhīna'stajābū li'llāhi wa'r-rasūli min baʿdi mā aṣābahumu'l-qarḥ, li'lladhīna aḥsanū minhum wa'ttaqaw ajrun ʿaẓīm · Alladhīna qāla lahumu'n-nāsu inna'n-nāsa qad jamaʿū lakum fa'khshawhum fa-zādahum īmānan wa qālū ḥasbuna'llāhu wa niʿma'l-wakīl · Fa'nqalabū bi-niʿmatin mina'llāhi wa faḍlin lam yamsas'hum sūʾun wa'ttabaʿū riḍwāna'llāh, wa'llāhu dhū faḍlin ʿaẓīm · Innamā dhālikumu'sh-shayṭānu yukhawwifu awliyāʾah, fa-lā takhāfūhum wa khāfūni in kuntum muʾminīn

"Those who answered God and the messenger after the wound had reached them — for those of them who did good and guarded themselves there is a great reward. · People said to them: 'People have gathered against you, so fear them.' But this increased them in faith, and they said: 'God is enough for us; how excellent a trustee!' · So they returned with a favour and a bounty from God, untouched by any harm, and they followed the good pleasure of God. … · That is only Satan, making his friends fear. Do not fear them; fear Me, if you are believers."

3/173 — the sound structure of the sentence

And the word order of the verse must be recorded: the word al-nās occurs twice, one after the other, and conveys two different sets.

Alladhīna qāla lahumu'n-nāsu inna'n-nāsa qad jamaʿū lakum

OccurrenceWho
The first al-nāsThose who bring the news
The second al-nāsThe side said to have gathered

The same word, in one sentence, for two different sets. I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence shows how fear is carried — one group brings news about another group. And the truth of the news is not discussed; the stance taken is recorded.

فَزَادَهُمْ إِيمَٰنًا — "this increased them in faith". And the subject of the verb must be recorded: what increased it was the attempt at intimidation itself.

حَسْبُنَا ٱللَّهُ وَنِعْمَ ٱلْوَكِيلُ

حَسْب — root ح-س-ب: to count, to reckon; and to be enough. Ḥasb — what suffices, what is enough.

And its link with the other occurrences of the root in the sūra must be recorded: the same root had occurred six times in the sūra in the sense of "to suppose" (78, 142, 169, 178, 180, 188). Here it is in the sense of "to suffice".

I record this as an observation about the word and draw no ruling from it: the same root conveys both reckoning and sufficing. And the lexicographers explain it thus: a thing's sufficing is the reckoning's being complete.

وَكِيل — root و-ك-ل: to commit an affair to another. Wakīl — the one who takes an affair upon himself. And from the same root tawakkul occurred at verses 159 and 160.

And the construction occurs once more in the Qurʾān and, within this sūra itself, only here. And the pattern niʿma conveys praise.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence is in two parts — one of sufficiency (ḥasbuna'llāh), the other of taking charge (niʿma'l-wakīl). That is, what is said is not only "He is enough for us" but also "He takes the affair upon Himself".

3/175 — يُخَوِّفُ أَوْلِيَآءَهُۥ and the instrument of intimidation

The root خ-و-ف: fear. And the verb is in Form II: yukhawwif — the giving of fear, intimidating.

And at 39/36 in al-Zumar the same verb in the same form was treated, and this was recorded there:

Wa yukhawwifūnaka bi'lladhīna min dūnih — "they make you afraid with those besides Him". The verb is Form II: the work of giving fear. And this was recorded there: "the verse names the instrument the other side uses — not proof but fear."

I rely on that treatment and bind the two verses into one line:

PlaceWordingWho frightensWho is frightenedThe instrument of fear
al-Zumar 39/36Wa yukhawwifūnaka bi'lladhīna min dūnihPeopleThe ProphetAlladhīna min dūnih
Āl ʿImrān 3/173Inna'n-nāsa qad jamaʿū lakum fa'khshawhumPeopleThe believersThe news of a gathering
Āl ʿImrān 3/175Innamā dhālikumu'sh-shayṭānu yukhawwifu awliyāʾahSatan

Three verses, the same root and the same operation: the use of fear as an instrument. This is a weave verifiable within the series.

And the finding recorded in al-Zumar holds here too and can be widened: the sūra names the instrument the other side uses. And Āl ʿImrān takes one step further: it names the source of the instrument as well.

يُخَوِّفُ أَوْلِيَآءَهُۥ — the difficulty in the sentence

And the lexicographers differ over the syntax of the sentence, and the disagreement is not to be concealed. The difficulty is this: is awliyāʾah the object, or does it come with an understood bi-?

ReadingSentenceSense
1Yukhawwifu awliyāʾah — object"He makes his own friends afraid" — those frightened are Satan's friends
2Yukhawwifukum bi-awliyāʾih — an understood particle"He makes you afraid with his friends" — the instrument is his friends
3Yukhawwifukum awliyāʾah — two objects"He makes his friends seem frightening to you"

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the second reading coincides exactly with 39/36 in al-Zumar (yukhawwifūnaka bi'lladhīna min dūnih — there the bāʾ is explicit). I record this as an indication, not as a preference.

فَلَا تَخَافُوهُمْ وَخَافُونِand the answer does not remove the fear; it changes its direction.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is that the two verbs are from the same root: the sentence does not say "do not fear". The same verb occurs twice: one negated, the other an imperative. That is, fear is not rejected as a feeling; its object is changed.

And the continuation of 39/36 in al-Zumar has the same structure (a-laysa'llāhu bi-kāfin ʿabdah — "Is God not enough for His servant?"). Two sūras answer the same matter with the same two steps: sufficiency, and a change of direction.


3/176-179

وَلَا يَحْسَبَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوٓا۟ أَنَّمَا نُمْلِى لَهُمْ خَيْرٌ لِّأَنفُسِهِمْ

Wa lā yaḥzunka'lladhīna yusāriʿūna fi'l-kufr, innahum lan yaḍurru'llāha shayʾā… · Inna'lladhīna'shtarawu'l-kufra bi'l-īmāni lan yaḍurru'llāha shayʾan wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm · Wa lā yaḥsabanna'lladhīna kafarū annamā numlī lahum khayrun li-anfusihim, innamā numlī lahum li-yazdādū ithmā, wa lahum ʿadhābun muhīn · Mā kāna'llāhu li-yadhara'l-muʾminīna ʿalā mā antum ʿalayhi ḥattā yamīza'l-khabītha mina'ṭ-ṭayyib…

"Let those who race into denial not grieve you; they do God no harm at all… · Those who have bought denial at the price of faith do God no harm at all… · Let those who deny not suppose that Our giving them time is good for them. We give them time only that they may increase in sin… · God will not leave the believers in the state you are in — until He separates the foul from the good."

نُمْلِى — root: م-ل-و

The root م-ل-و: a long span of time; and to grant a respite. Malā — a long time. Imlāʾ — the giving of a term, the granting of respite.

The root was treated at 22/44 and 22/48 in al-Ḥajj. I rely on those treatments.

And what belongs here is this, and it is an observation about the word order: the verse uses the same verb twice and puts an innamā between them.

SentenceWordingWhat it does
What is supposedAnnamā numlī lahum khayrun li-anfusihimThe supposition that the respite is in their favour
What is soInnamā numlī lahum li-yazdādū ithmāThe function of the respite

The same verb, two different readings. And the difference is not in the verb but in the sense loaded onto it.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the verb the two sentences share: the verse does not dispute the fact itself — the respite has really been given. What it disputes is how that fact is to be read. And this is the reason the sūra uses the root ح-س-ب six times: what is corrected throughout the sūra is not facts but the conclusions drawn from facts.

3/179 — يَمِيزَ ٱلْخَبِيثَ مِنَ ٱلطَّيِّبِ

The root م-ي-ز: to separate, to sort out what has been mixed together.

And this verb is the answer to the difficulty at verse 142. There it said wa lammā yaʿlami'llāhu and the disagreement over the sense of the verb "to know" was recorded. Here the sūra supplies its own word: yamīza — to separate.

I record this as a datum of the text: two verses tell the same matter with two different verbs, and the second explains the first. This is a link verifiable within the sūra.

خَبِيث / طَيِّبخ-ب-ث: bad, foul, useless. ط-ي-ب: pleasant, clean, good. And the same pair had occurred at 2/267 in al-Baqara on the subject of spending. Two occurrences, in two different fields.


3/180-182

وَلَا يَحْسَبَنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ يَبْخَلُونَ بِمَآ ءَاتَىٰهُمُ ٱللَّهُ مِن فَضْلِهِۦ هُوَ خَيْرًا لَّهُم

Wa lā yaḥsabanna'lladhīna yabkhalūna bimā ātāhumu'llāhu min faḍlihī huwa khayran lahum, bal huwa sharrun lahum, sa-yuṭawwaqūna mā bakhilū bihī yawma'l-qiyāma, wa li'llāhi mīrāthu's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, wa'llāhu bimā taʿmalūna khabīr · La-qad samiʿa'llāhu qawla'lladhīna qālū inna'llāha faqīrun wa naḥnu aghniyāʾ, sa-naktubu mā qālū wa qatlahumu'l-anbiyāʾa bi-ghayri ḥaqq… · Dhālika bimā qaddamat aydīkum wa anna'llāha laysa bi-ẓallāmin li'l-ʿabīd

"Let those who are miserly with what God has given them of His bounty not suppose it good for them: it is bad for them. What they were miserly with will be hung round their necks on the day of resurrection. The inheritance of the heavens and the earth belongs to God… · God has indeed heard the word of those who said, 'God is poor and we are rich.' We shall write down what they said and their killing of the prophets without right… · This is because of what your hands have sent ahead; and God is never unjust to His servants."

سَيُطَوَّقُونَ — root: ط-و-ق

The root ط-و-ق: a ring, a hoop that goes round the neck. Ṭawq — a collar, a yoke. And the verb is passive in Form II: yuṭawwaqūna — "it will be put round their necks".

I record this as an observation about the word: the description likens the thing hoarded not so much to a load as to a ring. A ring cannot be taken off; it is carried. And the thing one wanted to keep in hand turns into a hoop round the neck.

And the same root is close in sense to ghull in verse 161 — there too there was a ring that goes round the neck. Two different roots, in two different verses, the same picture. I record this as an observation and claim no derivational link between the two roots.

وَلِلَّهِ مِيرَٰثُ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِand the sentence enters a note of ownership. The root م-ي-ر-ث / و-ر-ث: the passing on of what is left behind.

I record this as an observation about the word order: immediately after the verse on miserliness there is set a sentence saying that what is held will be passed on anyway. That is, the end of the thing miserliness is about is stated in the same verse.

And the concept of al-mulk was treated at verse 26 of the sūra; mīrāth is its counterpart in time.

إِنَّ ٱللَّهَ فَقِيرٌ وَنَحْنُ أَغْنِيَآءُ — the place of the saying

And where the saying is placed must be recorded: immediately after the verse on miserliness.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the succession of the two verses: verse 180 tells of a conduct (miserliness), verse 181 of a saying. And there is a link between the two verses: reading the call to spend as "neediness". Immediately after telling of the conduct, the sūra names the reading behind that conduct.

And the same matter was treated at 2/245 in al-Baqara (man dha'lladhī yuqriḍu'llāha qarḍan ḥasanā) and the difficulty raised by the phrase "a goodly loan" was taken up there. I rely on that treatment.

Per the method (Method) I record this: I do not go into the reports about who spoke this saying, and I give no personal or group names. The verse gives its subject as alladhīna qālū — "those who said". The measure is not who says the word but the word itself.


3/183-186

كُلُّ نَفْسٍ ذَآئِقَةُ ٱلْمَوْتِ · لَتُبْلَوُنَّ فِىٓ أَمْوَٰلِكُمْ وَأَنفُسِكُمْ

Alladhīna qālū inna'llāha ʿahida ilaynā allā nuʾmina li-rasūlin ḥattā yaʾtiyanā bi-qurbānin taʾkuluhu'n-nār, qul qad jāʾakum rusulun min qablī bi'l-bayyināti wa bi'lladhī qultum fa-lima qataltumūhum in kuntum ṣādiqīn · Fa-in kadhdhabūka fa-qad kudhdhiba rusulun min qablika jāʾū bi'l-bayyināti wa'z-zuburi wa'l-kitābi'l-munīr · Kullu nafsin dhāʾiqatu'l-mawt, wa innamā tuwaffawna ujūrakum yawma'l-qiyāma, fa-man zuḥziḥa ʿani'n-nāri wa udkhila'l-jannata fa-qad fāz, wa ma'l-ḥayātu'd-dunyā illā matāʿu'l-ghurūr · La-tublawunna fī amwālikum wa anfusikum wa la-tasmaʿunna mina'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba min qablikum wa mina'lladhīna ashrakū adhan kathīrā, wa in taṣbirū wa tattaqū fa-inna dhālika min ʿazmi'l-umūr

"Those who said: 'God has charged us to believe in no messenger until he brings us an offering that fire consumes'… Say: 'Messengers came to you before me with clear proofs and with what you named; why then did you kill them, if you are truthful?' · If they have called you a liar, messengers before you were called liars too… · Every soul shall taste death. Your recompenses will be paid in full only on the day of resurrection. Whoever is drawn away from the fire and admitted to the garden has attained. The life of this world is nothing but the enjoyment of delusion. · You will certainly be tested in your wealth and in your persons; and you will certainly hear much that is hurtful from those given the Book before you and from those who associate. But if you are steadfast and guard yourselves — that is among the matters requiring resolve."

3/183 — the refuting of a claim from within itself

And the form of the answer must be recorded: fa-lima qataltumūhum in kuntum ṣādiqīn.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the answer does not refuse the claim; it asks what was done to those who did fulfil its condition. That is, it is shown from the past that even when the condition was met the outcome did not change.

And the same method was used at verse 168: fa'draʾū ʿan anfusikumu'l-mawt — there too the logic of the claim was applied to the claimant. Two occurrences, the same method.

3/185 — كُلُّ نَفْسٍ ذَآئِقَةُ ٱلْمَوْتِ

The root ذ-و-ق: to taste. And not a verb but an active participle is used: dhāʾiqa — "taster". In Arabic the active participle conveys the coming to pass of the act with certainty and continuance.

I record this as an observation about the word: death is named not as an end but as a tasting. And to taste is to take not the whole of a thing but a part of it.

زُحْزِحَ — root ز-ح-ز-ح: to move away little by little, by pushing. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān. And the verb is passive: the one who moves away is not named.

And what the lexicographers record must be recorded: there is a repetition in the root — a four-letter, doubled form (zaḥzaḥa), which in Arabic generally conveys a repeated movement. That is, the moving away is not in a single thrust but stage by stage.

مَتَٰعُ ٱلْغُرُور — root غ-ر-ر: to deceive; a thing's appearance misleading a person. And the word matāʿ had occurred at verse 14: dhālika matāʿu'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyā.

The difference between the two occurrences must be recorded:

VerseConstructionWhat is added
14Matāʿu'l-ḥayāti'd-dunyāNo qualifier — only "provision"
185Matāʿu'l-ghurūrA qualifier — "of delusion"

And it was recorded at verse 14: matāʿ is not a bad word; it means what is used, what is drawn benefit from. Here, on the other hand, an adjective is added to the word.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two constructions: what is bad is not the matāʿ but the wrong conclusion drawn from it. And the sūra says this in two separate places in two separate ways: unqualified at the beginning, qualified at the end.

3/186 — two fields of testing and two sources

FieldWording
Wealthamwālikum
PersonsWa anfusikum
SourceWording
From those given the BookMina'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba min qablikum
From those who associateWa mina'lladhīna ashrakū

And it must be recorded that both sources are given with the particle min.

عَزْمِ ٱلْأُمُور — the root ع-ز-م occurred at verse 159 (fa-idhā ʿazamta). Two occurrences, the same root:

VerseWordingWho / what
159Fa-idhā ʿazamtaA person's decision
186Min ʿazmi'l-umūrThe character of the matters

And the lexicographers differ over the sense of the construction, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat ʿazmu'l-umūr is
1Matters that require resolve
2Matters commanded with finality
3Matters to be dwelt on, serious matters

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.


3/187-189

وَإِذْ أَخَذَ ٱللَّهُ مِيثَٰقَ ٱلَّذِينَ أُوتُوا۟ ٱلْكِتَٰبَ لَتُبَيِّنُنَّهُۥ لِلنَّاسِ وَلَا تَكْتُمُونَهُۥ

Wa idh akhadha'llāhu mīthāqa'lladhīna ūtu'l-kitāba la-tubayyinunnahū li'n-nāsi wa lā taktumūnah, fa-nabadhūhu warāʾa ẓuhūrihim wa'shtaraw bihī thamanan qalīlā, fa-biʾsa mā yashtarūn · Lā taḥsabanna'lladhīna yafraḥūna bimā ataw wa yuḥibbūna an yuḥmadū bimā lam yafʿalū fa-lā taḥsabannahum bi-mafāzatin mina'l-ʿadhāb, wa lahum ʿadhābun alīm · Wa li'llāhi mulku's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, wa'llāhu ʿalā kulli shayʾin qadīr

"And when God took a covenant from those given the Book: 'You shall surely make it plain to people and shall not conceal it.' But they cast it behind their backs and sold it for a small price. How evil a bargain! · Do not suppose those who rejoice in what they have done and love to be praised for what they have not done to have escaped the punishment; theirs is a painful punishment. · To God belongs the dominion of the heavens and the earth; and God has power over all things."

The content of the covenant: two obligations

#ObligationMood
1La-tubayyinunnahū li'n-nāsPositive — to make plain
2Wa lā taktumūnahNegative — not to conceal

And the two obligations are two faces of the same thing, but they are not the same: one commands a doing, the other a not-doing.

And the verb taktumūn occurred at verse 71: wa taktumūna'l-ḥaqqa wa antum taʿlamūn. Two occurrences, the same verb: one an actual state, the other a pledge taken. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

And the note li'n-nās must be recorded: the making plain is to be done not to a group but to people. The same note was at verses 96, 110 and 138 as well.

نَبَذُوهُ وَرَآءَ ظُهُورِهِمْ — root ن-ب-ذ: to find a thing worthless and throw it away. And the description is concrete: warāʾa ẓuhūrihim — behind their backs.

I record this as an observation about the word: the description conveys not a refusal but a disregarding. What is thrown behind the back is not destroyed; it is put out of the field of vision. And this lies along the same line as the description labs (clothing over) at verse 71 — in both the object stays and becomes invisible.

3/188 — يُحِبُّونَ أَن يُحْمَدُوا۟ بِمَا لَمْ يَفْعَلُوا۟

And what the verse describes is two separate kinds of conduct, and they must be counted separately:

#ConductWording
1Rejoicing in what one has doneYafraḥūna bimā ataw
2Loving to be praised for what one has not doneYuḥibbūna an yuḥmadū bimā lam yafʿalū

And the second is distinct from the other: what is at issue here is not an exaggeration but the taking of the recompense for something that is not there.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence takes as its subject not being praised but being praised for what has not been done. And the verb is yuḥibbūna — "they love": that is, something at the level of desire is being named.

مَفَازَة — root ف-و-ز: deliverance, attaining what is sought. And the same root had occurred three verses earlier: fa-qad fāza (185). Two occurrences, three verses apart:

VerseWordingWho
185Fa-qad fāzaThe one drawn away from the fire
188Bi-mafāzatin mina'l-ʿadhābIt is negated

This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

And the verb lā taḥsabanna occurs twice in the verse — this is the last occurrence of the root ح-س-ب in the sūra and the last of the six.


3/190-191

إِنَّ فِى خَلْقِ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ وَٱلْأَرْضِ وَٱخْتِلَٰفِ ٱلَّيْلِ وَٱلنَّهَارِ لَءَايَٰتٍ لِّأُو۟لِى ٱلْأَلْبَٰبِ

Inna fī khalqi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍi wa'khtilāfi'l-layli wa'n-nahāri la-āyātin li-ūli'l-albāb · Alladhīna yadhkurūna'llāha qiyāman wa quʿūdan wa ʿalā junūbihim wa yatafakkarūna fī khalqi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ, rabbanā mā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilā, subḥānaka fa-qinā ʿadhāba'n-nār

"In the creation of the heavens and the earth and in the alternation of night and day there are signs for those who possess understanding. · They remember God standing, sitting and lying on their sides, and they reflect on the creation of the heavens and the earth: 'Our Lord! You did not create this in vain. Glory be to You; guard us from the punishment of the fire.'"


These two verses open the last block of the sūra. And the opening of the block makes a ring with the seventh verse of the sūra: the construct ūlu'l-albāb occurs twice in the sūra — at 7 and at 190. At the two ends of the sūra. This was recorded in the table in the introduction.

أُو۟لِى ٱلْأَلْبَٰب — root: ل-ب-ب

The root ل-ب-ب: the kernel of a thing, its core. Lubb — what is left of a fruit when the husk is thrown away.

The root was treated at 12/111 in Yūsuf, at 14/52 in Ibrāhīm, at 39/18 in al-Zumar, at 13/19 in al-Raʿd and at 89/5 in al-Fajr. I rely on those treatments and do not repeat them. The summary recorded there:

The edible part inside the shell of an almond or a walnut is called lubb. And the lexicographers record a difference between ʿaql and lubb: lubb is the intellect in its pure and working state. The intellect is what is inside the husk.

And I open out two of these supports separately, because both define ūlu'l-albāb by a verb:

PlaceHow ūlu'l-albāb is defined
al-Zumar 39/18Alladhīna yastamiʿūna'l-qawla fa-yattabiʿūna aḥsanah — those who listen to the word and follow the best of it
al-Raʿd 13/19A-fa-man yaʿlamu annamā unzila ilayka min rabbika'l-ḥaqqu ka-man huwa aʿmā — that the one who knows is not like the one who is blind
Āl ʿImrān 3/190-191Alladhīna yadhkurūna'llāha… wa yatafakkarūna fī khalqi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍthose who remember and reflect

Three sūras, three separate definitions — and in all three the construct is tied to a verb. This is a weave verifiable within the series.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: ūlu'l-albāb occurs in the Qurʾān not as the name of a class but as the name of those who do a certain work. And the pair of verbs Āl ʿImrān adds differs from the others: here the work is neither listening nor knowing — it is remembering and reflecting.

The standing of the two verbs together

VerbRootField
Yadhkurūnذ-ك-رRemembering — heart and tongue
Yatafakkarūnف-ك-رReflecting — the mind

And the two are in one sentence. I record this as an observation about the word order: the verse does not separate two distinct works; it gives both to the same person. And the objects of the verbs differ: what is remembered is God, what is reflected on is the creation.

قِيَٰمًا وَقُعُودًا وَعَلَىٰ جُنُوبِهِمْthree states: standing, sitting, lying on the side.

And this set of three is a count covering every posture a person can take. I record this as an observation about the word order: the count does not tie remembering to any particular posture. And the third (ʿalā junūbihim) conveys the weakest state — the state of one lying down.

مَا خَلَقْتَ هَٰذَا بَٰطِلًا

The root ب-ط-ل: to go for nothing, to be void, to be unable to stand. The lexicographers explain bāṭil as "what has no support to hold it up". The root was treated at 38/27 in Ṣād, at 21/16-18 in al-Anbiyāʾ, at 22/62 in al-Ḥajj and at 47/3 in Muḥammad. I rely on those treatments.

And I open out two of these supports separately, because both give the same ruling in God's own words:

PlaceWordingWho says it
al-Anbiyāʾ 21/16Wa mā khalaqna's-samāʾa wa'l-arḍa wa mā baynahumā lāʿibīnGod — "not in play"
Ṣād 38/27Wa mā khalaqna's-samāʾa wa'l-arḍa wa mā baynahumā bāṭilāGod — "not in vain"
Āl ʿImrān 3/191Rabbanā mā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilāA human being — inside a prayer

And the difference is the point this commentary draws attention to, and it can be verified from the text.

In al-Anbiyāʾ and in Ṣād the ruling is a declaration: God qualifies His own act. In Āl ʿImrān the same ruling comes from a human mouth, and inside a prayer at that.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the subject of the three verses: the sentence in Ṣād and the sentence in Āl ʿImrān are built with almost the same words (bāṭilā). The one difference is who is speaking. And the sentence in Āl ʿImrān comes as the result of a reflecting — because immediately before it yatafakkarūna fī khalqi's-samāwāti wa'l-arḍ has been said.

That is, the sūra gives here, as a conclusion a human being reaches by reflecting, a ruling declared in the other two sūras.

And the distinction recorded at 38/27 in Ṣād holds here too, and I rely on it: bāṭil does not mean "false"; it means what has no support, what falls of itself. That is, the sentence does not say "this creation is true"; it says "this creation is not without support".

سُبْحَٰنَكَ فَقِنَا عَذَابَ ٱلنَّارِand the prayer passes from the declaration of transcendence immediately to a request for protection. This transition will be taken up below, when the structure of the prayer is analysed.


3/192-194

رَبَّنَآ إِنَّكَ مَن تُدْخِلِ ٱلنَّارَ فَقَدْ أَخْزَيْتَهُۥ … رَبَّنَا وَءَاتِنَا مَا وَعَدتَّنَا عَلَىٰ رُسُلِكَ

Rabbanā innaka man tudkhili'n-nāra fa-qad akhzaytah, wa mā li'ẓ-ẓālimīna min anṣār · Rabbanā innanā samiʿnā munādiyan yunādī li'l-īmāni an āminū bi-rabbikum fa-āmannā, rabbanā fa'ghfir lanā dhunūbanā wa kaffir ʿannā sayyiʾātinā wa tawaffanā maʿa'l-abrār · Rabbanā wa ātinā mā waʿadtanā ʿalā rusulika wa lā tukhzinā yawma'l-qiyāma, innaka lā tukhlifu'l-mīʿād

"Our Lord! Whomever You admit to the fire, You have disgraced him; and the wrongdoers have no helpers. · Our Lord! We heard a caller calling to faith: 'Believe in your Lord' — and we believed. Our Lord! Forgive us our sins, cover over our evil deeds, and take us with the righteous. · Our Lord! Give us what You promised us through Your messengers, and do not disgrace us on the day of resurrection. You do not fail Your appointment."


This prayer is the longest in the sūra and does the same work as the closing prayer of al-Baqara (2/285-286). Its structure must be taken apart in a table.

The structure of the prayer: what is asked, in what order

The prayer begins in the middle of verse 191 and ends at verse 194. The address rabbanā occurs four times, and each address opens a new section.

#AddressWhat is asked / saidKind
1Rabbanā (191)Mā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilāa statementA statement
SubḥānakatranscendencePraise
Fa-qinā ʿadhāba'n-nārprotection from the fireA request
2Rabbanā (192)Man tudkhili'n-nāra fa-qad akhzaytaha statementA statement
3Rabbanā (193)Innanā samiʿnā… fa-āmannāa declarationA declaration
Rabbanā (193)Fa'ghfir lanā dhunūbanāforgivenessA request
Wa kaffir ʿannā sayyiʾātinābeing coveredA request
Wa tawaffanā maʿa'l-abrārthe manner of the endA request
4Rabbanā (194)Wa ātinā mā waʿadtanā ʿalā rusulikthe giving of the promiseA request
Wa lā tukhzinā yawma'l-qiyāmanot being disgracedA request
Innaka lā tukhlifu'l-mīʿādthe groundA ground

And the structure that follows from the table must be recorded, and I give four observations. All four can be verified from the wording of the prayer.

One. The prayer does not begin with a request. The first thing said is a statement: mā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilā. And the statement is followed by a declaration of transcendence. The request comes third.

Two. The requests go from outside inward, then outward again.

OrderRequestField
1Qinā ʿadhāba'n-nārProtection from the outcome
2Ighfir lanā dhunūbanāTheir own failings
3Kaffir ʿannā sayyiʾātināTheir own failings
4Tawaffanā maʿa'l-abrārThe manner of the end
5Ātinā mā waʿadtanāWhat was promised
6Wa lā tukhzināNot being disgraced

That is, the prayer opens with protection, turns to its own failings, and then asks for the promise. And the promise is left to the last.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the order of the requests: what was promised is asked for only after forgiveness of the failings has been asked. And even when it is asked it is tied to a ground: innaka lā tukhlifu'l-mīʿād — that is, the ground of the request is not the asker's desert but the giver's word.

Three. Two verbs are asked separately: ighfir and kaffir.

VerbRootIts concrete pictureObject
Ighfirغ-ف-رTo covermighfar, what covers the headDhunūbanāsins
Kaffirك-ف-رTo cover — the root sense is to coverSayyiʾātināevil deeds

Both verbs convey covering, and their objects are two different words. The lexicographers transmit distinctions between dhanb and sayyiʾa and do not agree on them; I give no definite distinction.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the prayer asks for the same work with two separate verbs and two separate objects. And the concrete sense of both roots is to cover.

Four. In the prayer being disgraced (خ-ز-ي) occurs twice, and the two answer each other:

VerseWordingWho
192Man tudkhili'n-nāra fa-qad akhzaytahAnother — a statement
194Wa lā tukhzinā yawma'l-qiyāmaOneself — a request

The same root, two verses apart: one a ruling, the other a prayer. I record this as an observation about the word order: the prayer first accepts the ruling, then asks to remain outside its reach.

مُنَادِيًا يُنَادِى لِلْإِيمَٰنِ

The root ن-د-و/ي: to call out. And there are two words from the same root in the sentence: munādiyan yunādī — "a caller calling". In Arabic this sets up emphasis.

And the caller is not named: munādiyan is indefinite. I record this as an observation about the word order: the prayer does not name the one who called; it says that the call was heard.

And this part of the prayer conveys a cause: samiʿnā… fa-āmannā — we heard, and therefore we believed. And only after this does the request come: rabbanā fa'ghfir lanā. Two fāʾ particles one after the other set up a chain: hearing → faith → request.

A comparison with the close of al-Baqara

It was recorded in the introduction to the sūra: both al-Baqara and Āl ʿImrān close with a prayer. Now I compare the two prayers.

al-Baqara 2/285-286Āl ʿImrān 3/191-194
The openingĀmana'r-rasūlu bimā unzila ilayha declarationMā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilāa statement
The declaration of faithWa'l-muʾminūn… āmannā wa aṭaʿnāSamiʿnā munādiyan… fa-āmannā
The first requestGhufrānakaFa-qinā ʿadhāba'n-nār
The request about failingsRabbanā lā tuʾākhidhnā in nasīnā aw akhṭaʾnāFa'ghfir lanā dhunūbanā wa kaffir ʿannā sayyiʾātinā
The request about burdenWa lā taḥmil ʿalaynā iṣran(None)
The closeFa'nṣurnā ʿala'l-qawmi'l-kāfirīnInnaka lā tukhlifu'l-mīʿād
The kind of the last sentenceA requestA ground

And the last row is worth recording. I give this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the prayer of al-Baqara ends with a request; the prayer of Āl ʿImrān ends with a ground. That is, one leaves the last word with the one who asks, the other with the one who gives.

And the standing of the word iṣr in the two sūras must be recorded separately: in the prayer of al-Baqara it was asked that an iṣr not be laid on; while in verse 81 of Āl ʿImrān the taking up of the iṣr was affirmed. The two sūras use the same word in two different directions — this was recorded above.


3/195

أَنِّى لَآ أُضِيعُ عَمَلَ عَٰمِلٍ مِّنكُم مِّن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ

Fa'stajāba lahum rabbuhum annī lā uḍīʿu ʿamala ʿāmilin minkum min dhakarin aw unthā, baʿḍukum min baʿḍ, fa'lladhīna hājarū wa ukhrijū min diyārihim wa ūdhū fī sabīlī wa qātalū wa qutilū la-ukaffiranna ʿanhum sayyiʾātihim wa la-udkhilannahum jannātin tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhār, thawāban min ʿindi'llāh, wa'llāhu ʿindahū ḥusnu'th-thawāb

"Their Lord answered them: 'I do not let the work of any worker among you go to waste, male or female; you are of one another.' Those who migrated, who were driven from their homes, who were hurt in My way, who fought and were killed — I shall surely cover over their evil deeds and shall surely admit them to gardens beneath which rivers flow. A recompense from God; and with God is the best of recompense."


This verse is the answer to the long prayer, and the first sentence of the answer enters a note. It will be treated in detail.

فَٱسْتَجَابَ لَهُمْ رَبُّهُمْ — the answer itself

And the word order must be recorded: after a prayer running four verses the answer comes at once, with the particle fa.

The root ج-و-ب: to cut, to cleave; and from this, to answer. In Form X (istajāba) it conveys responding. And the same verb occurred at verse 172: alladhīna'stajābū li'llāhi wa'r-rasūl.

VerseVerbWho to whom
172Istajābū li'llāhi wa'r-rasūlThe human being → to the call
195Fa'stajāba lahum rabbuhumThe Lord → to the prayer

The same verb, two directions. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

مِّن ذَكَرٍ أَوْ أُنثَىٰ — the removal of the distinction

And the word order of the sentence must be recorded:

Lā uḍīʿu ʿamala ʿāmilin minkum min dhakarin aw unthā

ElementWordingIts work
The objectʿAmala ʿāmilinTwo words from the same root — the work and the worker
Note 1MinkumAmong you
Note 2Min dhakarin aw unthāMale or female
The groundBaʿḍukum min baʿḍYou are of one another

And the construction ʿamala ʿāmilin is a figure of ishtiqāq in Arabic (derivation from the same root) and reinforces: "the work of the worker".

And the place of the second note in the sentence must be recorded: min dhakarin aw unthā is an explanation of the word ʿāmilin. That is, the sentence does this: first a general subject is set down (ʿāmil — worker), then it is written separately that this subject covers both sexes.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the word ʿāmil is masculine in form in Arabic, and in the ordinary working of the language it covers women as well. The sentence does not content itself with this; it adds the note separately.

A comparison with 33/35

al-Aḥzāb 33/35 is the central text of this matter in the series, and I rely on it. What was recorded there:

This verse is the longest parallel enumeration of man and woman in the Qurʾān: ten pairs, twenty words. And this was recorded there: an alternative was possible. In Arabic the masculine plural can be used for a mixed company, and that is the ordinary working of the language. Had the verse gone on inna'l-muslimīna wa'l-muʾminīna… it would grammatically have covered women too, and the verse would have been half the length. The Qurʾān does not do this; it raises ten words to twenty.

And now I compare the two verses:

al-Aḥzāb 33/35Āl ʿImrān 3/195
MethodCounting every attribute twice — ten pairsA note in a single sentencemin dhakarin aw unthā
LengthTwenty wordsFour words
SubjectAttributes — who one isDeed — what one has done
The ground added(None)Baʿḍukum min baʿḍ
The closeAʿadda'llāhu lahum maghfiratan wa ajran ʿaẓīmāLa-ukaffiranna… wa la-udkhilannahum
ContextA list of attributesThe answer to a prayer

The two verses do the same work by two different methods: one by repeating, the other by entering a note.

And what Āl ʿImrān adds is the ground. I open this out separately.

بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ — the ground itself

"Some of you are of others."

And the structure of the construction must be recorded: the word baʿḍ twice, with the particle min between them.

And the same construction had occurred twice more in the sūra:

VerseWordingSubject
34Dhurriyyatan baʿḍuhā min baʿḍDescent — the chain of prophets
64Wa lā yattakhidha baʿḍunā baʿḍan arbābāHierarchy — it is refused
195Baʿḍukum min baʿḍSex — the distinction is lifted

Three occurrences, in a single sūra. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra and worth recording.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the same construction describes three separate relations three times in the sūra — the chain of descent, hierarchy among people, and sex. And in all three what it does is the same: to bind the two sides to one another and to prevent a step being set between them.

And I record its link with verse 64 separately: there the construction stood inside the item forbidding people to take one another as lords. Here it is the ground of the sentence saying that the work of man and of woman is weighed by the same measure. The same construction, against two different inequalities.

Five verbs

And in the continuation of the verse five verbs are counted, and three of them are passive:

#VerbVoice
1HājarūActive — they migrated
2Wa ukhrijū min diyārihimPassive — they were driven out
3Wa ūdhū fī sabīlīPassive — they were hurt
4Wa qātalūActive — they fought
5Wa qutilūPassive — they were killed

And the word order must be recorded: active and passive verbs run into one another.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the list counts both what was done and what was suffered. And no distinction is made between the two — all five are tied to the subject of the same sentence.

And the note fī sabīlī: a first-person construct — "in My way". This is its only occurrence in the verse; elsewhere in the sūra the construction is fī sabīli'llāh.


3/196-198

لَا يَغُرَّنَّكَ تَقَلُّبُ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ فِى ٱلْبِلَٰدِ

Lā yaghurrannaka taqallubu'lladhīna kafarū fi'l-bilād · Matāʿun qalīlun thumma maʾwāhum jahannam, wa biʾsa'l-mihād · Lākini'lladhīna'ttaqaw rabbahum lahum jannātun tajrī min taḥtiha'l-anhāru khālidīna fīhā nuzulan min ʿindi'llāh, wa mā ʿinda'llāhi khayrun li'l-abrār

"Do not let the moving about of those who deny in the lands deceive you. · It is a small enjoyment; then their refuge is hell. What an evil bed! · But for those who guard themselves before their Lord there are gardens beneath which rivers flow; they abide there. A hospitality from God. And what is with God is better for the righteous."

تَقَلُّب — root: ق-ل-ب

The root ق-ل-ب: to turn, to revolve. In Form V (taqallub): to turn over and over, to pass from one state to another.

And the occurrences of the root in the sūra must be recorded:

VerseWordingWhat
7, 8, 103, 126, 151, 154, 156, 159QulūbHeart
127Fa-yanqalibū khāʾibīnTo turn back — in despair
144Inqalabtum ʿalā aʿqābikumTo turn back
149Fa-tanqalibū khāsirīnTo turn back — in loss
174Fa'nqalabū bi-niʿmatinTo turn back — with a favour
196Taqallubu'lladhīna kafarū fi'l-bilādMoving about

The root is one of the densest in the sūra and occurs both in the sense of heart and in the sense of turning. I record this as an observation and build no ruling on the two senses; the lexicographers already explain the heart by the sense of "what turns continually".

And the verb lā yaghurrannaka must be recorded: the root غ-ر-ر occurred at verse 185 as matāʿu'l-ghurūr. Two occurrences, eleven verses apart: one for the life of this world, the other for an appearance.

مِهَاد / نُزُل — the opposition of the two words must be recorded:

WordRootSense
مِهَادم-ه-دA bed, a spread-out couchmahd: a cradle
نُزُلن-ز-لWhat is prepared for a guest — prepared for one who alights

Both words convey a preparing. I record this as an observation about the words: the two opposite outcomes are given with two separate words for "a place prepared". And mihād is a bed, nuzul a hospitality.


3/199-200

وَإِنَّ مِنْ أَهْلِ ٱلْكِتَٰبِ لَمَن يُؤْمِنُ بِٱللَّهِ · يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ ٱصْبِرُوا۟ وَصَابِرُوا۟ وَرَابِطُوا۟

Wa inna min ahli'l-kitābi la-man yuʾminu bi'llāhi wa mā unzila ilaykum wa mā unzila ilayhim khāshiʿīna li'llāhi lā yashtarūna bi-āyāti'llāhi thamanan qalīlā, ulāʾika lahum ajruhum ʿinda rabbihim, inna'llāha sarīʿu'l-ḥisāb · Yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanu'ṣbirū wa ṣābirū wa rābiṭū wa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūn

"Among the People of the Book there are those who believe in God, and in what has been sent down to you and in what has been sent down to them; humbling themselves before God, they do not sell the signs of God for a small price. Theirs is their reward with their Lord. God is swift in reckoning. · You who believe! Be steadfast, vie in steadfastness, hold fast together, and guard yourselves before God, that you may prosper."

3/199 — the close of the sūra's line on the People of the Book

And this verse is the sūra's last word about the People of the Book. And it is a favourable word.

And the particle min once again: wa inna min ahli'l-kitābi la-man yuʾmin. And this is the eighth occurrence in the sūra; it was recorded in the table above.

And the word order of the verse must be recorded, because in counting what is believed in a sequence is followed:

#What is believed inWording
1GodBi'llāh
2What has been sent down to youWa mā unzila ilaykum
3What has been sent down to themWa mā unzila ilayhim

And the order must be recorded: "what has been sent down to you" comes first, "what has been sent down to them" after.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the sentence counts faith in their own books as well and does not negate it. And at 29/46 in al-ʿAnkabūt the same order is reversed (āmannā bi'lladhī unzila ilaynā wa unzila ilaykum — there "what has been sent down to us" comes first). In both verses the two revelations are named together; the order changes according to who is speaking. This is a fact verifiable within the series.

خَٰشِعِينَ لِلَّهِ — root خ-ش-ع: to be lowered, to bow, the sinking of the voice. The root was treated at 33/35 in al-Aḥzāb, and it was recorded there: the lexicographers give the earth as an instance of the root's concrete sense — khashaʿati'l-arḍ, the ground sank, it was lowered. I rely on that treatment.

لَا يَشْتَرُونَ بِـَٔايَٰتِ ٱللَّهِ ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًاand the construction occurs in the sūra for the third time, and this time negated:

VerseWordingMood
77Yashtarūna bi-ʿahdi'llāhi wa aymānihim thamanan qalīlāAffirmative — they do it
187Wa'shtaraw bihī thamanan qalīlāAffirmative — they did it
199Lā yashtarūna bi-āyāti'llāhi thamanan qalīlāNegative — they do not do it

Three occurrences, and the third is the opposite of the first two. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, and it is not binding: the sūra uses the same verb three times, and in the last occurrence it names those who do not do the thing named in the first two. And the last occurrence is the sūra's last sentence about the People of the Book. That is, the sūra closes with the negative of the same word the line it opened with a severe statement.

أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ لَهُمْ أَجْرُهُمْ عِندَ رَبِّهِمْulāʾika lahum ajruhum ʿinda rabbihim: the reward is given without qualification. The same construction occurs at 2/62 and 2/112 in al-Baqara and was treated there. I rely on those treatments.

3/200 — a close with four commands

Iṣbirū wa ṣābirū wa rābiṭū wa'ttaqu'llāh

And the sūra closes with four commands. Three from the same field, the fourth from the beginning of the sūra.

#CommandRootFormWhat
1Iṣbirūص-ب-رForm IBe steadfast
2Wa ṣābirūص-ب-رForm III (mufāʿala)Vie with one another in steadfastness
3Wa rābiṭūر-ب-طForm III (mufāʿala)Hold fast together / stand on guard
4Wa'ttaqu'llāhو-ق-يForm VIIIGuard yourselves

And the word order of the first three commands must be recorded, and this is the most important fact of the verse.

One. The first two commands are from the same root and their forms differ.

Iṣbirū is Form I: a person's being steadfast on his own. Ṣābirū is Form III (mufāʿala), and in Arabic this form conveys reciprocity.

I record this as an observation about the words and rely on the lexicographers' account of the forms: the same root, in two forms, conveys two different pieces of work. The first is the work of one person, the second a mutual work.

And the lexicographers differ over with whom ṣābirū is mutual, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWith whom ṣābirū is
1With the enemy — to endure beyond their enduring
2With one another — mutual steadfastness within the community
3In general — to vie in steadfastness

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

Two. The third command is from a new root: ر-ب-ط.

The root ر-ب-ط: to bind. Ribāṭ — a bond; and the place where a horse is tethered. Rabaṭa ʿalā qalbih — he bound his heart, he gave him firmness. And murābaṭa is used in the sense of being tethered in a place and waiting, standing guard.

And the lexicographers differ over the sense of the verb, and the disagreement is not to be concealed:

ReadingWhat rābiṭū is
1To stand guard at a frontier — to tether the horses and wait
2To wait from one prayer to the next — a continuous attachment
3To bind yourselves to one another — to stand together as a community
4To bind the heart — firmness

All four are transmitted; I do not impose a preference and I draw no legal ruling.

But one datum of the text can be recorded, and I record it: rābiṭū too is in Form III — that is, the form conveying reciprocity. That the second and third commands are in the same form is a fact of word order.

Three. And the order of the four commands sets up a structure. I give this as my own reading, and it is not binding:

CommandWhoField
IṣbirūOne personWithin himself
ṢābirūMutualWith another
RābiṭūMutualStanding together
Ittaqu'llāhEveryoneBefore God

The order goes from the singular to the plural, then upward. And the last command comes with a word that has run since the second verse of the sūra: taqwā.

The last word of the sūra: تُفْلِحُونَ

The root ف-ل-ح. The lexicographers give the concrete sense of the root as to cleave: falaḥa'l-arḍa — he cleaved the ground, he ploughed it. And fallāḥ is a farmer.

And the word occurs twice in the sūra: at 130 and at 200.

VerseWordingContext
130Wa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūnAfter the prohibition of ribā
200Wa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūnThe last sentence of the sūra

Two occurrences, and both are built with the same two words: wa'ttaqu'llāha laʿallakum tufliḥūn. The same sentence, twice in a single sūra. This is a repetition verifiable within the sūra.

And at verse 104 the same root had occurred once more, as a noun: wa ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn. Three occurrences, in a single sūra.

I record this as an observation and rely on the concrete sense of the root: the picture of the root is a cleaving — the opening of what is closed, the reaching of what is under the soil. And the sūra, after proceeding for two hundred verses as a text that opens what is closed, ends with this word. I give this as an observation about the word; I make no claim about reckonings or numbers.


The sūra as a whole — looking back

Repetitions within the sūra that can be verified

The table below is not interpretation but an inventory of repetitions verifiable from the sūra's own text. It completes the table in the introduction.

Root / word / patternWhereWhat it does
مِنْ (partitive) + the People of the Book69, 72, 75, 78, 100, 110, 113, 199A division in eight places — in none of them is a blanket ruling built
سَوَآءKalimatin sawāʾin (64) — laysū sawāʾan (113)Common ground, and "they are not all alike"
بَعْضُكُم مِّنۢ بَعْضٍ34 (descent), 64 (hierarchy), 195 (sex)The same construction against three separate inequalities
حَبْلḤabli'llāh (103) — ḥablin mina'llāhi wa ḥablin mina'n-nās (112)The rope held on to and the bond that protects
ع-ص-مYaʿtaṣim bi'llāh (101) — iʿtaṣimū bi-ḥabli'llāhi jamīʿan (103)Singular and plural holding fast
ف-ر-قLā tafarraqū (103) — tafarraqū (105)The ban and the breach
ف-ش-لAn tafshalā (122) — fashiltum (152)An approach and a coming to pass
و-ه-نLā tahinū (139) — mā wahanū (146)The prohibition and the instance
ط-و-ع / ع-ص-يAṭīʿu'llāh (32, 132) — ʿaṣaytum (152)Command, command, breach
ح-س-ب78, 142, 169, 178, 180, 188 — and ḥasbuna'llāh (173)Six "supposings", one "sufficing"
أَمْر128, 152, 154 (twice), 159The affair quarrelled over, the owner of the decision, the affair to consult on
مِنْ عِندِ37, 78, 126, 165The naming of the source — the last occurrence "from yourselves"
مِنۢ بَعْدِ مَا19 (ʿilm), 61 (ʿilm), 105 (bayyināt), 152 (mā tuḥibbūn)Knowledge and success, in the same pattern
بَعْدَ إِيمَٰنِ-86, 90, 100, 106Turning back: statement, ruling, warning, question
أَعْقَاب144 (twice), 149Turning back on the heels
ثَمَنًا قَلِيلًا77, 187 — and negated at 199The contrast that closes the sūra's line on the People of the Book
مَا كَانَ لِ-Li-basharin (79) — li-nabiyyin (161)The pattern of impossibility, on two subjects
مَاإِلَّا (restriction)65, 126, 144, 185The pattern of limitation
أُخْرِجَتْ / أُوتُوا۟ لِلنَّاسِLi'n-nās — 96, 104 (indirectly), 110, 138, 187The note of breadth
ل-و-يYalwūna alsinatahum (78) — lā talwūna ʿalā aḥad (153)The tongue is twisted, the neck is not turned
ق-و-مQāʾiman bi'l-qisṭ (18), qāʾimā (75), maqām (97), ummatun qāʾima (113)The same root, four separate pieces of work
ص-ب-ر + ت-ق-يIn taṣbirū wa tattaqū — 120, 125, 186Three times, the same pair
أ-ص-رAkhadhtum ʿalā dhālikum iṣrī (81)The opposite of al-Baqara 2/286
ف-ل-حAl-mufliḥūn (104) — tufliḥūn (130, 200)The last word of the sūra
ٱلْأَعْلَوْن139 — with the note in kuntum muʾminīnQualified; one verse later limited by nudāwiluhā
د-و-لNudāwiluhā bayna'n-nās (140)The key to the sūra's reading of defeat
أَمْر بِٱلْمَعْرُوف104, 110, 114The third for a community from among the People of the Book
ٱلْأَمَانَة / أَدَاءYuʾaddihī ilayk (75 — twice)The returning of a trust, with a division
خ-ز-يAkhzaytah (192) — lā tukhzinā (194)A ruling and a prayer
غ-ر-رMatāʿu'l-ghurūr (185) — lā yaghurrannaka (196)The two faces of being deceived
ق-ل-بQulūb (many) — inqalabtum (144), tanqalibū (149), inqalabū (174), taqallub (196)One of the densest roots in the sūra

The points where the blocks join

LinkWhereWhat
I → IIIMin baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilm (19) → (61, 105)The same note in three blocks
III → IVArbāb (64) → arbāb (80) → iʿtaṣimū (101, 103)Hierarchy and holding fast
IV → VLā tafarraqū (103) → tanāzaʿtum (152) → la'nfaḍḍū (159)Three states of scattering
Within VTafshalā (122) → fashiltum (152) → ʿafā ʿankum (152, 155)Failing and pardon, three times
V → VIIShāwirhum fi'l-amr (159) ← tanāzaʿtum fi'l-amr (152)The same construction, two separate works
I ↔ VIIŪlu'l-albāb (7) ↔ ūlu'l-albāb (190)The two ends of the sūra
III ↔ VIIThamanan qalīlā (77) ↔ lā yashtarūna… thamanan qalīlā (199)The close of the line

Links within the series — what this section relied on

SubjectWhat was relied on
Ḥanīfal-Rūm 30/30, al-Baqara 2/135
Islām and the distinction of īmān / islāmal-Ḥujurāt 49/14
The division of the People of the Bookal-ʿAnkabūt 29/47, al-Raʿd 13/36
Al-birr and the measure of spendingal-Baqara 2/177, 2/267
The verb nālaal-Ḥajj 22/37, al-Aḥzāb 33/25
The rulings of pilgrimageal-Baqara 2/196-203, al-Ḥajj 22/26-33
Amn and the Houseal-Baqara 2/125-126
Al-ʿurwa al-wuthqāal-Baqara 2/256
Ḥaqqa + a genitiveal-Ḥajj 22/74, 22/78
The knitting together of heartsal-Anfāl 8/63
Min baʿdi mā jāʾahumal-Baqara 2/213, al-Shūrā 42/14, al-Jāthiya 45/17
Ummatan wasaṭanal-Baqara 2/143
Dhilla and maskanaal-Baqara 2/61
The limit of responsibilityal-Qaṣaṣ 28/56 (the table was widened)
Ribāal-Baqara 2/275-281
The root ك-ظ-مal-Qalam 68/48, al-Zukhruf 43/17-18, Yūsuf 12/84, Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/18
Ghayẓal-Mulk
The breadth of the gardenal-Ḥadīd 57/21
The root و-ه-نLuqmān 31/14, al-ʿAnkabūt 29/41, al-Anfāl 8/18, Muḥammad 47/35
The limit on wa antumu'l-aʿlawnMuḥammad 47/35
The root د-و-لal-Ḥashr 59/7
Inqilāb ʿalā ʿaqibayhal-Baqara 2/143
The angels and the note of bushrāal-Anfāl 8/10
Nuʿās and amanaal-Anfāl 8/11
The chain tanāzuʿfashalal-Anfāl 8/46
The root ف-ض-ضal-Jumuʿa 62/11
Shūrāal-Shūrā 42/38, 42/36
Bāʾa / bawwaʾaal-Ḥajj 22/26
The state of those slainal-Baqara 2/154
The instrument of intimidational-Zumar 39/36
Ūlu'l-albābal-Zumar 39/18, al-Raʿd 13/19, Yūsuf 12/111, Ibrāhīm 14/52, al-Fajr 89/5
Mā khalaqta hādhā bāṭilāal-Anbiyāʾ 21/16, Ṣād 38/27
The lifting of the distinction of sexal-Aḥzāb 33/35
The construction lā khawfun ʿalayhimal-Baqara 2/38, 2/62, 2/112
Imlāʾ (the granting of a term)al-Ḥajj 22/44, 22/48
"A goodly loan" and needinessal-Baqara 2/245
The word millaal-Baqara 2/130-135
The root qaṣaṣYūsuf, al-Qaṣaṣ
Common ground and muslimūnal-ʿAnkabūt 29/46

Disagreements on which no preference is adopted in this commentary

In the places below more than one view has been transmitted, given in a table, and none of them preferred.

VerseThe disagreement
61The reference of the pronoun in fīhi
73The attachment of the clause an yuʾtā aḥadun
79The derivation of the word rabbānī
81The reading and syntax of lamā / limā
83The extent of ṭawʿan wa karhan
93Which food was forbidden
96The relation of the word Bakka to Mecca
97The syntactic relation of āyātun bayyināt to maqāmu Ibrāhīm
97Whether the sentence wa man dakhalahū kāna āminā is a statement or a performative
97The extent of istiṭāʿaa legal disagreement, not entered
102The measure of the construction ḥaqqa tuqātih
103What ḥablu'llāh is
104Whether the min in minkum is partitive or explicative
110The time conveyed by kuntum
110The syntax of the three verbal sentences (state / ground / explanation)
128What aw yatūba ʿalayhim attaches to
130Whether aḍʿāfan muḍāʿafatan narrows the ruling — no legal conclusion drawn
140The reading qarḥ / qurḥ and the difference in sense
142The sense of the verb yaʿlam
146The sense and the reading of ribbiyyūn
153The syntax of the construction ghamman bi-ghamm
159The kind of the in fa-bimā
161The reading yaghulla / yughalla
175The syntax of the sentence yukhawwifu awliyāʾah
186The sense of the construction ʿazmu'l-umūr
200With whom ṣābirū is
200The sense of rābiṭūno legal conclusion drawn

The measure the sūra leaves

The sūra is a text that does the same work in three separate fields, and this was recorded in the introduction: in reading the text (7), in speaking with the other (64), in reading defeat (152, 165) — in all three what is asked is that a person see his own share.

And at the end of two hundred verses two notes the sūra itself sets down stand out, and both are from the text itself:

One. No blanket ruling is built about any community. Beside its heaviest statements the sūra each time places a min, an exception, a division or the note of the interrogative mood. And in two places (113-115 and 199) it writes this plainly.

Two. Superiority is not given as a possession. The sentence wa antumu'l-aʿlawn is tied to a condition (139), is limited one verse later by nudāwiluhā bayna'n-nās (140), and the sentence kuntum khayra ummatin is tied to three verbs (110).

Across two hundred verses the sūra tells a community how it is to build itself; and beside everything it builds it places a caveat.


Where this section does not speak with certainty

At many points throughout the text definite language was deliberately not used; the reader needs to know these.

  • In the Uḥud block (121-179) no personal name was given, no detail of any report was transmitted, no unit or tribe was named. The reason was written plainly in the text: the verses are without names from beginning to end. The only thing recorded is that the classical sources identify this block as Uḥud and that this identification is widespread. No word-for-word ascription to any particular report was made.
  • The same limit was kept in the discussion of the mutual imprecation (61) and was written plainly there. That limit was not returned to in this section.
  • At 3/85 and at 3/19 the debate about excommunication was not entered. In both places it was recorded that what the verses give is a measure, and that applying the measure to persons is not the work of this commentary.
  • At 3/110 no conclusion of superiority for any people, race or state was drawn, and it was shown from three separate places that this is not a sensitivity brought in from outside but the verse's own word order. Present-day politics was not entered.
  • No unconditional superiority was drawn from the construction wa antumu'l-aʿlawn at 3/139; the limit set at 47/35 in Muḥammad was kept exactly, and the verse's own conditional note (in kuntum muʾminīn) and the note of the following verse (nudāwiluhā bayna'n-nās) were shown.
  • At 3/75, 3/112 and 3/118 no blanket ruling was built about any religious or ethnic group. In all three the verse's own note of extent (a division, an exception, a list of grounds) was shown from the text.
  • At 3/96-97 no legal ruling was issued. The extent of istiṭāʿa, the detail of the rulings of pilgrimage, and the conclusions drawn from the sentence man dakhalahū kāna āminā were named in the language of transmission; al-Baqara 2/196-203 and al-Ḥajj 22/26-33 were relied on.
  • At 3/130 no legal ruling was issued about ribā. Whether the note aḍʿāfan muḍāʿafatan narrows the ruling was given as two views; al-Baqara 2/275-281 was relied on.
  • At 3/200 no legal conclusion was drawn from the verb rābiṭū. Four readings were given in a table and no preference was made.
  • At 3/124-125 no description whatever was entered of the form or the presence of the angels or of the sense of the attribute musawwimīn. The two attributes the verse gives were taken as sufficient.
  • At 3/169-171 nothing the text does not say about the nature of the life of those slain was said. The limit set at 2/154 in al-Baqara was kept exactly; the four verbs the verse gives (aḥyāʾ, yurzaqūn, fariḥīn, yastabshirūn) were taken as sufficient.
  • The reports about who spoke the saying at 3/181 were not entered, and no personal or group name was given.
  • Where differences of recitation were recorded (3/81, 3/140, 3/161) no reciter's name was written, because it cannot be given with certainty.
  • In the discussion of the verse-endings no claim about numbers or reckoning was made; this was recorded in the introduction to the sūra as well.
  • The link drawn between the root picture of the word tufliḥūn at 3/200 (to cleave) and the sūra as a whole was given as an observation about the word; it was not claimed to be a deliberate choice.
  • My own inferences were marked off throughout the text with the phrases "I record this as my own reading" or "I record this as an observation", and it was stated that they are not binding. None of them is a transmitted report.

73 sections

  1. Āl ʿImrān 3:1-2
  2. Āl ʿImrān 3:3-4
  3. Āl ʿImrān 3:5-6
  4. Āl ʿImrān 3:7
  5. Āl ʿImrān 3:8-9
  6. Āl ʿImrān 3:10-13
  7. Āl ʿImrān 3:14-17
  8. Āl ʿImrān 3:18
  9. Āl ʿImrān 3:19
  10. Āl ʿImrān 3:20-25
  11. Āl ʿImrān 3:26-27
  12. Āl ʿImrān 3:28-30
  13. Āl ʿImrān 3:31-32
  14. Āl ʿImrān 3:33-34
  15. Āl ʿImrān 3:35-36
  16. Āl ʿImrān 3:37
  17. Āl ʿImrān 3:38-41
  18. Āl ʿImrān 3:42-44
  19. Āl ʿImrān 3:45-47
  20. Āl ʿImrān 3:48-51
  21. Āl ʿImrān 3:52-54
  22. Āl ʿImrān 3:55-58
  23. Āl ʿImrān 3:59-60
  24. Āl ʿImrān 3:61
  25. Āl ʿImrān 3:62-63
  26. Āl ʿImrān 3:64
  27. Āl ʿImrān 3:65-68
  28. Āl ʿImrān 3:69-74
  29. Āl ʿImrān 3:75-76
  30. Āl ʿImrān 3:77-78
  31. Āl ʿImrān 3:79-80
  32. Āl ʿImrān 3:81-82
  33. Āl ʿImrān 3:83-85
  34. Āl ʿImrān 3:86-91
  35. Āl ʿImrān 3:92
  36. Āl ʿImrān 3:93-95
  37. Āl ʿImrān 3:96-97
  38. Āl ʿImrān 3:98-101
  39. Āl ʿImrān 3:102-103
  40. Āl ʿImrān 3:104-105
  41. Āl ʿImrān 3:106-109
  42. Āl ʿImrān 3:110
  43. Āl ʿImrān 3:111-112
  44. Āl ʿImrān 3:113-115
  45. Āl ʿImrān 3:116-120
  46. Āl ʿImrān 3:121-122
  47. Āl ʿImrān 3:123-127
  48. Āl ʿImrān 3:128-129
  49. Āl ʿImrān 3:130-132
  50. Āl ʿImrān 3:133-136
  51. Āl ʿImrān 3:137-138
  52. Āl ʿImrān 3:139-141
  53. Āl ʿImrān 3:142-143
  54. Āl ʿImrān 3:144
  55. Āl ʿImrān 3:145-148
  56. Āl ʿImrān 3:149-151
  57. Āl ʿImrān 3:152-153
  58. Āl ʿImrān 3:154-155
  59. Āl ʿImrān 3:156-158
  60. Āl ʿImrān 3:159
  61. Āl ʿImrān 3:160-164
  62. Āl ʿImrān 3:165-168
  63. Āl ʿImrān 3:169-171
  64. Āl ʿImrān 3:172-175
  65. Āl ʿImrān 3:176-179
  66. Āl ʿImrān 3:180-182
  67. Āl ʿImrān 3:183-186
  68. Āl ʿImrān 3:187-189
  69. Āl ʿImrān 3:190-191
  70. Āl ʿImrān 3:192-194
  71. Āl ʿImrān 3:195
  72. Āl ʿImrān 3:196-198
  73. Āl ʿImrān 3:199-200